Home

MIF Reference Online Manual

1. T fas 3 D lt o ou 2 2a a c 3 D 3 Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 252 Facet Formats for Graphics External graphic insets are best suited to situations in which users are documenting projects in progress or in which the document s graphics are updated by external sources for example by a database An external graphic inset file contains a MIFFile statement and an ImportObject statement The ImportObject statement lists the graphic inset file s pathname the name of the inset editor that created it and all of its facets An external graphic inset file has the following format lt MIFFile 7 00 gt lt ImportObject lt ImportObEditor inset_editor_name gt lt ImportObFileDI device_independent_pathname gt facet_name amp data_type amp facet_data facet_name amp data_type amp facet_data EndInset gt A MIF ImportObEditor statement names the main editor for application specific facets in the graphic inset file AMIF ImportObFileDI statement specifies the device independent pathname for the graphic inset file For more information on device independent pathnames see the section Device independent pathnames on page 8 Internal graphic insets An internal graphic inset is entirely contained within FrameMaker document file Once the link is established the graphic inset data exists only in FrameMaker document Users can access the graphic only through FrameMaker
2. Op code Description of op code Location 0x2C Font style page 277 0x2D Font color page 277 0x2E Font weight page 277 0x2F Font angle page 278 0x30 Font variation page 278 0x31 Font horizontal kerning page 278 0x32 Font vertical kerning page 278 0x33 Font word spread value page 279 Object op codes Op code Description of op code Location 0x80 Ellipse page 279 0x81 Polygon page 279 0x82 Polyline page 280 0x83 Rectangle page 280 0x84 Rounded rectangle page 281 0x85 Arc page 281 0x86 Framelmage graphic imported within this graphic page 281 0x87 Beginning of text line page 282 0x88 Text in text line page 282 0x89 End of text line page 283 Ox8A Beginning of clipping rectangle page 283 0x8B End of clipping rectangle page 283 0x8C FrameVector graphic imported within this graphic page 283 Data types used in specifications The following table lists the data types used for the specifications in this appendix Type Definition byte unsigned 8 bit integer short unsigned 16 bit integer long signed 32 bit integer unsigned long unsigned 32 bit integer metric signed 32 bit fixed point the first 16 bits represent the digits preceding the decimal the last 16 bits rep resent the digits following the decimal Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 271 FrameVector Facet Format Type Definition string string of characters beginning and ending with a null character the string is preceded by
3. The following table contains an example of each n ary operator Each example shows two operands Example MathFullForm statement x lt MathFullForm atop char x char x gt xeXx lt MathFullForm approx char x char x gt xNx lt MathFullForm cap char x char x gt xx lt MathFullForm cdot char x char x gt xX x lt MathFullForm comma char x char x gt xex lt MathFullForm cong char x char x gt xUx lt MathFullForm cup char x char x gt x x lt MathFullForm equal char x char x gt x x lt MathFullForm equiv char x char x gt x x lt MathFullForm geq char x char x gt Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 191 MIF Equation Statements Example MathFullForm statement x x lt MathFullForm gg char x char x gt x gt x lt MathFullForm greaterthan char x char x gt xEx lt MathFullForm in char x char x gt xx lt MathFullForm jotdot char x char x gt xx lt MathFullForm leftarrow char x char x gt x lt x lt MathFullForm Leftarrow char x char x gt x lt x lt MathFullForm leq char x char x gt nex lt MathFullForm lessthan char x char x gt x lt MathFullForm list char x char x gt XX lt MathFullForm ll char x char x gt xex lt MathFullForm lrarrow char x char x gt xex lt MathFullForm LRa
4. Verbose statement The verbose statement turns on a debugging mode for MIF It can appear anywhere at the top level or within any statement Syntax lt Verbose boolean gt Yes turns on debugging information Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 55 MIF Document Statements Usage When Verbose mode is on the MIF interpreter writes detailed stream of processing descriptions to a window In UNIX versions of FrameMaker these descriptions appear in the window from which FrameMaker was started To display messages in Windows and Macintosh versions you must turn on Show File Translation Errors in FrameMaker s Preferences dialog box The messages appear in a console window in Windows and in an Error Log window on the Macintosh The processing descriptions can be quite long but may be essential for debugging a program that creates MIF for input to FrameMaker A Verbose statement can occur unnested or within markup statements as explained later in this chapter A Verbose statement remains in effect until the interpreter encounters another Verbose statement that changes the setting Comment statement The Comment statement identifies an optional comment Syntax lt Comment comment text gt Identifies a comment Usage Comments can appear within Comment statements or they can follow a number sign When it encounters a number sign the MIF interpreter ignores all text until the end of the line including
5. Cannot find table ID n MIF cannot match lt ATb1 x gt withanearlier lt Tb1l lt Tb1ID x gt gt statement Cannot find text frame ID 11 The text frame ID specified ina Text Rect ID statement has no corresponding defined text frame Cannot open filename Make sure that the file exists and that you have read access to it then try again Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 This message Means Cannot store inset s facets The MIF file contains a graphic inset but the MIF interpreter can t store the graphic inset in the document There might be an error in the MIF syntax or there might not be enough temporary disk space available In UNIX versions try to increase the space available in your home directory or the usr tmp directory and try again In the Macintosh or Windows versions try quit ting other applications and closing other open windows then start FrameMaker again Char out of range character_value Condition settings must not change between lt XRef gt and lt XRefEnd gt A character ina Char statement or a character expressed using x ina string is out of range You cannot change a condition tag setting in the middle of a cross reference Make sure the entire cross reference is con tained in one condition setting DashedPattern statement has no DashedSegment state ments ADashedPattern statement gives DashedStylea value of Dashed but has no DashedSegment statement
6. Table footnote numbering lt BTbIFNoteNumStyle keyword gt lt BTblFNoteLabels string gt Style of table footnote numbering keywordcan be one of Arabic UCRoman LCRoman UCAlpha LCAlpha anjiNumeric ZenArabic ZenuUCAlpha ZenLCAlpha anjikazu BusinessKazu Custom When BTb1FNoteNumSt ye is set to Custom this is the string to use lt BTblFNoteComputeMethod keyword gt Table footnote numbering either value causes the component to read the numbering style from its document keywordcan be one of Restart use numbering style specified in the component ReadF romF ile use numbering style set for the component s docu ment Book component defaults lt DefaultPrint boolean gt Yes adds file to Print scroll list in Print Files in Book dialog box file is printed saved for compatibility with versions earlier than 6 0 lt DefaultApply boolean gt Yes adds file to Update scroll list in the Import Formats dialog box file is updated saved for compatibility with versions earlier than 6 0 lt DefaultDerive boolean gt Yes adds file to Generate scroll list in the Generate Update Book dialog box lt NumPages integer gt The number of pages in the components document as calculated the last time the book was updated End of BookComponent statement BookxXRef statement The BookXRef statement defines the cross reference formats for the book Syntax lt BookXRef
7. You can change the appearance of a built in math element although you cannot change the element s type or behavior For example to redefine the built in inverse sine function asin so that it appears as sin add the redefined element to the Math Catalog as follows lt DMathCatalog lt DMathOp Overrides The name of the built in operator as it appears in MIF lt DMathOpName asin gt Forces lookup from the reference page lt DMathOpTLineOverride Yes gt gt end of DMathOpOverrides gt end of DMathCatalog Redefine the appearance of the element in a reference frame as follows lt Page Create a named reference page lt PageType ReferencePage gt lt PageTag FrameMathl gt Create a named unanchored frame lt Frame Online manual lt FrameType NotAnchored gt ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 177 MIF Equation Statements The name of the built in element as it appears in the Equations palette lt Tag Inverse Sine gt Define the element in the first text line in the frame lt TextLine Apply a new font style and position to change the appearance of the math element lt Font lt FTag gt lt FWeight Regular gt gt end of Font lt String sin gt lt Font lt FTag gt lt FWeight Regular gt lt FPosition FSuperscript gt gt end of Font lt String 1 gt gt end of TextLine gt end of Frame gt end of Page When you create the
8. lt MIFFile 7 00 gt Generated by StockWatcher identifies this as a MIF file lt Tbls lt Tbl lt TblID 1 gt This table s ID is 1 lt TblFormat lt TblTag Format A gt Forces a lookup in the Table Catalog with the following exceptions lt TblColumn lt TblColumnNum 0 gt Shrink wrap the first column so it s between 0 and 2 inches wide lt TblColumnWidthA 0 2 gt gt lt TblColumn lt TblColumnNum 1 gt Make 2nd column 1 inch wide This establishes a minimum width for the columns Online manual lt TblColumnWidth 1 gt gt lt TblColumn lt TblColumnNum 2 gt Shrink wrap the third column to the width of its heading cell See CellAffectsColumnWidthA statement below lt TblColumnWidthA 0 2 gt gt gt end of TblFormat The table instance has three columns lt TblNumColumns 3 gt lt EqualizeWidths Make the width of the second and third columns equal to the larger of the two However the columns cannot be wider than 2 inches or narrower than 1 inch lt TblColumnNum 1 gt lt TblColumnNum 2 gt gt end of EqualizeColWidth lt TbITitle lt TbITitleContent lt Para Forces lookup in Paragraph Catalog lt PgfTag TableTitle gt lt ParaLine lt String StockWatch gt gt end of ParaLine gt end of Para gt end of TblTitleContent gt end of TblTitle lt TblH The heading lt Row The heading row lt Cell lt CellContent lt Para Cell in co
9. on page 179 lt MathLineBreak dimension gt Allows automatic line breaks after this position lt MathOrigin X Y gt Position of equation in current frame or page lt MathAlignment keyword gt Alignment of equation within ShapeRect keyword can be one of Left Center Right Manual lt MathSize keyword gt Equation size defined on page 173 keyword can be one of MathLarge MathMedium MathSmall gt End of Math statement Usage Values of the ShapeRect statement specify the coordinates and size of the bounding rectangle before it is rotated The equation is rotated by the value specified in an Angle statement The MathFullForm string defines the mathe matical properties of the equation For a complete description see MathFullForm statement next Whenever you save a document as a MIF file using the Save As command FrameMaker writes all the Math substate ments except ObColor to the file It writes an ObColor statement only when the equation is in a color other than black The obColor statement specifies the color for the entire equation object To specify color for an individual element within an equation use the formatting code qstringq see MathFullForm statement syntax on page 179 If you are writing an output filter for converting FrameMaker equations to a format used by another application you might be able to ignore some of the Math substatements You don t need MIF statements for FrameMaker s math f
10. xaf xcO You can also use the Char statement to include certain predefined special characters in a ParaLine statement see Char statement on page 123 Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 8 Introduction Device independent pathnames Several MIF statements require pathnames as values You should supply a device independent pathname so that files can easily be transported across different system types Because of MIF parsing requirements you must use the following syntax to supply a pathname lt code gt name lt code gt name lt code gt name where name is the name of a component in the file s path and code identifies the role of the component in the path The following table lists codes and their meanings Code Meaning r Root of UNIX file tree UNIX only v Volume or drive Macintosh and Windows h Host Apollo only c Component u Up one level in the file tree When you specify a device independent pathname in a MIF string you must precede any right angle brackets gt with backslashes as shown in the syntax above Absolute pathnames An absolute pathname shows the location of a file beginning with the root directory volume or drive The following table specifies device independent absolute pathnames for the different versions of FrameMaker In this version The pathname appears as this MIF string UNIX lt r gt lt c gt MyDirectory lt c gt MySu
11. Arc statement The Arc statement describes an arc It can appear anywhere at the top level or in a Frame or Page statement Syntax lt Arc Generic object statements Information common to all objects see page 101 lt HeadCap keyword gt Type of head cap for lines and arcs keywordcan be one of ArrowHead Butt Round Square lt TailCap keyword gt Type of tail cap for lines and arcs keywordcan be one of ArrowHead Butt Round Square lt ArrowStyle gt See ArrowStyle statement on page 106 Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 106 MIF Document Statements lt ArcRect L T W H gt Underlying ellipse rectangle lt ArcTheta dimension gt Start angle lt ArcDTheta dimension gt Arc angle length End of Arc statement Usage The arc is a segment of an ellipse whose bounding rectangle is defined in ArcRect ArcTheta specifies the starting point of the arc in degrees Zero corresponds to twelve o clock 90 to three o clock 180 to six o clock and 270 to nine o clock ArcDTheta corresponds to the length of the arc Positive and negative values correspond to clockwise and counterclockwise extents ArrowStyle statement The ArrowStyle statement defines both the head cap at the starting point and the tail cap at the ending point of lines and arcs The arrow style property statements can appear in any order in an ArrowStyle statement For a
12. EPSI amp v amp PS Adobe 2 0 EPSF 2 0 n amp BoundingBox 0 0 18 18 n amp Pages 0 n amp Creator contr2 n amp CreationDate Tue Apr 25 16 09 56 1989 n amp EndComments n Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 259 EPSI Facet Format amp BeginPreview 18 18 1 18 n amp FFFFCO n amp FFFFCO n amp FFFFCO n amp FFFFCO n amp FFFFCO n amp FFFFCO n amp FFFFCO n amp FFFFCO n amp FFFFCO n amp FFFFCO n amp FFFFCO n amp FFFFCO n amp FFFFCO n amp FFFFCO n amp FFFFCO n amp FFFFCO n amp FFFFCO n amp FFFFCO n amp EndPreview n amp EndProlog n amp Page one 1 n amp 0 0 moveto 18 0 rlineto 0 18 rlineto 18 0 rlineto closepath 0 setgray n amp fill n amp Trailer n EndInset gt End ImportObject Online manual 260 Framelmage Facet Format FramelImage is a format for bitmap graphics that is recognized by FrameMaker on all platforms The specification of the FrameImage format is documented in this appendix Imported graphics can contain graphic data in FrameImage format This data is called the FrameImage facet of the graphic FrameMaker can use this facet to display and print the graphic For more information about facets see Facet Formats for Graphics In a MIF file the FrameImage facet is contained in the Import Object statement For more information about the statement see ImportObject statement on page 110 Specifica
13. e Create a tagged text flow that is linked to the body page and contains all the document s text The MIF code shown in this section is also in the sample file snglpage mif To create the master page To create a master page layout use the Page statement to create the page and use the Text Rect statement to create the text frame To specify the number of text columns in the text frame use the TRNumColumns statement By default if the text frame s specification does not include this statement the text frame has only one column This example sets up a right master page with a text frame containing one text column lt MIFFile 7 00 gt Hand generated lt Document lt DPageSize 7 5 9 0 gt Set the document page size lt DTwoSides No gt Make this a single sided document gt end of Document lt Page Create a right master page lt PageType RightMasterPage gt lt PageTag Right gt lt TextRect Set up a text frame lt ID 1 gt Give the text frame a unique ID lt Pen 15 gt Set the pen style lt Fill 15 gt Set the fill pattern none lt ShapeRect 2 1 5 7 5 gt Specify the text frame size lt TRNumColumns 1 gt Specify number of text columns lt TRColumnGap 0 0 gt Specify gap between text columns gt end of TextRect gt end of Page The ID statement assigns a unique ID number to this text frame You must give text frames a unique ID in a MIF file other objects that require unique IDs are anch
14. lt ElementEnd UnorderedList gt gt gt end of Para PrefixEnd and SuffixBegin statements The PrefixEnd statement appears after the ElementBegin statement and any prefix strings the element has Every thing between the ElementBegin statement and the PrefixEnd statement is treated as the element prefix The PrefixEnd statement does not appear when the element has no prefix The SuffixBegin statement appears before the element suffix string which is followed by the ElementEnd statement Everything between the SuffixBegin statement and the ElementEnd statement is treated as the element suffix The ElementEnd statement does not appear when the element has no suffix Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 164 MIF Statements for Structured Documents and Books XML data for structured documents Document and book statements In versions 7 0 and later FrameMaker supports XML import and export The following statements store information necessary to properly save a document or book as XML Statements that begin with pxm1 are document state ments and statements that begin with Bxm1 are book statements Syntax lt DXm1DocType string gt lt BXmI1DocType string gt The name given to the XML document type lt DXmlSystemld string gt lt DXmlSystemld string gt The system identifier for the XML document type lt DXmlEncoding string gt lt BXmlEncoding string gt The XML encoding parameter that was specifi
15. lt PgfTag tagstring gt Applies format from Paragraph Catalog lt Pgf gt Overrides Paragraph Catalog format as needed see page 58 gt End of Tb1TitlePgfl1 statement lt TblTitleGap dimension gt Gap between title and top or bottom row lt TblNumByColumn boolean gt Autonumber paragraphs in cells Yes numbers down each column and No numbers across each row Ruling properties lt TblColumnRuling tagstring gt Ruling style for most columns value must match a ruling style name specified in the RulingCatalog statement A b1XColumnNum integer gt Number of column with a right side that uses the Tb 1 XColumnRul ing statement lt Tb1XColumnRuling tagstring gt Ruling style for the right side of column Tb1XColumnNum A blBodyRowRuling tagstring gt Default ruling style for most body rows A blXRowRuling tagstring gt Exception ruling style for every nth body row lt TblRulingPeriod integer gt Number of body rows after which Tb1XRowRuling should appear A blHFRowRuling tagstring gt Ruling style between rows in the heading and footing lt TblSeparatorRuling tagstring gt Ruling style for rule between the last heading row and first body row and also between the last body row and the first footing row Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 70 MIF Document Statements lt Tb1LRuling tagstring gt Left outs
16. lt XRefDef string gt Cross reference format definition lt XRefSrcText string gt Text for which to search lt XRefSrcIsElem boolean gt Yes means the source of the cross reference is an element from a structured document lt XRefSrcFile pathname gt File in which to search for source text for pat hname syntax see page 8 End of BookXRef statement Online manual BookUpdateReferences statement ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 143 MIF Book File Statements The BookUpdateReferences statement specifies whether or not cross references and text insets are automatically updated when the book file is opened Syntax lt BookUpdateReferences boolean gt Yes specifies that cross references and text insets are automati cally updated when the book file is opened Online manual lg MIF Statements for Structured Documents and Books This chapter describes the MIF statements that define structured documents created with FrameMaker For more information about creating and editing structured documents see the FrameMaker User Guide Structural element definitions A structured document is divided into logical units called structural elements Elements have tags or names that indicate their role in the document For example a document might contain Section Para List and Item elements Fach element has a definition that specifies its valid contents such as text and graphics A structured
17. p Sales Rep Name Darrell Dexter Phone 800 555 1212 Discount Selection Select All Offerings By Coffee Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 Examples When the sales representative clicks Publish a database procedure scans the database retrieves the requested infor mation and writes a MIF file that contains all of the information in a fully formatted document The final document looks like this GREEN COFFEE PRICE LIST Darel Dee GREEN paia nla Primo Coffee Distributors 800 555 1212 Offerings as of August 12 1992 The data from the database is published as a FrameMaker table The database procedure makes one pass through the records in the database and writes the contents of each record in a row of the table The procedure then creates a TextFlow statement that contains the text that appears above the table and creates an ATb1 statement to refer to the table instance You can set up a report generator like the previous example by following these general steps 1 Create the template for the final report in FrameMaker Design the master pages and body pages for the document and create paragraph and character formats You can include graphics such as a company logo on the master page 2 Create a table format for the report Specify the table position column format shading and title format Store the format in the Table Catalog 3 When the document has the appearance you want save it as a
18. ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 MIF Book File Statements lt PageNumbering keyword gt Page numbering keyword can be one of Cont inue default Restart ReadFromFile Paragraph numbering lt PgfNumbering keyword gt Paragraph numbering keyword can be one of Cont inue default Restart ReadFromFile Footnote numbering lt BFNoteStartNum integer gt Starting number for footnote numbering lt BFNoteNumStyle keyword gt Style of footnote numbering keywordcan be one of Arabic UCRoman LCRoman UCAlpha LCAlpha KanjiNumeric ZenArabic ZenUCAlpha ZenLCAlpha Kanjikazu BusinessKazu Custom lt BFNoteLabels string gt When BFNoteNumStyle is set to Custom this is the string to use lt BFNoteComputeMethod keyword gt Footnote numbering keywordcan be one of Cont inue continue numbering from previous component in book Restart restart numbering typically to restart per flow according to BFNoteRestart setting PerPage restart footnote numbering for each page overrides BFNoteRestart setting ReadF romF ile use numbering set for the component s document lt BFNoteRestart keyword gt When to restart numbering if BFNot eComput eMet hod is set to Restart keywordcan be one of PerF 1ow restart footnote numbering for each flow in the document PerPage restart footnote numbering for each page Online manual 141 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 142 MIF Book File Statements
19. CR Table Heading Row SEND PACKET vDoc lt TbIH lt Row lt RowMaxHeight 14 0 DQ gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt Cell lt CellContent lt Para lt PgfTag CellHeading gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt ParaLine lt String Ref No gt gt gt gt gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt Cell lt CellContent lt Para lt PgfTag CellHeading gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt ParaLine lt String Coffee gt gt gt gt gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt Cell lt CellContent lt Para lt PgfTag CellHeading gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt ParaLine lt String Bags gt gt gt gt gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt Cell lt CellContent lt Para lt PgfTag CellHeading gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt ParaLine lt String Status gt gt gt gt gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt Cell lt CellContent lt Para lt PgfTag CellHeading gt CR Retail and Discount prices are conditional SEND PACKET vDoc lt ParaLine lt Conditional lt InCondition Retail gt gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt String Price per Bag gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt Conditional lt InCondition Discount gt gt lt String Discount Price gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt Unconditional gt gt gt gt gt gt gt CR Table Body FIRST RECORD Inventory SEND PACKET vDoc lt TbIBody CR Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 231 Examples For n 1 Records in selection Inventory Change shading of row depending on inventory s
20. Never never Always always WhenRequired when it is required lt BUseInitStructure boolean gt Yes means structured FrameMaker inserts initial structure for new elements lt BSGMLAppName string gt The name of the SGML application associated with the document For information on registering SGML applications see the online manual FrameMaker Structure Application Developer s Guide lt BSeparateInclusions boolean gt Yes means structured FrameMaker lists inclusions separately in the element catalog lt BFCLMaximums Upper change list limits Format change lists cannot increment proper ties beyond these values lt PgfFIndent dimension gt Maximum first indent allowed in book lt PgfLIndent dimension gt lt PgfRIndent dimension gt Maximum left indent allowed in book Maximum right indent allowed in book lt PgfSpBefore dimension gt Maximum space before allowed in book lt PgfSpAfter dimension gt Maximum space after allowed in book lt PgfLeading dimension gt Maximum leading allowed in book lt FSize dimension gt Maximum font size allowed in book lt FDW dimension gt Maximum character spread allowed in book lt TSX dimension gt Minimum horizontal position of tab stop lt PgfCellLMargin dimension gt Minimum left cell margin for first paragraph in a cell lt PgfCellBMargin dimension gt Minimum bottom cell margin for first paragrap
21. Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 76 MIF Document Statements Usage of MIF statements to calculate the width of a column is described in the following sections Determining table width When FrameMaker writes MIF files it uses Tp1ColumnWidth in the Tb1 statement to specify column width However filters that generate MIF files can use other statements to determine the table width This method Uses these statements To do this Fixed width Tbl1ColumnWidth Give a fixed value for column s width see page 70 Shrink wrap TblColumnWidthaA Fit a column within minimum and maximum values see page 71 Restricted Tb1ColumnWidthaA and CellAf Use particular cells to determine column width see page 75 fectsColumnWidthaA Proportional TblColumnWidthP Create a temporary value for a column width when filtering pro portional width columns from another application the MIF inter preter converts the value to a fixed width see page 70 and Calcu lating proportional width columns next Equalized EgualizeWidths and Tb1Col Apply the width of the widest column to specified columns in the GNUN same table see page 73 The table example in Creating an entire table on page 224 shows several ways to determine column width Calculating proportional width columns MIF uses this formula to calculate the width of proportional width columns Tare x PWidth The arguments have the following values n Value of Tbo1
22. Specifies subscript and superscript characters font size and position relative to baseline determined by Document sub statements see page 88 keywordcan be one of FNormal FSuperscript FSubscript Turns on outline style Macintosh version only lt F Shadow boolean gt Turns on shadow style Macintosh version only lt FPairkKern boolean gt Turns on pair kerning lt FCase keyword gt Applies capitalization style to string keywordcan be one of FAsTyped FSmallCaps FLowercase FUppercase Default font kerning information lt F DX percent gt Horizontal kern value for manual kerning expressed as per centage of an em positive value moves characters right and negative value moves characters left lt F DY percent gt Vertical kern value for manual kerning expressed as percent age of an em positive value moves characters down and neg ative value moves characters up lt F DW percent gt Spread value for space between characters expressed as per centage of an em positive value increases the space and neg ative value decreases the space lt F DWChange dimension gt Change to spread value for space between characters expressed as percentage of an em positive value increases the space and negative value decreases the space Default font miscellaneous information lt FLocked boolean gt Yes means the font is part of a text inset that obtains its for
23. The LineNum may be approximate because it represents the absolute line number in the file after all macros in the file have been expanded In addition if you open the MIF file in FrameMaker lines are wrapped and the line numbers may change The Message portion consists of one of the messages in the following table Italicized words characters for example n indicate variable words or values in a message List of MIF messages The tables in this section lists the MIF messages produced by the MIF interpreter and describes their meanings This message Means Skipping these chars The MIF file contains a syntax error or a MIF statement not sup orted in this version of FrameMaker FrameMaker ignores all MIF statements r MIF statements contained within the erroneous or unsupported MIF statement The ignored MIF statements are listed in the error message Done skipping A footnote cannot contain another footnote One footnote in the MIF file is embedded in another Bad parameter parameter The MIF file contains a syntax error Cannot connect to TRNext ID n The text frame ID specified ina TRNext statement has no cor responding defined text frame Cannot find anchored frame 7 The graphic frame ID specified in an AF rames statement has no corresponding defined graphic frame Cannot find footnote n The footnote ID specified in a FNote statement has no corre sponding defined footnote
24. UCAlpha LCAlpha lt DStartPage integer gt Starting page number Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 91 MIF Document Statements lt ContPageNum boolean gt Yes means continue page numbering from the previous document in the book Pagination lt DTwoSides boolean gt Yes specifies two sided layout lt DParity keyword gt Specifies whether first page is left or right page keyword can be one of FirstLeft FirstRight lt DPageRounding keyword gt lt DFrozenPages boolean gt Method for removing blank pages or modifying total page count before saving or printing keyword can be one of DeleteEmptyPages MakePageCountEven MakePageCountOdd DontChangePageCount Yes if Freeze Pagination is on Document format properties lt DSmartQuotesOn boolean gt Use curved left and right quotation marks lt DSmartSpacesOn boolean gt Prevents entry of multiple spaces lt DLinebreakChars string gt OK to break lines at these characters lt DPunctuationChars string gt Punctuation characters that FrameMaker does not strip from run in heads these characters override the default punctuation set in PgfRunInDefaultPunct see page 60 Conditional text defaults lt DShowAllConditions boolean gt Shows or hides all conditional text lt DDisplayOverrides boolean gt Turns format indicators of conditional text on or off Footnote properties lt DFN
25. Usage Use PgfFont within a Pgf statement to override the default font for the paragraph Use Font within a FontCatalog statement to define a font or in a Para statement to override the default character format Substatements in the Font and PgfFont statements are optional Like the Pgf substatements Font substatements reset the current font When the MIF interpreter reads a Font statement it continues using the character format properties until it either reads another Font statement or reads the end of the Para statement You can set the character format back to its previous state by providing an empty FTag statement A Font statement that does not supply all property substate ments inherits the current font state for those properties not supplied Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 66 MIF Document Statements For more information about creating and applying character formats in a MIF file see Creating and applying character formats on page 21 For more information about character formats in general see your user s manual Usage of some aspects of the PgfFont and Font statements is described in the following sections Locked fonts and text insets The FLocked statement does not correspond to any setting in the Character Designer The statement is used for text insets that retain formatting information from the source document If the lt FLocked Yes gt statement appears in a specific character format that character forma
26. choice char x char x gt x xx lt MathFullForm cmut char x char x gt xxx lt MathFullForm cross char x char x gt xx lt MathFullForm div char x char x gt x x lt MathFullForm fract char x char x gt x x lt MathFullForm function char x char x gt ax lt MathFullForm function oppartial char x char x gt ax ae lt MathFullForm function optotal char x char x gt dx x x lt MathFullForm inprod char x char x gt limx lt MathFullForm lim char x char x gt x Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 190 MIF Equation Statements Example MathFullForm statement x lt MathFullForm over char x char x gt x re lt MathFullForm power char x char x gt x lt MathFullForm sn char x char x gt xx10 xEx lt MathFullForm sn ili char x char x gt a Partial and full differentials are a special case of function N ary operators N ary operators have two or more operand expressions When one of these operators has more than two operands FrameMaker displays an additional operand symbol for each operand expression For example the following table shows several forms of plus Example MathFullForm statement 1 2 lt MathFullForm plus num 1 1 num 2 2 gt 1 2 3 lt MathFullForm plus num 1 1 num 2 2 num 3 3 gt 1 2 3 4 lt MathFullForm plus num 1 1 num 2 2 num 3 3 num 4 4 gt
27. end of Font lt String CombinedFontStatement gt lt Font lt FTag gt lt FPlatformName M Osaka P gt Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 202 MIF Asian Text Processing Statements lt FWesternPlatformName M Times P gt lt FFamily Osaka gt lt FCombinedFontName MyCombinedFont gt lt FWeight Medium gt lt FEncoding JISX0208 ShiftJIS gt lt FLanguage Japanese gt lt FLocked No gt gt end of Font lt String ARR gt gt end of ParaLine gt end of Para Kumihan Tables Kumihan tables specify line composition rules for Japanese documents FrameMaker uses standard JIS 4051 Kumihan rules by default In most cases the JIS standard is fine but there are cases where corporate standards might differ from the JIS rules Kumihan tables are associated with a document To customize the Kumihan tables for a document you specify the tables in MIF Then you can import the MIF into an existing document or into a template you will use to create new documents Understanding Kumihan tables Kumihan tables specify line composition rules by assigning characters to various classes and then specifying four tables of rules that apply to the characters of each class The CharClass statement assigns each character to one of 25 classes For example the BegParentheses class and the EndParentheses Class are defined by the following MIF statements and they contain the characters shown in the statem
28. lt BookComponent Book components lt FileName pathname gt Generated file s device independent pathname for pathname syntax see page 8 lt FileNameSuffix string gt Suffix for the generated file Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 98 MIF Document Statements lt DeriveType keyword gt Type of generated file keywordcan be one of AML APL IDX IOA IOM IOS alphabetic marker list alphabetic paragraph list index author index index of markers subject index IR index of references LOF LOM LOP LOT list of figures list of markers list of paragraphs list of tables LR list of references TOC table of contents lt DeriveTag tagstring gt Tags to include in the generated file lt DeriveLinks boolean gt Yes automatically creates hypertext links in generated files End of BookComponent statement InitialAutoNums statement The InitialAutoNums statement controls the starting values for autonumber series in a document A MIF file can have only one Init ialAutoNums statement which must appear at the top level in the order given in MIF file layout on page 52 An autonumber format includes a series label to identify the type of autonumber series and one or more counters The InitialAutoNums statement initializes the counters so that series that continue across files in a book are numbered correctly Any statement that increments th
29. lt Document Document properties lt DNextUnique ID gt Window properties Refers to the next object witha lt Unique ID gt statement generated by FrameMaker and should not be used by filters lt DViewRect X Y W H gt lt DWindowRect X Y W H gt Position and size of document window based on position and size of the document region within containing window DViewRect takes precedence over DWindowRect Position and size of document window based on the containing win dow including the title bar etc lt DViewScale percentage gt Current zoom setting Column properties lt DMargins LT R B gt Not generated by FrameMaker but used by filters to specify text mar gins ignored unless DColumns is specified lt DColumns integer gt Not generated by FrameMaker but used by filters to specify number of columns lt DColumnGap dimension gt Not generated by FrameMaker but used by filters to specify column gap lt DPageSize W H gt Document s default page size and orientation if W is less than H the document s orientation is portrait otherwise it is landscape Volume chapter and page numbering properties Volume numbering lt VolumeNumStart integer gt Starting volume number lt VolumeNumStyle keyword gt Style of volume numbering keyword can be one of Arabic UCRoman LCRoman UCAlpha LCAlpha anjiNumeric ZenArabic ZenUCAlpha ZenLCAlpha anjikazu
30. lt TLAlignment Left gt lt String Brand I gt Online manual Reset the current pen pattern and pen width for subsequent objects lt Pen 0 gt lt PenWidth 0 500 gt Axes for the chart lt PolyLine lt GroupID 1 gt lt Fill 15 gt lt NumPoints 3 gt lt Point 0 60 0 08 gt lt Point 0 60 2 35 gt lt Point 3 10 2 35 gt gt Tick marks along the y axis lt PolyLine lt GroupID 1 gt lt NumPoints 2 gt lt Point 0 60 1 83 gt lt Point 0 47 1 83 gt gt lt PolyLine lt GroupID 1 gt lt NumPoints 2 gt lt Point 0 60 1 33 gt lt Point 0 47 1 33 gt gt lt PolyLine lt GroupID 1 gt lt NumPoints 2 gt lt Point 0 60 0 83 gt lt Point 0 47 0 83 gt gt lt PolyLine lt GroupID 1 gt lt NumPoints 2 gt lt Point 0 60 0 33 gt lt Point 0 47 0 33 gt gt X axis labels lt TextLine lt GroupID 1 gt lt TLOrigin 1 08 2 51 gt lt TLAlignmen gt lt TextLine lt GroupID 1 gt lt TLOrigin 1 58 2 51 gt lt TLAlignmen gt lt TextLine lt GroupID 1 gt lt TLOrigin 2 08 2 51 gt lt TLAlignmen gt lt TextLine lt GroupID 1 gt lt TLOrigin 2 58 2 51 gt lt TLAlignmen gt Y axis labels lt TextLine lt GroupID 1 gt lt TLOrigin 0 46 1 92 gt lt TLAlignmen gt lt TextLine lt GroupID 1 gt lt TLOrigin 0 46 1 42 gt lt TLAlignmen gt lt TextLine lt GroupID 1 gt lt TLOrigin 0 46 0 92 gt lt TLAlignmen gt lt TextLin
31. ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 241 MIF Compatibility Table statements e Document statements Text frame statements Text flow statements e Graphic frame statements Text inset and data link statements Structured document statements Version 5 also introduces a new internal graphic format for imported vector graphics Paragraph statements In version 5 paragraphs can span all text columns and side heads or span columns only As a result of this change the PgfPlacement Style statement now supports the additional keyword st raddleNormalon1y which indicates that the paragraph spans text columns but not side heads For supporting the capability to create PDF bookmarks from paragraph tags the new PgfAcrobat Level statement has been added This statement specifies the paragraph s level in an outline of bookmarks For more information about the MIF syntax for paragraphs see Pgf statement on page 58 Character statements In version 5 the FDX FDY and FDw statements which specify the horizontal kern value the vertical kern value and the spread of characters now measure in terms of the percentage of an em In previous versions the FDx and FDY statements specified values in points When reading MIF files from previous versions FrameMaker in version 5 will convert points into the percentage of an em Previous versions of FrameMaker generate error messages when reading FDX and FDY statements specifying percentages since
32. Delete the entire text flow 4 From your application generate a MIF file that includes the edited template file Suppose the edited MIF file is called mytemplate mif Your application would generate the following two lines at the top of any new MIF file lt MIFFile 7 00 gt Generated by my application include mytemplate mif Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 45 Using MIF Statements The include statement is similar to a C include directive It causes the MIF interpreter to read the contents of the file named mytemplate mif For more information about filenames in MIF see Device independent pathnames on page 8 5 From your application generate a text flow that contains the entire document contents The text flow should use the ID and tag name of the text flow you deleted from the template file this associates the new text flow with the first body page in the template The entire generated MIF file would look something like this lt MIFFile 7 00 gt Generated by my application include mytemplate mif lt TextFlow lt TFTag A gt lt TFAutoConnect Yes gt lt TextRectID 7 gt lt Para lt ParaLine lt String This is the content of the generated document gt gt gt end of Para gt end of TextFlow A user can open the generated MIF file to get a fully formatted FrameMaker document Setting View Only document options You can use MIF statements to control the display of View Only docum
33. FrameVector example 284 format 268 FSeparation 64 157 244 FShadow 65 158 FSize 64 157 166 FSizeChange 157 FStretch 64 157 FStretchChange 157 FStrike 64 158 FSubScript 246 FSupScript 246 FTag 63 FTsume 65 function 189 FUnderline 245 FUnderlining 64 158 FVar 63 157 FWeight 63 157 FWesternPlatformName 201 FWesternPostScriptName 201 G GEM files imported 111 General XML information 137 164 generic object data 101 geq 190 gg 191 GIF files imported 111 grad 193 graphic frames type 107 graphics bitmap 111 imported 110 object oriented 111 raster 111 vector 111 graphics objects 101 119 graphics turning display on or off 86 93 greaterthan 191 grid 86 93 snap 86 93 visible 86 93 GroupID 102 295 H HeadCap in Arc 105 in PolyLine 116 header in FrameImage file 260 HeaderC 100 HeaderL 100 HeaderR 100 HeadType 106 height row 74 HFFont 100 HFMargins 100 hidden page for conditional text 99 Hiragana 205 HPGL files imported 111 hypertext documents setting View Only options 45 hypertext links automatically generated 98 139 hyphenation language default for document 87 94 in paragraphs 64 HyphenMaxLines 60 159 HyphenMinPrefix 60 159 HyphenMinSuffix 60 159 HyphenMinWord 60 159 l ID in Frame 103 in Group 109 in Notes 120 in objects 102 id in MathFullForm 187 If 152 IGES files imported 111 imag 188 import filters 48 imported graphics 110 importe
34. Spanish Catalan Italian Portuguese Brazilian Danish Dutch Norwegian Nynorsk Finnish Swedish Japanese TraditionalChinese SimplifiedChinese Korean Font encoding lt FEncoding keyword gt Specifies the encoding for this font This is to specify the encoding for a dou ble byte font If not present the default is Roman keywordcan be one of FrameRoman JISX0208 ShiftJIS BIG5 GB2312 80 EUC KSC5601 1992 Font size color and width lt FSize dimension gt Size in points only or in Q on a Japanese system lt FColor tagstring gt Font color see ColorCatalog statement on page 78 lt FSeparation integer gt Font color no longer used but written out by FrameMaker for backward com patibility see Color statements on page 244 lt FStretch percent gt The amount to stretch or compress the font where 100 means no change Font style lt FUnderlining keyword gt Turns on underlining and specifies underlining style keywordcan be one of FNoUnderlining FSingle FDouble FNumeric lt FOverline boolean gt Turns on overline style lt FStrike boolean gt Turns on strikethrough style Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 65 MIF Document Statements lt FChangeBar boolean gt Turns on the change bar lt FPosition keyword gt Specifies subscript and superscript characters font size and position relative to baseline determined by Document substateme
35. Syntax lt EDObjectFormatRules Begin object format rules a single level format rule or a single context format rule lt LevelFormatRule gt A level format rule see LevelFormatRule statement on page 152 gt Endof EDObjectFormatRules statement or lt EDObjectFormatRules lt ContextFormatRule gt A context format rule see ContextFormatRule statement on page 151 Endof EDObjectFormatRules statement EDPrefixRules statement A prefix is a fixed text range that appears at the beginning of an element before the element s content The EDPre fixRules statement defines the formatting properties to be applied to a prefix in different contexts It must appear in an ElementDef statement It is valid only for container elements Online manual 149 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 150 MIF Statements for Structured Documents and Books An EDPrefixRules statement can contain zero or more substatements describing level and context format rules Syntax lt EDPrefixRules Begin prefix rules any combination of level and context format rules lt LevelFormatRule gt A level format rule see LevelFormatRule statement on page 152 lt ContextFormatRule gt A context format rule see ContextFormatRule statement on page 151 lt ContextFormatRule gt Additional context format rule statements as needed lt LevelFormatRule gt Additional level format
36. Using MIF Statements The following table shows the corresponding MIF statements In MIF file In Paragraph Designer lt PgfPlacement Anywhere gt Start lt PgfWithNext No gt Keep With Next 4 lt PgfWithPrev No gt Keep With Previous 4 lt PgfBlockSize 1 gt Widow Orphan Lines lt PgfPlacementStyle Normal gt Format paragraph placement lt PgfRunInDefaultPunct gt Run in Head Default Punctuation a period followed by an em space The Numbering properties are defined as follows in the Paragraph Designer Paragraph Tag F Autonumber Format Numbered gt lt n gt it Properties Building Blocks Character Format sey I a Default Font Apply Default Font To Selection Emphasis EquationVariables Update All Formats Tagged Numbered Position Start of Paragraph Commands ci The following table shows the corresponding MIF statements In MIF file In Paragraph Designer lt PgfAutoNum Yes gt Turn on Autonumber lt PgfNumFormat lt n gt t gt Autonumber Format a number followed by a period and a tab lt PgfNumberFont gt Character Format Default 1 Format lt PgfNumAtEnd No gt Position Start of Paragraph Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 17 Using MIF Statements The Advanced properties are defined as follows in the Paragraph Designer Paragraph Tag Automatic Hyphenation Body El fmax s Adjacent
37. defaults in cells 71 inheriting properties 20 paragraphs creating 12 syntax 121 ParaLine in Para 121 parallel 191 ParenBeginWariChu 205 ParenEndWariChu 206 partial 188 PCX files imported 111 PDFBookInfo 137 PDFDocInfo 96 Pen 103 in Frame 102 in objects 102 pen pattern for objects 102 for ruling style 77 index 103 PenWidth 102 PeriodComma 205 perp 191 Pgf 58 in Para 121 in PgfCatalog 58 in TblFormat 69 71 PgfAcrobatLevel 62 PgfAlignment 59 156 PgfAutoNum 60 159 PgfBlockSize 60 159 PgfBotSeparator 61 160 PgfBotSepAtIndent 61 160 PgfBotSepOffset 61 160 PgfCatalog 58 62 PgfCellAlignment 61 161 PgfCellBMargin 161 166 PgfCellBMarginChange 161 PgfCellBMarginFixed 62 161 PgfCellLMargin 161 166 PgfCellLMarginChange 161 PgfCellLMarginFixed 61 161 PgfCellMargins 61 PgfCellRMargin 161 166 PgfCellRMarginChange 161 PgfCellRMarginFixed 61 161 PgfCellTMargin 161 166 PgfCellTMarginChange 161 PgfCellTMarginFixed 61 161 PgfCondFullPgf 121 PgfEndCond 121 PgfFIndent 59 156 166 PgfFIndentChange 156 PgfFIndentOffset 59 PgfFIndentRelative 59 PgfFont 63 Pg Pg Pg Pg Pg Pg Pg Pg Pg Pg Pg Pg Pg Pg Pg Pg Pg Pg Pg Pg Pg Pg Pg Pg Pg 298 fHyphenate 60 159 fLanguage 61 160 fLeading 59 156 166 fLeadingChange 156 fLetterSpace 60 159 fLIndent 59 156 166 fLIndentRelative 156 fLineSpacing 59 fLineSpacingFixed 156 fLocked 62 131 fMaxWordSpace 61 159 fMinWordSpace
38. end of TblFormat Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 31 Using MIF Statements Tables inherit properties differently Tables inherit formatting properties somewhat differently than other document components A table without an applied table format does not inherit one from a previously defined table Instead it gets a set of default properties from the MIF interpreter Thus if you apply a named format to a table a following table will not inherit that format Paragraphs in table cells still inherit properties from previously defined paragraph formats If you give a table cell a certain paragraph style all subsequent cells inherit the same property unless it is explicitly reset Table cells can inherit paragraph properties from any previously specified paragraph format including other tables paragraphs or even the Paragraph Format catalog Tips To avoid problems when creating tables e Give each table a unique ID number e Make sure that each Tb1 statement has only one corresponding ATb1 statement and that each ATb1 statement has a corresponding Tb1 statement e Make sure that each aTb1 statement matches the ID of its corresponding table instance Specifying page layout FrameMaker documents have two kinds of pages that determine the position and appearance of text in the document body pages and master pages Body pages contain the text and graphics that form the content of the document Master pages control the layout of bod
39. gt Endof EDExclusions statement lt EDInclusions List of included elements lt Inclusion tagstring gt Tag of included element lt Inclusion tagstring gt Additional statements as needed gt Endof EDInclusions statement lt EDAl1soInsert List of elements that are automatically inserted in a container ele ment when the element is initially added lt AlsoInsert tagstring gt Tag of inserted element Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 146 MIF Statements for Structured Documents and Books lt AlsoInsert tagstring gt Additional statements as needed gt Endof EDAlsoInsert statement lt EDInitialTablePattern string gt List of the tags of table child elements that are automatically cre ated when a table is inserted Valid only if EDOb ject is one of the following EDTable EDTblHeading EDTb1Body EDTblFooting EDTb1lRow EDTb1Cell lt EDAttrDefinitions List of attribute definitions lt EDAttrDef gt Definition of attribute see Attribute definitions on page 147 lt EDAttrDef gt Additional statements as needed Endof EDAttrDefinitions statement lt EDPgfFormat string gt Paragraph format of the element lt EDTextFormatRules gt lt EDObjectFormatRules gt See EDTextFormatRules statement on page 149 See EDObjectFormatRules statement on page 149 lt EDPrefixRules
40. lt Polygon Generic object statements Information common to all objects see page 101 lt Smoothed boolean gt Yes smooths angles to rounded curves lt NumPoints integer gt Number of vertices lt Point X Y gt Position of object in page or frame coordinates Usage More points as needed End of Polygon statement The NumPoints statement is optional When the MIF interpreter reads a MIF file it counts the Point statements to determine the number of points in the polygon PolyLine statement The PolyLine statement describes a polyline It can appear at the top level or in a Page or Frame statement Syntax lt PolyLine Generic object statements Information common to all objects see page 101 lt HeadCap keyword gt Type of head cap for lines and arcs keywordcan be one of ArrowHead Butt Round Square lt TailCap keyword gt Type of tail cap for lines and arcs keywordcan be one of ArrowHead Butt Round Square lt ArrowStyle gt See ArrowStyle statement on page 106 lt Smoothed boolean gt Yes smooths angles to rounded curves lt NumPoints integer gt Number of vertices lt Point X Y gt Position in page or graphic frame coordinates More points as needed End of PolyLine statement Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 117 MIF Document Statements Usage The PolyLine statement is used for
41. x lt MathFullForm char x 2 0 0 0 0 x lt MathFullForm char x 3 0 0 0 0 x lt MathFullForm char x 0 1 0 0 0 x lt MathFullForm char x 0 2 0 0 0 x lt MathFullForm char x 0 3 0 0 0 Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 MIF Equation Statements Example lt MathFullForm gt statement x lt MathFullForm char x 0 0 1 0 0 gt x lt MathFullForm char x 0 0 2 0 0 gt x lt MathFullForm char x 0 0 3 0 0 gt F lt MathFullForm char x 0 0 0 1 0 gt x lt MathFullForm char x 0 0 0 0 1 gt x lt MathFullForm char x 0 0 0 0 2 gt The char expression can also describe composite diacritical marks The following table contains examples Example MathFullForm statement x lt MathFullForm char x 1 0 0 0 2 gt x lt MathFullForm char x 3 1 0 0 2 gt The diacritical expression places diacritical marks around multiple operands and describes two additional diacritical marks The diacritical expression describes the same marks that the char expression describes but it can take multiple operands In addition the diacritical expression describes two forms of diacritical mark not described by the char expression The following table shows examples of diacritical expressions Example MathFullForm statement A lt MathFullForm diacritical 4 0 0 0 0 char x gt ee lt MathFullForm diacritical 5 0 0 0 0 char x gt l
42. 12 12 lt MathFullForm tensor 3 char x num 1 1 num 2 2 num 3 3 3 Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 196 MIF Equation Statements Matrices The mat rix expression defines a matrix The first operand is the number of rows in the matrix the second operand is the number of columns Subsequent operands are expressions representing the elements of the matrix The elements are listed from left to right and from top to bottom The mat rix expression has an alternate display format The following table shows examples of matrix Example MathFullForm statement i lt MathFullForm matrix 1 1 char x gt x lt MathFullForm matrix ili 1 1 char x gt x r lt MathFullForm 123 matrix 2 3 num 1 1 num 2 2 num 3 3 num 4 4 num 5 5 n 456 um 6 6 gt r lt MathFullForm 12 matrix 3 2 num 1 1 num 2 2 num 3 3 num 4 4 num 5 5 n 34 um 6 6 gt 56 Custom operators The following expressions allow you to use custom operators that have been defined on a math reference page Expression Definition newinfix x y Inserts custom infix operator newprefix x Inserts custom prefix operator newpostfix x Inserts custom postfix operator newfunction x Inserts custom function operator newlarge x y z Inserts custom large element newdelimiter x Inserts custom delimiter newlimit x y Inserts custom limit function newvlist x y z Inser
43. 12004200000005 000120000 0 0 gt end of SqueezeTable In the preceding example the SqueezeHorizontal value for a character in the NoLineBeginChar class is 2 which specifies half squeeze from the right SpreadTable statement The SpreadTable statement defines how to reduce the squeeze that was applied to adjacent characters There are 25 statement rows in this table each corresponding to the 25 character classes respectively There are 26 numeric values in each statement row The first 25 values correspond to the 25 character classes respec tively The 26th value corresponds to the beginning or end of a line These values specify how to spread a character of the class identified by the row statement when followed by a character in the class identified by the column position in the statement Syntax lt SpreadTable lt BegParentheses numerals gt lt EndParentheses numerals gt lt NoLineBeginChar numerals gt lt QuestionBang numerals gt lt CenteredPunct numerals gt lt PeriodComma numerals gt lt NonSeparableChar numerals gt Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 208 MIF Asian Text Processing Statements lt PrecedingSymbol numerals gt lt SucceedingSymbol numerals gt lt AsianSpace numerals gt lt Hiragana numerals gt lt Others gt lt BaseCharWithSuper numerals gt lt BaseCharWithRubi numerals gt lt Numeral numerals gt l
44. 186 ATbl 122 atomic expressions in equations 181 186 atop 190 Attribute 162 AttributeDisplay 162 Attributes 166 AttrName 162 AttrValue 162 autonumber of a paragraph inatable 69 AutoNumSeries 98 289 backslash using for special characters 7 bar chart example 217 BaseAngle 106 BaseCharWithRuby 205 BaseCharWithSuper 205 baselines synchronizing 119 BAttrEditor 169 BAttributeDisplay 169 BCustomElementList 168 BDisplayText 138 BegParentheses 205 BElementCatalogScope 168 BFCLMaximums 169 BFCLMinimums 169 BFNoteLabels string gt 141 BENoteNumComputeMethod 141 BFNoteNumStartNum 141 BENoteNumStyle 141 BFNoteRestart 141 bigcap 192 bigcup 192 binary operators in equations 189 BitMapDpi 110 111 bitmaps imported 111 bket 189 BLOffset 107 body pages adding 33 99 Book 136 book files 135 143 chapter numbering in 140 identification line 136 page numbering in 140 paragraph numbering in 141 sections 135 volume numbering 139 book properties File Info data 137 BookComponent 170 in document files 97 BookElements 170 BookFileInfo 137 BookSettings 168 BookUpdateReferences 143 borders displaying 86 93 box 186 box2 187 boxdot 187 bra 187 BRect 246 BSeparateInclusions 169 BSGMLAppName 169 BTbIFNoteLabels 142 BTbIFNoteNumComputeMethod 1 42 BTbIFNoteNumStyle 142 bullet 189 BUselnitStructure 169 BViewOnly 138 BViewOnlyNoOp 138 BViewOnlyWinBorders 138 BViewOnlyWinMenubar 138 BView
45. 56 MIF Document Statements Usage Once a macro has been defined you can use the macro name anywhere that the replacement text is valid For example suppose you define the following macro define Bold lt Font lt FWeight Bold gt gt When you use the macro in MIF statements write lt Bold gt The interpreter replaces lt Bold gt with lt Font lt FWeight Bold gt gt Note that it retains the outer angle brackets in the replacement text Note that when you use a macro in a MIF file you must enclose macro names in brackets to comply with the MIF syntax for example write lt Bold gt instead of Bold The MIF parser requires these brackets to interpret the macro correctly include statement The include statement reads information from other files It is similar to an include statement in a C program When the MIF interpreter reads a MIF file it replaces the include statement with the contents of the included file An include statement can appear anywhere in a MIF file However make sure that the contents of the included file appear in a valid location when they are read into the MIF file Syntax include pathname Reads ina file Usage The pathname argument specifies a UNIX style pathname which uses a slash to separate directory names for example usr doc template mif For the Macintosh and Windows versions of FrameMaker use the following guidelines for specifying absolute pathnames e For Macinto
46. 60 159 fNextTag 59 fNumAtEnd 60 159 fNumberFont 60 159 Numbering 141 fNumFormat 60 159 fNumString 121 fNumTabs 59 156 fOptWordSpace 60 159 Placement 60 159 fPlacementStyle 60 159 fRIndent 59 156 166 fRIndentChange 156 fRunInDefaultPunct 60 159 PgfSpAfter 59 156 166 PgfSpAfterChange 156 PgfSpBefore 59 156 166 PgfSpBeforeChange 156 PgfTag in Para 121 in Pgf 58 in TblFormat 69 71 PgfTopSeparator 61 160 PgfTopSepAtIndent 61 160 PgfTopSepOffset 61 160 PgfUseNextTag 59 PgfWithNext 60 159 PgfWithPrev 60 159 PICT files imported 111 pie chart example 221 plus 191 pm 188 Point in Polygon 116 in PolyLine 116 Polygon 115 portrait pages 247 power 190 PrecedingSymbol 205 preferences document 82 97 PrefixEnd 163 PrevElement 166 prod 192 prompt 181 prompt in equations 181 propto 191 publish and subscribe 128 133 243 Q QuestionBang 205 quotation marks Smart Quotes 84 91 around strings 5 R Radius 117 RangeEnd 148 RangeStart 148 real 188 reference frames 61 reference pages adding 99 ReRotateAngle 102 right angle bracket gt 5 Rightarrow 191 rightarrow 191 RomanChar 205 RomanSpace 205 rotation of cells 75 of pages 100 Row 74 in Tbl 73 row properties conditional text 74 height 74 placement 74 RowHeight 74 RowMaxHeight 74 RowMinHeight 74 RowPlacement 74 RowWithNext 74 RowWithPrev 74 rparen 188 Rubi text 212 RubiCompositeBegin 214 Rubi
47. 82 lt DElementCatalogScope keyword gt lt DCustomElementList Validation scope keywordcan be one of Strict Loose Children All CustomList List of tags to display when DElementCatalogScope spec ifiles CustomList lt EDTag string gt Element definition name lt EDTag string gt Additional statements as needed gt Endof DCustomElementList statement lt DAttributeDisplay keyword gt Default attribute display setting for document keywordcan be one of AllAttributes display all attributes ReqAndSpec display required and specified attributes None don t display attributes lt DAttrEditor keyword gt When Edit Attributes dialog box appears for new elements keywordcan be one of Never never Always always WhenRequired when there are required attributes lt DElementBordersOn boolean gt lt DElementTags boolean gt Yes turns on element borders in document window This state mentand DElementTags are mutually exclusive If both state ments appear in a MIF file the later statement overrides the earlier one Yes turns on element tags in document window This statement and DElementBordersOn are mutually exclusive If both statements appear in a MIF file the later statement overrides the earlier one lt DUsel nitStructure boolean gt Yes means structured FrameMaker inserts initial structure for new elements lt DSGMLAppName string gt The name of th
48. A gt The text flow must be tagged lt TFAutoConnect Yes gt Autoconnect must be turned on lt Para lt ParaLine lt TextRectID 1 gt Refers to text frame ID on master page gt end of ParaLine gt end of Para gt end of TextFlow The text flow for the master page must be empty Be sure to give the text flow the same flow tag that you give the text flow for the body page and to turn on the autoconnect feature To create the text flow for the body page The text flow for the body page is contained in a separate Text Flow statement that is linked to the body page s text frame The text flow contains the actual text of the document in one or more Para statements If text overflows the first text frame the MIF interpreter creates another body page with a layout that matches the right master page and pours text into the body page s text frame lt TextFlow lt TFTag A gt lt TFAutoConnect Yes gt lt Para lt TextRectID 2 gt lt PgfTag Body gt lt ParaLine lt String This appears on a body page within a text flow gt Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 35 Using MIF Statements lt String tagged A gt gt end of ParaLine gt end of Para gt end of TextFlow Why one body page The method you use to create body pages is different from the method that FrameMaker uses when it writes a MIF file When FrameMaker writes a file it knows where each page break occurs in the file so it creates a s
49. ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 18 Using MIF Statements lt PgfCellAlignment Top gt Cell Vertical Alignment lt PgfCellMargins 0 0 pt 0 0 pt 0 0 pt 0 0 pt gt Cell Margins lt PgfCellTMarginFixed No gt Top lt PgfCellBMarginFixed No gt Bottom lt PgfCellLMarginFixed No gt Left lt PgfCellRMarginFixed No gt Right Adding a Paragraph Catalog In a MIF file you define a Paragraph Catalog by using a PgfCatalog statement The Paragraph Catalog contains one or more paragraph formats which are defined by Pgf statements A PgfCatalog statement looks like this lt PgfCatalog lt Pegf gt A paragraph format description lt Pgf gt More paragraph formats gt end of PgfCatalog The Pgf statement describes a complete paragraph format For example the sample file pgfcat mif stores the paragraph format 1 Heading in the Paragraph Catalog lt MIFFile 7 00 gt Hand generated lt PgfCatalog lt Pef lt PgfTag 1Heading gt lt PgfUseNextTag Yes gt lt PgfNextTag Body gt Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 19 Using MIF Statements lt PgfAlignment Left gt lt PgfFIndent 0 0 gt lt PgfLIndent 0 0 gt lt PgfRIndent 0 0 gt gt end of Pgf gt end of PgfCatalog If you open pgfcat mif in FrameMaker you ll see that the Paragraph Catalog contains a single paragraph format called 1Heading If you supply a Paragraph Catalog the paragraph formats in your catalog replace tho
50. ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 111 MIF Document Statements lt ImportObUpdater string gt Identifies the imported graphic as a Macintosh subscriber or an embed ded Windows OLE object for a description of the syntax of the string see Methods of importing graphics on page 112 End of Import Object statement Usage The Import Object statement describes the imported graphic s position size and angle If the graphic is imported by reference the statement describes the path to the graphic file If the imported graphic is copied into the document the statement contains the data describing the graphic Data describing the graphic is stored in one or more facets If the graphic is linked with an application through FrameServer or an FDK client the statement also describes the path to the application used to edit the graphic Usage of some of the aspects of the Import Object statement is described in the following sections Graphic file formats You can import different types of graphic files into a FrameMaker document Bitmaps The term bitmap graphics also called raster graphics refers to graphics represented by bitmap data Graphics file formats recognized by FrameMaker include FrameImage Sun rasterfile xwd TIFF MacPaint PCX and GIF files Vector The term vector graphics also called object oriented graphics refers to graphics represented by geometric data Graphics file formats recognized by FrameMaker inclu
51. Cannot use different connectors in a group A general rule is invalid Bad general rule for expected A general rule is invalid Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 MIF Statements for Structured Documents and Books Bad general rule for element definition expected A general rule is invalid Ambiguous general rule for element definition A general rule is invalid Bad general rule for element definition Syntax Error A general rule is invalid Bad general rule for element definition Connector or or amp expected A general rule is invalid Duplicate definition only first element definition for tag will be used Two or more element definitions use the same tag Format tag is invalid for an element of type EDEquation defaulting to Medium Only small medium and large format tags are valid for an equation element Element name contains characters that are not allowed Element name contains at least one disallowed character such as amp or Invalid table tagging specification parameter An element definition contains a lt EDTableTagging gt statement with a syntax error Online manual 172 173 MIF Equation Statements This chapter describes the MIF statements that define equations Use it as a reference when you write filters for trans lating documents that include equations For more information about creating and editing equations see your FrameMaker user s manua
52. Clipping rectangles are unique to the FrameVector format All objects within a clipping rectangle are drawn to the boundaries of the rectangle If an object extends beyond this region the portion that passes the rectangle boundary is not drawn The specification of the start of a clipping rectangle begins with op code 8A and ends with op code 8B All objects within the clipping rectangle must be specified between these two op codes End of clipping rectangle 0x8B Specification by data type N A Description of data None Size of data in bytes 0 Example 8B 00000000 FrameVector graphic imported within this graphic 0x8C Specification by data type Rectangle byte vector data Description of data Position and size of the bounding rectangle in points rectangle Is the object flipped left right byte 0 no 1 yes FrameVector data vector data Size of data in bytes Variable Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 284 FrameVector Facet Format Example 8C 00000046 00670000 004F0000 00130000 003C0000 00 FrameVector data for a FrameVector graphic with the following specifications x position 103 points 0067 y position 79 points 004F width 19 points 0013 height 60 points 003C flipped left right no Note The vector graphic is scaled to the size of the bounding rectangle Sample FrameVector facet The sample FrameVector
53. FChangeBar 65 158 FclPgfCatalogRef 155 FelTag 155 fcodes 47 FColor 64 157 FCombinedFontName 201 FDoubleUnderline 245 FDW 65 158 166 169 FDWChange 158 FDX 65 158 FDY 65 158 feathering 119 120 FEncoding 64 201 FFamily 63 157 FileName 97 139 294 FileNameSuffix 97 139 Fill 103 in Frame 102 in objects 102 fill pattern default for body cells 70 default for heading footing rows 70 for cells 75 for exception columns in a table 70 for objects 102 index 103 filters import 48 output 48 record of 113 128 Fitalic 65 FLanguage 64 FlipLR 110 Float 107 Flocked 65 131 158 floor 187 flows text 119 125 HIDDEN 121 FlowTag 98 FmtChangeList 154 155 FmtChangeListCatalog 155 FmtChangeListTag 154 FNote in Notes 120 in ParaLine 122 FNoteStartNum 85 91 FNumericUnderline 245 Font 63 in FontCatalog 63 in Notes 120 in ParaLine 122 126 in TextLine 118 FontCatalog 63 FooterC 100 FooterL 100 FooterR 100 footnotes in cells 75 in table titles 73 properties in document text 85 91 properties in tables 86 92 forall 187 format rules 148 formats FrameImage 258 FormatTag 154 FOutline 65 158 FOverline 64 158 FPairKern 65 158 FPlain 65 FPlatformName 63 157 FPosition 65 158 FPostScriptName 63 157 fract 189 Frame in AFrames 105 in Frame 108 in Page 100 FramelImage format 260 color 263 example 264 266 gray 263 monochrome 263 frames reference 61 FrameType 107
54. To edit an internal graphic inset users must open FrameMaker document select the graphic inset and choose the Graphic Inset command from the Special menu FrameMaker writes the graphic inset to a temporary file and instructs your application to edit it Your graphic Toe application FrameMaker document with internal graphic inset Internal graphic insets are best suited for environments in which portability of FrameMaker document across different types of systems is most important Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 Facet Formats for Graphics When FrameMaker creates temporary files for internal graphic insets the temporary files have the following format lt MIFFile 7 00 gt lt ImportObject lt ImportObEditor inset_editor_name gt lt ImportObFile 2 0 internal inset gt facet_name amp data_type amp facet_data facet_name amp data_type amp facet_data EndInset gt Because the graphic inset is stored in FrameMaker document the file does not have an ImportObFileDI statement The ImportObFile statement identifies the file as a FrameMaker version 2 0 internal graphic inset file for compat ibility with earlier versions of FrameMaker If you do not plan to use the graphic insets generated by your application with earlier versions of FrameMaker you can omit this statement Application specific facets Application specific facets can b
55. Whether font is italic use one of the following flags I Italic R Regular Weight Weight classification for example 400 regular or 700 bold Variation Optional variation for example Narrow Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 68 MIF Document Statements The following statements are valid representations of the Windows font Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique lt FPlatformName W Helvetica Narrow 1 700 gt lt FPlatformName W Helvetica I 700 Narrow gt Tables Table formats are defined by a Tb1Format statement Table formats can be locally defined or they can be stored in a Table Catalog which is defined by a To1Catalog statement The ruling styles used in a table are defined in a Ruling Catalog statement In a MIF file all document tables are contained in one Tb1s statement Each table instance is contained in a Tb1 statement The ATb1 statement specifies where each table instance appears in the text flow TbiCatalog statement The Tb1Catalog statement defines the Table Catalog A document can have only one Tb1Catalog statement which must appear at the top level in the order given in MIF file layout on page 52 Syntax lt TblCatalog lt Tb1lFormat gt Defines a table format see TblFormat statement next lt TblFormat gt Additional statements as needed gt End of To1Catalog statement TblFormat statement The Tb1Format statement defines the format of a table A Tb1Format
56. a file as MIF This XMP data corresponds with the values of fields in the File Info dialog box In MIF this data is stored as sub state ments of lt DocFileInfo gt and lt BookFileInfo gt This XMP data contains the data that is stored in the PDFDocInfo and PDFBookInfo statements Changes between version 5 5 and 6 0 This section describes changes to MIF syntax between versions 5 5 and 6 0 of FrameMaker Saving documents and books as PDF FrameMaker documents now store information to support Structured PDF ppprstructure is a new statement added to Document that specifies whether or not the document contains structure information to use when saving as PDE pgfPDFStructureLevel has been added to the Pgf statement to assign a structure level to paragraph formats Books and documents can also include arbitrary fields of Document Info information Documents use the PDFDocInfo statement and books use PDFBookInfo To improve handling of bookmarks hypertext links within and across PDF files FrameMaker now stores reference data within documents PgfReferenced identifies each paragraph that is marked as a named destination Elemen tReferenced similarly identified structure elements If you like you can specify that the Save As PDF function creates a named destination for every paragraph in the document this is done via FP_PDFDest sMarked within the Document statement Books Version 6 0 of FrameMaker has brought significant change to books T
57. a short integer that specifies the length of the string including the null characters that bracket the string point 2 metrics interpreted as the position of the point in x and y coordinates rectangle 4 metrics interpreted as the position of the rectangle in x and y coordinates and the size of the rectangle in width and height All integer values are stored in big endian order The x and y coordinates are relative to the rectangle bounding the vector graphics The origin of the coordinate system is the upper left corner of this rectangle For the specifications of angles positive values are measured clockwise from 0B the x axis and negative values are measured counterclockwise Specifications of definition op codes This section describes each definition op code Op codes are listed by number and description The op code number is shown in parentheses Version number 0x01 Specification by data type Byte Description of data Bits 7 4 major version number Bits 3 0 minor version number Size of data in bytes 1 Example 01 00000001 50 representing version 5 0 Note This must be the first op code for a FrameVector graphic Bounding rectangle 0x02 Specification by data type Metric metric metric metric Description of data Position of graphic metric metric Width of graphic metric Height of graphic metric Size of data in bytes
58. a signed whole number optionally restricted to a range of values FAttrInts oneor more integers optionally restricted to a range of values FAtt rReal a real number optionally restricted to a range of val ues FAtt rReals one or more real numbers optionally restricted to a range of values FAttrString an arbitrary text string FAttrStrings one or more arbitrary text strings FAtt rUniqueldia string that uniquely identifies the element FAtt rUniqueldRef a reference to a UniquelD attribute FAttrUniquelIdRefs one or more references to a UniquelD attribute Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 MIF Statements for Structured Documents and Books lt EDAttrRequired boolean gt Yes means the attribute is required lt EDAttrReadOnly boolean gt Yes means the attribute is read only lt EDAttrHidden boolean gt Yes means the attribute is hidden and will not appear in the Struc ture view or in the Edit Attributes dialog box lt EDAttrChoices The choices if the attribute type is FAttrChoice lt EDAttrChoice string gt A choice lt EDAttrChoice string gt Additional statements as needed gt Endof EDAttrChoices statement lt EDAttrDefValues The default if the attribute is not required If the attribute type is FAttriInts FAttrReals FAttrStrings or FAttrU niqueldRefs the default can have multiple strings lt EDAttrDefValue string gt A default value lt EDAttrDef
59. an alternate representation of a FrameMaker document in ASCII format MIF files are usually generated by FrameMaker or by an application that writes out MIF statements You can however create MIF files by using a text editor or by using FrameMaker as a text editor This section provides some general information about working with MIF files regardless of the method you use to create them Opening and saving MIF files When you save a FrameMaker document you usually save it in Normal format FrameMaker s binary format for document files To save a document as a MIF file choose Save As from the File menu In the Save Document dialog box choose Interchange MIF from the Format pop up menu You should give the saved file the suffix mi f to distinguish it from a file saved in binary format When you open or import a MIF file FrameMaker reads the file directly translating it into a FrameMaker document or book When you save the document in Normal format FrameMaker creates a binary document file To prevent overwriting the original MIF file remove the mif file suffix and replace it with a different suffix or no suffix If you use FrameMaker to edit a MIF file you must prevent it from interpreting MIF statements when you open the file by holding down a modifier key and clicking Open in the Open dialog box In this version Use this modifier key UNIX Shift Macintosh Option Windows Control or Shift Online manual ADOBE
60. and default right and left master pages for double sided documents A MIF file can either use the default page layout or provide a custom layout Using the default layout If you don t need to control the page layout of a document you can use the default page layout by putting all of the document s text into a Text Flow statement When reading the file the MIF interpreter creates default master pages and body pages The MIF file creates a single column text frame for the body pages to contain the document s text The MIF interpreter associates the text flow with this text frame The following example is in the sample file defpage mif lt MIFFile 7 00 gt Hand generated lt TextFlow All document text is in this text flow lt TFTag A gt Make this a tagged text flow lt TFAutoConnect Yes gt Automatically connect text frames lt Para lt ParaLine lt String This paragraph appears on a body page within a gt lt String text flow tagged A gt gt end of ParaLine gt end of Para gt end of TextFlow End of MIFFile A text flow must be tagged and it must include lt TFAutoConnect Yes gt otherwise when the user adds text to the document FrameMaker won t create additional pages and text frames to hold the added text Creating a simple page layout If you want some control of the page layout but do not want to create master pages you can use the Document substatements DPageSize DMargins and DColumns to
61. any other flows You can put any kind of text or graphics in a table cell The cell automatically grows vertically to accommodate the inserted text or graphic however the width of the column remains fixed Adding a table anchor To indicate the position of a table in the text flow you must add an aTb1 statement The ATb1 statement refers to the unique ID specified by the Tb11D statement in the table instance For example to insert the table defined in the previous example you would add the following statements to the minimal MIF file lt Para lt ParaLine lt String Coffee prices for January gt Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 26 Using MIF Statements lt ATbl 1 gt Matches table ID in Tbl statement gt end of ParaLine gt end of Para This example is in the sample file table mi f If you open this file in FrameMaker you ll see that the anchor symbol for the table appears at the end of the sentence To place the table anchor between two words in the sentence use the following statements lt Para lt ParaLine lt String Coffee prices gt lt ATbl 1 gt lt String for January gt gt end of ParaLine gt end of Para Note that the ATb1 statement appears outside the st ring statement A ParaLine statement usually consists of String statements that contain text interspersed with statements for table anchors frame anchors markers and cross references About ID numbers The table ID used
62. applied This character pair should not have occurred Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 209 MIF Asian Text Processing Statements Usage Each statement row in the spread table includes 26 numerical values one for each character class and an added value for the characters at the beginning or the end of a line The values are separated by a space An example of a spread table is lt SpreadTable a 3 H ma oon Sos z Ss IE os a Oo S z O og Nn A 4 O ZxDmeos 0 S a a Cae 6 SS ce SES xe v 3 8 SE ws SF gs wD wv Z 2 oga SZ Ga e T MA n wog YV iJ d a S dwa sg S aca no u 2 aS bT oL Svoo aED ag s s GEN Ov A 8 Ee ganuon onset S asna gM Qainn tu 52 6nd eMHOUO YHA BB e EDO azza Goo Ge Yoo EH Ego oH HER HE PES ESSE SRS SESE S SESS ES LARRA Am ZOU AA KD HKTOMM ADH HAAAHHHHAYD lt BegParentheses 00040 0000000 1000001000001 4 2 5 5 lt EndParentheses 1 1 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 021121 I 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 101 4 4 0 5 gt end of SpreadTable In the preceding example no spread occurs between a character in the BegParentheses class and a character in the Quest ionBang class because the value 0 No spread is in the fourth position which is the column position for the QuestionBang class of characters LineBreakTable statement The LineBreakTable statement defines how to break lines between characters There are 25 statement rows in this table each corresponding to the 25 character classes respectively There are 25 numeric values in e
63. boolean gt Turns on formatting ruler upon opening lt DBordersOn boolean gt Turns on borders upon opening lt DSymbolsOn boolean gt Turns on text symbols upon opening lt DGraphicsOff boolean gt Yes displays text only lt DPageScrolling keyword gt Specifies how FrameMaker displays consecutive pages keyword can be one of Variable Horizontal Vertical Facing lt DCurrentView integer gt lt DLinkBoundariesOn boolean gt Specifies current color view 1 6 Turns on boundaries for Macintosh publishers upon opening View Only document properties lt DViewOnly boolean gt Yes specifies View Only document locked lt DViewOnlyXRef keyword gt Changes behavior of active cross references in View Only document see page 46 keyword can be one of GotoBehavior OpenBehavior NotActive Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 94 MIF Document Statements lt DViewOnlySelect keyword gt Disables enables user selection in View Only document including selection with modifier keys and sets highlighting style of destination markers for active cross references see Using active cross references on page 46 keyword can be one of o disable user selection Yes enable user selection and highlighting UserOn1y enable selection but not highlighting lt DViewOnlyNoOp Oxnnn gt Disables a command in a View Only document command is specified by hex funct
64. by using the Document statement lt DShowAllConditions Yes gt To allow selective display of conditions use lt DShowAl1lConditions No gt You can turn off the display of condition indicators by using the Document statement lt DDisplayOverrides No gt Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 42 Using MIF Statements How FrameMaker writes a conditional document If you are converting a MIF file that was generated by FrameMaker you need to understand how FrameMaker writes a file that contains hidden conditional text When FrameMaker writes a MIF file it places all hidden conditional text in a text flow with the tag name HIDDEN Within the document text flow a conditional text marker lt Marker lt MType 10 gt gt indicates where hidden condi tional text would appear if shown The marker text contains a plus sign followed by a unique five digit integer The corresponding block of hidden text is in the hidden text flow It begins with a conditional text marker containing a minus sign and a matching integer and ends with a marker containing an equal sign and the same integer One or more Para statements appear between the markers If the hidden conditional text doesn t span paragraphs all the text appears in one Para statement If the hidden text spans paragraphs each end of paragraph in the conditional text forces a new Para statement in the hidden text flow The following example shows how FrameMaker writes the sentence
65. character Zero value hex codes 00 are illegal In PDE these hexadecimal representations are interpreted as PDFDocEncoding see Portable Document Format Reference Manual Addison Wesley ISBN 0 201 62628 4 Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 83 MIF Document Statements Note that a a File Info field name can be up to 126 characters long and a MIF string can contain up to 255 characters Some characters in the key string may be hexadecimal representations and each hexadecimal representation uses three ASCII characters For example a Key of 126 non printing characters would require 378 ASCII characters However since a valid MIF string can only have up to 255 ASCII characters such a Key statement woud be invalid in MIF The contents of the File Info field is represented by a series of Value statements Each value statement can contain a string of up to 255 ASCH characters In PDF the File Info contents can contain up to 32765 Unicode characters To accomodate this number of Unicode characters FrameMaker generates MIF in the following ways e It represents the Document Info contents as a series of Value statements each one 255 ASCII characters long or less e It uses special codes to indicate Unicode characters that are outside the standard ASCII range Mif represents Unicode characters as amp xHHHH where amp x opens the character code the character closes the character code and HHHH are as many hexadecimal values as a
66. component this statement encodes the sequence number of the corresponding component file If the element corre sponds to an unstructured component file the ETag string value is empty For more information about structured documents see Using FrameMaker MIF Messages Invalid context specification parameter There is a syntax error in an lt EDContext Spec gt statement in an element definition EDContainerType has an invalid value An lt EDContainerType gt statement uses an invalid value EDContainerType ignored for object element definition An element definition contains an lt EDContainerType gt statement but the lt object Type gt statement doesn t specify EDContainer Value of EDObject is invalid An lt EDObject gt statement uses an invalid value General rule not allowed for object element definition An element definition for an object element contains an lt EDGeneralRule gt statement Exclusions not allowed for object element definition An element definition for an object element contains an lt EDExclusions gt statement Inclusions not allowed for object element definition An element definition for an object element contains an lt EDInclusions gt statement Discarding element definition no EDTag name was specified An element definition has no tag name so it is ignored Bad general rule for element definition Name or expected A general rule is invalid Bad general rule for
67. contains Copied into the FrameMaker document facet_name amp data_type amp facet_data EndInset Imported by reference lt ImportObFileDI pathname gt lt ImportHint string gt An embedded OLE object Windows only OLE amp data_type amp facet_data facet_name amp data_type amp facet_data EndInset lt ImportObUpdater OLE gt A graphics subscriber Macintosh only facet_name amp data_type amp facet_data EndInset lt ImportObUpdater MacSubscriber ISID Mod Date pathname gt If the imported graphic is a Macintosh subscriber the subscriber is specified by the MacSub scriber ISID ModDate pathname string in the Import ObUpdater statement The fields in this string are explained below e ISID is an internal section ID plus 65536 1000 hex ModDate is a modification date in hexadecimal in Macintosh 1904 date format pathname is a device independent pathname to the edition Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 113 MIF Document Statements Filenames of objects imported by reference When an object is imported by reference to an external file the Import Object statement contains the file pathname The Import ObFileDI statement specifies the pathname for graphics imported by reference The statement supplies a device independent pathname so that files can easily be transported across different types of systems see Device independent pathnames on page 8 In previous versions
68. cup 190 curl 187 current state of an object 3 D DAcrobatBookmarksIncludeTagNa mes 88 95 dagger 187 dangle 187 DApplyFormatRules 165 dashed lines custom 222 DashedPattern 102 DashedStyle 102 DashSegment 102 database publishing 49 291 example of 227 DataLink 134 243 DataLinkEnd 134 243 DAttrEditor 165 DAttributeDisplay 165 DAutoChBars 86 93 DBookElementHierarchy 166 DBordersOn 86 93 DChBarColor 86 93 DChBarGap 86 93 DChBarPosition 86 93 DChBarSeparation 245 DChBarWidth 86 93 DCollateSeparations 246 DColumnGap 84 89 DColumns 84 89 DCurrentView 87 93 DCustomElementList 165 DDisplayOverrides 85 91 DefaultApply 142 DefaultDerive 142 DefaultPrint 142 defaults document properties 82 97 hyphenation and spell checking language 87 94 MIF 3 page margins 83 89 paragraph formats in cells 71 punctuation for run in heads 60 ruling ina table 69 shading in a table 70 units 54 define 55 DElementBordersOn 165 DElementCatalogScope 165 DElementTags 165 DeriveLinks 98 139 DeriveTag 98 139 DeriveType 98 139 DExclusions 165 DFCLMaximums 166 DFCLMinimums 167 DFENoteAnchorPos 85 92 DFNoteAnchorPrefix 85 92 DFNoteAnchorSuffix 85 92 DENoteLabels 85 92 DFNoteMaxH 85 91 DFNoteNumberPos 85 92 DFNoteNumberPrefix 85 92 DFNoteNumberSuffix 85 92 DFNoteNumComputeMethod 92 DFNoteNumStyle 85 92 DFNoteRestart 85 91 DFNoteTag 85 91 DFrozenPages 84 91 DFullRulers 86 93 DGener
69. enclosing all of the flow s contents it creates a highest level element with the tag NoName ElementBegin and ElementEnd statements are nested within ParaLine and BookElements statements The following example shows how FrameMaker writes an UnorderedList element lt Para lt PgfTag Bullet gt The autonumber contains a bullet and a tab lt PgfNumString xa5 t gt lt ParaLine Note that the ElementBegin statement is nested inside both the Para and ParaLine statements lt ElementBegin Online manual 162 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 163 MIF Statements for Structured Documents and Books lt ETag UnorderedList gt lt Collapsed No gt lt SpecialCase No gt gt end of ElementBegin lt ElementBegin lt ETag Item gt lt Collapsed No gt lt SpecialCase No gt gt end of ElementBegin lt String Light rail provides transportation for those who gt gt lt ParaLine lt String are unable to drive or cannot afford an automobile gt lt ElementEnd Item gt gt gt end of Para lt Para lt PgfTag Bullet gt lt PgfNumString xa5 t gt lt ParaLine lt ElementBegin lt ETag Item gt lt Collapsed No gt lt SpecialCase No gt gt end of ElementBegin lt String Light rail lures commuters away from rush hour traffic gt Again note that both the Item and Bulletlist elements end before the end of the Para and ParaLine statements lt ElementEnd Item gt
70. equations lt DMathLargeLevel2 dimension gt Size in points of level 2 expression in large equations lt DMathSmallLevel3 dimension gt Size in points of level 3 expression second level subscripts and superscripts in small equations lt DMathMediumLevel3 dimension gt Size in points of level 3 expression in medium equations lt DMathLargeLevel3 dimension gt Size in points of level 3 expression in large equations lt DMathSmallHoriz integer gt Horizontal spread for small equations expressed as a percentage of equation s point size negative values decrease space and positive values increase space lt DMathMediumHoriz integer gt Horizontal spread for medium equations Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 MIF Equation Statements lt DMathLargeHoriz integer gt Horizontal spread for large equations lt DMathSmallVert integer gt Vertical spread for small equations expressed as a percentage of equation s point size negative values decrease space and positive values increase space lt DMathMediumVert integer gt Vertical spread for medium equations lt DMathLargeVert integer gt Vertical spread for large equations lt DMathShowCustom boolean gt Specifies whether to show all math elements or only custom ele ments in Insert Math Element dialog box lt DMathFunctions tagstring gt Font for functions lt DMathNumbers tagstring gt Font for numbers lt DMathVariables tagstring
71. facet in this section describes the following illustration FRAMEVECTOR G RAPHIC This illustration is composed of the following graphic objects e A rectangle with no border and a gray fill e A polygon defined by three points a black border and no fill e A rectangle with a black border and a white fill e A text line with the text FrameVector Graphic in small caps e A polyline defined by two points and an arrow style head e An arc with a black border and no fill The following sample facet describes this graphic FrameVector amp V amp lt MakerVector5 0 gt amp x amp 010000000150 amp 020000001000000000000000000168000000D80000 amp 230000000400008000 amp 21000000010F amp 24000000080006426C61636B00 amp 260000000100 amp 220000000104 amp 200000000400000000 amp 8300000010007A00000052000000C0000000190000 amp 210000000100 Online manual amp 220000000107 amp 810000001C00000003000E0000004100000029000000710000004C000000410000 amp 830000001000720000004A000000C0000000190000 amp 8700000009007B0000005C000000 amp 2A0000000C00000A xHelvetica x00 amp 2B0000000400090000 amp 300000000A0008526567756C617200 amp 2F0000000A0008526567756C617200 amp 2E0000000A0008526567756C617200 amp 330000000400008000 amp 2C0000000400001000 amp 88000000160014 xFrameVector Graphic x00 amp 8900000000 amp 070000000C10780201000C00000004000 amp 270000000100 amp 820000001400000002007200000055000000330000
72. garbled Syntax lt MIFEncoding A ARS gt originally written as Japanese Shift JIS lt MIFEncoding HARE gt originally written as Japanese EUC MIFEncoding statement for Chinese FrameMaker recognizes three encoding schemes for Chinese Big5 and CNS for Traditional Chinese and GB2312 80 for Simplified Chinese The Macintosh and Windows versions of FrameMaker write Big5 for Traditional Chinese text and the UNIX versions of FrameMaker write out CNS for Traditional Chinese text All platform versions of FrameMaker write GB2312 80 for Simplified Chinese To determine which encoding was used each MIF file that contains Chinese text must include a MIFEncoding statement near the beginning of the file It must appear before any Chinese text in the file The string value in the MIFEncoding statement is the Chinese spelling of the word Chinese FrameMaker reads this fixed string and deter mines what the hexadecimal encoding is for it From that FrameMaker expects the same encoding to be used for all subsequent Asian text in the document Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 199 MIF Asian Text Processing Statements To see the characters spelling the word Chinese you must view the MIF file on a system that is enabled for Chinese character display When the MIF is displayed on a Roman system the characters appear garbled Syntax lt MIFEncoding APC gt originally written as Traditional Chinese Big5 lt MI
73. graphic e The first value is always the constant value 0x59a66a95 e The second value is the width of the graphic in pixels In the preceding example the graphic is 64 pixels wide converting the hexadecimal value 0x00000040 to the decimal value 64 e The third value is the height of the graphic in pixels In the example the graphic is 64 pixels high converting the hexadecimal value 0x00000040 to the decimal value 64 e The fourth value is the number of bits used to describe a single pixel This value is sometimes referred to as the depth of the graphic For black and white graphics only one bit is used to describe a single pixel For color images eight bits are used to describe a single pixel In the example the value 0x00000001 indicates that the graphic is in black and white e The fifth value is not currently used and is set to 0x00000000 by default e The sixth value specifies whether or not the data is encoded If the data is encoded this value is set to 0x00000002 If the data is not encoded that is if the data is in uncompressed format this value is set to 0x00000001 In the example the data is uncompressed e The seventh value identifies the type of color map used by the graphic If the graphic is in black and white no color map is used and this value is set to 0x00000000 If the graphic is in color an RGB color map is used and this value is set to 0x00000001 or 0x00000002 In the example because the graphic is in blac
74. gt lt PgfAlignment Left gt lt PgfFIndent 0 0 gt lt PgfLIndent 0 0 gt Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 20 Using MIF Statements gt end of Pgf lt ParaLine lt String A locally formatted heading gt gt end of ParaLine gt end of Para For a complete description of Pg property statements see page 58 How paragraphs inherit properties Paragraphs can inherit properties from other paragraphs in a MIF file If a Pg statement does not provide values for each paragraph property it acquires any property values explicitly defined in a previous Pgf statement Because the MIF interpreter sequentially reads MIF files it uses the most recently defined Pgf statement that occurs before the current statement in the file For example the following MIF code applies the default format named Body to the first paragraph in a document and locally overrides the paragraph font lt Para lt Pgf lt PgfTag Body gt lt PgfFont lt FWeight Bold gt gt end of PgfFont gt end of Pgf lt ParaLine lt String First paragraph in document gt gt end of ParaLine gt end of Para lt Para lt ParaLine lt String Second paragraph in document gt gt end of ParaLine gt end of Para The previous example is in the sample file pgf fmt mif If you open this file in FrameMaker you ll find that the second paragraph also has the new font property A paragraph property remains in effect until the prop
75. gt Font for variables lt DMathStrings tagstring gt Font for strings lt DMathGreek tagstring gt Font for Greek characters lt DMathCatalog gt Describes custom math elements see DMathCatalog statement next gt End of Document statement DMathCatalog statement The DMathCatalog statement describes the custom math elements in a document It must appear in a Document statement Syntax lt DMathCatalog Lists custom math elements lt DMathGreekOverrides tagstring gt Identifies a redefined Greek symbol and forces lookup on reference page tagst ring argument must match the name of reference frame lt DMathGreekOverrides tagstring gt Additional statements as needed lt DMathOpOverrides Identifies built in operator with redefined display properties lt DMathOpName tagstring gt Name of built in operator from reference frame lt DMathOpTLineOverride boolean gt No uses default glyph for operator Yes looks up operator on text line in reference frame lt DMathOpPositionA integer gt Position of first operand expressed as a percentage of equation font size lt DMathOpPositionB integer gt Position of second operand lt DMathOpPositionC integer gt Position of third operand gt End of DMathOpOverrides statement lt DMathNew Defines new math element 174 Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 175 MIF Equation Statements lt DMathOpName tagstring
76. gt Yes means the top cell margin is fixed lt PgfCellRMarginFixed boolean gt Yes means the right cell margin is fixed lt PgfCellBMarginFixed boolean gt Yes means the bottom cell margin is fixed gt Endof FmtChangeList statement Elements ElementBegin and ElementEnd statements The ElementBegin and ElementEnd statements indicate where a structural element begins and ends These state ments must appear in a ParaLine statement see page 167 or ina BookElements statement see page 170 Syntax lt ElementBegin Begin element lt Unique ID gt ID persistent across sessions assigned when FrameMaker generates a MIF file used by the API and should not be used by filters lt ElementReferenced boolean gt Yes means the element is marked as a PDF named destination for cross references hypertext markers or bookmarks version 6 0 or later lt ETag tagstring gt Tag name of element from Element Catalog lt Collapsed boolean gt Collapse element in structure view lt SpecialCase boolean gt Treat element as a special case for validation lt ENamespace lt The element s namespace declarations a declaration consists of one lt ENamespacePrefix gt and one lt ENamespacePath gt Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 MIF Statements for Structured Documents and Books lt ENamespacePrefix string gt The prefix that identifies the namespace lt ENamespacePath string gt The system path or URI to the D
77. help you minimize the number of MIF statements that your filter needs to generate e If you are not concerned about controlling the format of a document use the default formats that FrameMaker provides for new documents The user can always change formats as needed within the FrameMaker document e If you are filtering a document from another application into FrameMaker and then back to the application you may want to import the filter s MIF file into a FrameMaker document save the document as a MIF file and then convert the file back to the original format from the MIF file generated by FrameMaker This technique takes advantage of FrameMaker s syntactically complete MIF statements but allows your filter to write a shorter MIF file e If your filter needs to generate fully formatted MIF files you can minimize the number of formatting statements by creating a template in FrameMaker saving the template as a MIF file and then including the MIF template file in your filter s generated document You must edit the saved MIF template see Including template files on page 43 An advantage of this technique is that you can use the same template for more than one document e Define macros to ease the process of generating statements For an example of using macros see Text example on page 216 Database publishing You can use MIF files to import information from an external application such as a database into a FrameMaker docum
78. illustration Note that no color map is included in the description because the graphic is in black and white Online manual Header ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 Framelmage Facet Format Graphic data FrameImage amp v amp x amp 59a66a95 amp 00000040 amp 00000010 amp 00000001 amp 00000000 amp 00000001 amp 00000000 amp 00000000 amp FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF amp 80000000FFFFFFFF amp 80000000FFFFFFFF amp 80000000FFFFFFFF amp 80000000FFFFFFFF amp 80000000FFFFFFFF amp 80000000FFFFFFFF amp 80000000FFFFFFFF amp FFFFFFFF00000001 amp FFFFFFFF00000001 amp FFFFFFFF00000001 amp FFFFFFFF00000001 amp FFFFFFFF00000001 amp FFFFFFFF00000001 amp FFFFFFFF00000001 amp FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF amp x EndInset 265 Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 266 Framelmage Facet Format Sample encoded Framelmage facet The sample FrameImage facet in this section describes the same illustration Note that no color map is included in the description because the graphic is in black and white Unlike the previous file this graphic file is in encoded format Header FrameImage amp v amp x amp 59A66A95 amp 00000040 amp 00000010 amp 00000001 amp 00000000 amp 00000002 amp 00000000 amp 00000000 amp 8007FF amp 8000000000 amp 8003FF amp 8000000000 amp 8003FF amp 8000000000 amp 8003FF amp 8000000000 amp 8003FF amp 8000000000 amp 8003FF amp 8000000000 amp 8
79. issues queries and selects a FrameMaker document template Ls Text a a Final Document es MM CAD or Other M Illustration Packages o na MIF ASCII text __ Es d Database For an example of a database publishing application see Database publishing on page 227 Debugging MIF files When FrameMaker reads a MIF file it might detect errors such as unexpected character sequences In UNIX and Windows versions FrameMaker displays messages in a console window In Macintosh and Windows versions you must turn on Show File Translation Errors in the Preferences dialog box to display messages in a window If FrameMaker finds an error it continues to process the MIF file and reads as much of the document as possible When you are debugging MIF files you should examine the error messages for clues The MIF interpreter reports line numbers for most errors For a description of MIF error messages see MIF Messages In some cases the MIF interpreter reports an invalid opcode message for a statement If the statement seems correct to you check the statements above it A missing right angle bracket can cause the interpreter to parse a statement incorrectly If the MIF interpreter brings up an empty document when it reads your file it has stopped trying to interpret your file
80. lists some of the possible codes Code Description PICT QuickDraw PICT WMF Windows MetaFile EPSF Encapsulated PostScript Macintosh EPSI Encapsulated PostScript Interchange EPSB Encapsulated PostScript Binary Windows EPSD Encapsulated PostScript with Desktop Control Separations DCS SNRF Sun Raster File PNTG MacPaint PCX PC Paintbrush TIFF Tag Image File Format XWD X Windows System Window Dump file GIF Graphics Interchange Format CompuServe MIF Maker Interchange Format FRMI Framelmage FRMV FrameVector SRGB SGI RGB CDR CorelDRAW CGM Computer Graphics Metafile DRW Micrografx CAD DXF Autodesk Drawing eXchange file CAD files GEM GEM file Windows HPGL Hewlett Packard Graphics Language IGES Initial Graphics Exchange Specification CAD files WPG WordPerfect Graphics DIB Device independent bitmap Windows OLE Object Linking and Embedding Client Microsoft Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 115 MIF Document Statements Code Description EMF Enhanced MetaFile Windows MooV QuickTime Movie IMG4 Image to CCITT Group 4 UNIX G4IM CCITT Group 4 to Image Note that this is not a comprehensive list of codes Codes may be added to this list by Adobe or by developers at your site plat formis a code specifying
81. medium top outside rule lt TblColumnRuling Thin gt Use thin rules between columns lt TbIXColumnRuling Thin gt lt TblBodyRowRuling Thin gt Use thin rules between rows lt TblXRowRuling Thin gt lt TblHFRowRuling gt No rules between heading rows lt TblSeparatorRuling Medium gt Use medium rule after heading row Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 29 Using MIF Statements lt TbIXColumnNum 1 gt lt TblRulingPeriod 4 gt lt TblLastBRuling No gt lt TbITitlePlacement InHeader gt Place title above table lt TbITitlePgfl Paragraph format for first lt PgfTag TableTitle gt paragraph in title gt end of TblTitlePgfl lt TblTitleGap 6 0 pt gt Gap between title and table lt TblInitNumColumns 2 gt Initial number of rows and lt TblInitNumHRows 1 gt columns for new tables with lt TblInitNumBodyRows 4 gt this format lt TblInitNumFRows 0 gt lt TbINumByColumn No gt gt end of TblFormat The Tb1Column statement numbers each column and sets its width A table can have more columns than Tb1Column statements if a column does not have a specified format the MIF interpreter uses the format of the most recently defined column A table instance must have at least one To1Column statement A table can use a format from the Table Catalog that includes a Tp1Column statement or it can include a local To1Format statement that supplies the To1Column statement Adding a Table Catal
82. next lt Row gt Additional statements as needed gt End of Tob1 Body statement lt Tb1lF Table footing rows omit if no table footing lt Row gt See Row statement next Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 74 MIF Document Statements lt Row gt Additional statements as needed gt End of Tb1F statement gt End of Tb1 statement Usage The table column statements specify the actual width of the table instance columns They override the column widths specified in the TolFormat statement Row statement A Row statement contains a list of cells It also includes row properties as needed The statement must appear in a Tb1 statement Syntax lt Row lt Conditional gt Specifies conditional row row is unconditional if the statement is omitted lt RowWithNext boolean gt Keep with next body row lt RowWithPrev boolean gt Keep with previous body row lt RowMinHeight dimension gt lt RowMaxHeight dimension gt Minimum row height Maximum row height lt RowHeight dimension gt Row height lt RowPlacement keyword gt Row placement keywordcan be one of Anywhere ColumnTop LPageTop RPageTop PageTop lt Cell gt Each Row statement contains one Ce11 statement for each column see Cell statement next lt Cell gt Additional statements as needed End of Row statement Usage Each
83. no 1 yes 1 Default value 0 no Examples 26 00000001 00 for a solid line 26 00000001 01 for a dashed line Note The style of the dashed line is specified by op code 0x06 Head cap style 0x27 Specification by data type Byte Description of data Size of data in bytes Style of head cap or line end 0 arrow 1 butt 2 round 3 square 1 275 Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 276 FrameVector Facet Format Default value 3 square Example Tail cap style 0x28 27 00000001 00 for arrow style Specification by data type Byte Description of data Size of data in bytes Style of tail cap or line end O arrow 1 butt 2 round 3 square 1 Default value 3 square Example 28 00000001 00 for arrow style Smoothed 0x29 Description of data Specification by data type Byte Is the object smoothed 0 no 1 yes Size of data in bytes 1 Default value 0 no Example 29 00000001 00 for an unsmoothed object 29 00000001 01 for a smoothed object Font name 0x2A Specification by data type Byte string string string some strings not used depending on flag Description of data Flag indicating which names are used to identify the font byte 0 family name 1 family and PostScript name 2 family and platform name 3 all three names Fa
84. of FrameMaker the Import ObFile statement was used to specify the pathname for graphics imported by reference The statement which is no longer used supplies a UNIX style pathname which uses a slash to separate directories for example lt ImportObFile usr doc template mif gt FrameMaker still writes the ImportObFile statements to a MIF file for compatibility with version 1 0 of FrameMaker Facets in imported graphics If a graphic is copied into a document the data describing the graphic is stored as facets in the MIF file Graphics imported by reference also use facets but these are temporary and are not saved to the file A MIF file with a graphic imported by reference does not contain any facets A facet contains graphic data in a specific format For example a TIFF facet contains graphic data described in TIFF format An EPSI facet contains graphic data in EPSI format Facets and facet formats are described in the appendixes of this manual e For a general description of facets and facet formats see Facet Formats for Graphics e For a description of the facet format for EPSI graphic data see EPSI Facet Format e For a description of the FrameImage format used in facets see FrameImage Facet Format For a description of the FrameVector format in facets see FrameVector Facet Format Record of the filter used to import graphic by reference The ImportHint statement contains a record to
85. page 8 You must also supply an xRefEnd statement after the XRef statement How FrameMaker writes cross references When FrameMaker writes a cross reference it provides the actual text that will appear at the reference point This information is not required in a MIF input file The previous example would be written as follows lt XRef lt XRefName Page gt lt XRefSrcText 34126 Heading My Heading gt lt XRefSrcFile gt gt end of XRef lt String page gt The text that appears in the document lt Char HardSpace gt in this case a page number followed a lt String 1 gt hard space and the number 1 lt XRefEnd gt End of cross reference text If you do include the text of the cross reference make sure that the xRefEnd statement follows the text FrameMaker considers everything between the xRef statement and the xRefEnd statement to be part of the cross reference Creating variables In a FrameMaker document variables act as placeholders for text that might change For example many documents use a variable for the current date A variable consists of a name which is how you choose a variable and a definition which contains the text and formatting that appear where a variable is inserted FrameMaker provides two kinds of variables system variables that are predefined by FrameMaker and user variables that are defined by the user System variables contain building blocks that allow FrameMaker to extract certa
86. place the data and template information in the required order Creating anchored frames You can extend the technique of writing separate MIF files to handle both tables and graphics Like table instances anchored frame instances must appear in the MIF file prior to the Text Flow statement If each record contains a graphic or a reference to a graphics file on disk you would create a separate text file called AF rames mif for only the AFrames statement Using the technique described in the previous section you would insert the code for the tables in the Tbls mif file the graphics in the AFrames mif file and the main text flow in the main text file You use an include statement to read in the AFrames mif file Remember to assign unique ID numbers in the Tb11D statement for each table and the 1D statement for each frame Online manual 234 MIF Messages When the MIF interpreter reads a MIF file it might detect errors such as unexpected character sequences In UNIX versions the MIF interpreter displays messages in a console window In the Macintosh and Windows versions you must turn on Show File Translation Errors in the Preferences dialog box to display messages in a window a console window in the Windows version If the MIF interpreter finds an error it continues to process the MIF file and reads as much of the document as possible General form for MIF messages The general form of all MIF messages is MIF Line LineNum Message
87. reference frame from reference page to put below paragraph lt PgfBotSepAtIndent boolean gt Yes if the position of the frame specified by the PgfBot Separator statement is at the current left indent lt PgfBotSepOffset dimension gt Position at which to place the reference frame below the para graph Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 161 MIF Statements for Structured Documents and Books Table cell properties lt PgfCellAlignment keyword gt Vertical alignment for first paragraph in a cell keywordcan be one of Top Middle Bottom lt PgfCellLMargin dimension gt Left cell margin for first paragraph in a cell lt PgfCellLMarginChange dimension gt Change to left cell margin for first paragraph in a cell lt PgfCellBMargin dimension gt Bottom cell margin for first paragraph in a cell lt PgfCellBMarginChange dimension gt Change to bottom cell margin for first paragraph in a cell lt PgfCellTMargin dimension gt Top cell margin for first paragraph in a cell lt PgfCellTMarginChange dimension gt Change to top cell margin for first paragraph in a cell lt PgfCellRMargin dimension gt Right cell margin for first paragraph in a cell lt PgfCellRMarginChange dimension gt Change to right cell margin for first paragraph in a cell lt PgfCellLMarginFixed boolean gt Yes means the left cell margin is fixed lt PgfCellTMarginFixed boolean
88. specify the page size margins and number of columns in the text frame in the document The MIF interpreter uses this information to create master pages and body pages These statements correspond to the Normal Page Layout options The following example is in the sample file columlay mif lt MIFFile 7 00 gt Hand generated lt Document lt DPageSize 7 5 9 0 gt Set the page size lt DMargins 2 1 5 5 gt Set the margins lt DColumns 1 gt Set the number of columns in the default text frame lt DTwoSides No gt Set document to single sided gt end of Document lt TextFlow Document text is in this text flow lt TFTag A gt Make this a tagged text flow lt TFAutoConnect Yes gt Automatically connect text frames lt Para lt ParaLine lt String This paragraph appears on a body page within a gt lt String text flow tagged A gt gt end of ParaLine Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 33 Using MIF Statements gt end of Para gt end of TextFlow End of MIFFile Creating a single sided custom layout If the document that you re importing needs a custom master page you must specify a custom page layout For example a document might need a master page for background graphics To create a custom layout for a single sided document you do the following e Create a right master page e Create a single empty body page e Create an empty tagged text flow that is linked to the master page
89. statement The MarkerTypeCatalog statement defines the contents of the catalog of user defined markers for the current document A document can have only one MarkerTypeCatalog statement Syntax lt MarkerTypeCatalog Marker name as it appears in the Marker Type popup menu of the Marker dialog box lt MTypeName string gt gt end of MarkerTypeCatalog End of MarkerTypeCatalog statement Marker statement The Marker statement inserts a marker It must appear in a ParaLine statement For version 5 5 of MIF and later markers are identified by their names If you open an earlier version MIF file that uses markers of type 11 through type 25 the document will show those marker numbers as the marker names For MIF version 5 5 or later MType numbers are still assigned for backward compatibility but the assignment of numbers is fairly arbitrary If the document includes more than 15 custom markers Type 11 through Type 25 then the extra custom markers will be assigned lt MType 25 gt Online manual Syntax ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 125 MIF Document Statements lt Marker lt nique ID gt ID persistent across sessions assigned when FrameMaker generates a MIF file used by the FDK client and should not be used by filters Type integer gt Marker type number for list of allowed values see Usage next Marker type numbers are not used for the current versions of FrameMaker but they are incl
90. template specifies a document s elements and the correct order of elements and text in the document There are two basic groups of structure elements e Containers tables and footnotes which can hold text and other elements e Object elements such as graphic frames equations markers system variables and cross references An object element holds one of its specified type of object and nothing more Tables belong to both groups of elements Although they can contain other elements table parts such as rows and cells tables are also object elements In a MIF file an element definition is defined by an ElementDef statement Element definitions are stored in the Element Catalog which is defined by the Element DefCatalog statement Within a text flow elements are indicated by Element Begin and ElementEnd statements When FrameMaker reads a MIF file that does not support structure they strip MIF statements for structure such as ElementBegin ElementEnd and ElementDe fCatalog statements ElementDefCatalog statement The ElementDefCatalog statement defines the contents of the Element Catalog A document or book file can have only one ElementDefCatalog statement which must appear at the top level in the order given in MIF file layout on page 11 Syntax lt ElementDefCatalog Begin Element Catalog lt ElementDef gt Defines an element see ElementDef statement next lt ElementDef gt Additional s
91. that the fields in the record are not separated by spaces For example 0001XTNDWDBNMACP0002MS Word 4 5 In this example 0001 is the record version xTND is the vendor wDBN is the format id mace is the platform 0002 is the filter version and MS Word 4 5 is the filter name The rest of this section describes each field in the record record_vers is the version on the record for example 0001 vendor is a code specifying the filter s vendor The code is a string of four characters The following table lists some of the possible codes Code Description PGRF Built in FrameMaker filters FAPT External FDK client filter FFLT External FrameMaker filters IMAG External ImageMark filters XTND External XTND filters Note that this is not a comprehensive list of codes Codes may be added to this list by Adobe or by developers at your site format_id is a code specifying the format that the filter translates The code is a string of four characters The following table lists some of the possible codes Code Description WDBN Microsoft Word compound document WPBN WordPerfect compound document RTF Microsoft s RTF compound document IAF Interleaf compound document MIF Maker Interchange Format MRTF MIF to RTF export MIAF MIF to IAF export MWPB MIF to WordPerfect export TRFF troff to MIF UNIX only TRFA troff man to MIF UN
92. the equation a MathFul1Form statement can contain special instruc tions for character formatting manual alignment points and positioning and spacing values Expressions have the following syntax ExpressionName FormatCodes operand operand Where Is ExpressionName The expression name for example abs FormatCodes Optional formatting codes for example i 2i described next operand Another expression Formatting codes are enclosed within asterisk delimiters If an expression doesn t contain formatting codes it cannot contain asterisks Formatting codes consist of a pair of flags enclosing a numeric value or string except for boolean flags which are a single flag For example the following expression contains formatting codes that select a display format and a boolean flag to set a manual line break point lt MathFullForm id i2i char x gt String values in format codes must be enclosed in straight double quotation marks To include characters in the extended ASCII range above 0x127 use a backslash sequence see Character set in strings on page 7 Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 MIF Equation Statements You can use the following formatting codes which can appear in any order The default for all numeric values is 0 Format code Meaning A integerA Manual alignment mark in element O none 1 right 2 left b metricb Extra space at bottom of expression corre
93. the following line Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 54 MIF Document Statements lt MIFFile 7 00 gt Generated by FrameMaker 7 0 MIF is compatible across versions so a MIF interpreter can parse any MIF file The results may sometimes differ from your intentions if a MIF file describes features that are not included in FrameMaker that reads the MIF file For more information see MIF Compatibility Control statements Control statements set defaults provide debugging information and insert comments Units statement The Units statement specifies the default units for dimensions and coordinates in the document It can appear anywhere at the top level or within any statement Syntax lt Units keyword gt Default units for document keyword can be one of Uin Ucm Umm Upica Upt Udd Ucc Usage If no Units statement is provided the default value is Uin A Units statement remains in effect until another units statement is encountered When FrameMaker writes a MIF file it uses the document s current display units CharUnits statement The CharUnits statement specifies the default units for measuring font size and line spacing This is to accom modate the Japanese Q units of measurement This statement can appear anywhere at the top level or within any statement Syntax lt CharUnits keyword gt Default units for font size and line spacing keyword can be one of CUpt CUQ
94. the platform on which the filter was run The code is a string of four characters The following table lists some of the possible codes Code Description MAC6 Macintosh 68000 series MACP Power Macintosh WINT Windows NT WIN3 Windows 3 1 WIN4 Windows 95 UNIX Generic X 11 Sun HP filter_vers isa string of four characters identifying the version of the filter on that platform For example version 1 0 of a filter is represented by the string 1 0 filter_name is a text string less than 31 characters long that describes the filter More information about imported graphics For additional information on imported graphics consult one of the following sources e For instructions about modifying an application to create graphic insets for FrameMaker documents see the FDK Programmer s Guide e If you are using FrameServer or Live Links with graphic insets see the online manual Using FrameServer with Applications and Insets which is included in the UNIX version of the Frame Developer s Kit e For more information about importing graphics see your user s manual Math statement A Math statement describes an equation For its description see MIF Equation Statements Polygon statement The Polygon statement describes a polygon It can appear at the top level or in a Page or Frame statement Online manual Syntax ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 116 MIF Document Statements
95. these products expect the kerning value in points Table statements In version 5 tables can be aligned along the inside or outside edge in relation to the binding of a book of a text column or text frame As a result of this change the Tb1Alignment statement now supports the additional keywords Inside and Outside In addition the existing TolTitleContent statement is now contained in the new Tb1Tit le statement For more information about the MIF syntax for tables see Tbl statement on page 72 Document statements In version 5 the DAcrobat BookmarksIncludeTagNames statement has been added under the Document statement to support the conversion of paragraph tags to bookmarks in Adobe Acrobat By default this statement is set to No Another new statement DGenerateAcrobat Info sets print options to the required states for generating Acrobat information By default this statement is set to Yes For Macintosh publishers the new DLinkBoundariesOn statement specifies whether or not the boundaries of the publisher are visible For View Only documents the default value of the DviewOnlySelect statement has changed from Yes to UserOnly Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 242 MIF Compatibility For text insets the following statement has been renamed MIF 4 00 MIF 5 00 lt DUpdateDataLinksOnOpen boolean gt lt DUpdateTextInsetsOnOpen boolean gt Document and text flow statements In version 5 the M
96. to display in the book window next to the book component icons It can appear anywhere in the file but normally appears just after the book s View Only statements Syntax lt BWindowRect X Y W H gt Book window placement on screen lt BDisplayText keyword gt The type of text to display next to component icons in the book window keyword can be one of AsFilename displays the filename of the book component in the book window AsText displays a text snippet from the first paragraph of the com ponent in the book window BookComponent statement The BookComponent statement contains the setup information for a document or generated file in a book The BookComponent statements must precede all other statements that represent book content The order of BookCom ponent statements determines the order of the documents in the book You specify the setup information as substatements nested within the overall book component statement A BookComponent statement doesn t need all these substatements which can occur in any order A BookComponent statement can contain one or more DeriveTag statements Online manual Syntax ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 MIF Book File Statements lt BookComponent Book components lt FileName pathname gt A document or generated file in the book for pathname syntax see page 8 lt DisplayText string gt The text to display in the book window next to the icon for this compo nent Frame
97. unique in the final document and that refer ences to object IDs are correct see Generic object statements on page 101 Editing MIF files You normally use a text editor to edit a MIF file If you use FrameMaker to enter text into a MIF file be sure to open the MIF file as a text file and turn off Smart Quotes If you leave Smart Quotes on you must use a key sequence to type the quotation marks that enclose a MIF string To enter a left quotation mark type Control To enter a straight quotation mark type Control Although MIF statements are usually generated by a program while you learn MIF or test and debug an application that generates MIF you may need to manually generate MIF statements In either case you can minimize the number of MIF statements that your application needs to generate or that you need to type in The following suggestions may be helpful when you are working with MIF statements e Edit a MIF file generated by FrameMaker e You can edit a MIF file generated by FrameMaker or copy a group of statements from a MIF file into your file and then edit the statements An easy way to use FrameMaker to generate a MIF file is to create an empty document by using the New command and then saving it as a MIF file e Test one object at a time e While testing an object in a document or learning about the MIF statements that describe an object work with just that object For example if you work with a document th
98. uses the paragraph formats defined in NewTem plate For information on defaults specified in templates see page 3 If you include PgfCatalog paragraph formats in the MIF file replace default formats The MIF interpreter does not add your paragraph format to the default Paragraph Catalog although it provides default values for unspecified properties in a paragraph format see Creating and applying paragraph formats on page 12 Pgf statement The Pgf statement defines a paragraph format Pgf statements can appear in many statements the statement descriptions show where Pgf can be used The Pgf statement contains substatements that set the properties of a paragraph format Most of these properties correspond to those in the Paragraph Designer Properties can appear in any order within a Pgf statement with the following exception the PgfNumTabs statement must appear before any TabSt op statements Syntax Basic properties lt Pgf Begin paragraph format lt PgfTag tagstring gt Paragraph tag name Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 59 MIF Document Statements lt PgfUseNextTag boolean gt Turns on following paragraph tag feature lt PgfNextTag tagstring gt Tag name of following paragraph lt PgfFIndent dimension gt First line left margin measured from left side of current text column lt PgfFIndentRelative boolean gt Used for structured documents only lt PgfFIndentOffset d
99. 0 for a polyline with the following specifications number of points 2 00000002 point 1 x position 18 points 0012 point 1 y position 54 points 0036 point 2 x position 252 points OOFC point 2 y position 63 points 003F Note When smoothed style is on this object becomes a Bezier curve Rectangle 0x83 Specification by data type Rectangle Description of data Position and size of rectangle in points Size of data in bytes 166 Example 83 00000010 00670000 004F0000 00130000 003C0000 for a rectangle with the following specifications x position 103 points 0067 y position 79 points 004F width 19 points 0013 height 60 points 003C 280 Online manual Rounded rectangle 0x84 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 281 FrameVector Facet Format Specification by data type Metric rectangle Description of data Radius of corners in points metric Position and size of rectangle in points rectangle Size of data in bytes 20 Example 84 00000014 00120000 007E0000 007E0000 00630000 00240000 for a rounded rectangle with the following specifications radius of corners 18 points 0012 x position 126 points 007E y position 126 points 007E width 99 points 0063 height 36 points 0024 Arc 0x85 Specification by data type Rectangle metric metric Description of data Po
100. 0 e eee 11 Creating and applying character formats 2 eee eee 21 Creating and formatting tables 2 cece eee 23 Specifying page layout 6 eee 31 Creating markers occ tect ete t eens 36 Creating cross references 60 nunnana 36 Greating Variables cis cde cows een Fad nde Sed oa PEA Soe eee eaves 38 Creating conditional text 60 eees 40 Including template files 0 seiri iin e aan cece eens 43 Setting View Only document options 006 0 ese c eee ee eee 45 Applications Ot MIR ae ccce cute i pale ce eu denied 47 Debugging MIF files n nnana 50 Other application tools 2 cece eee eee 51 Where to go from here 0 eee eee ees 51 MIFAIE layout oiie e a 52 MIFFilestatement n e a E EEEE 53 Control statements aen ie cette a a 54 Macro statements esan nee ee cece aa EAEE AE A EE T aN 55 Conditional text L nuanua aeaaeae 56 Paragraph formats ernen EA E der a AEE E EE 58 Chatacterformats esse ye iar E ge ae E R E EE ERA 62 TADES op tikes eE vidal eae tad T E aA 68 GOOR aiad E a E T AE ERT 77 Variables sie sanma a TA Pewee E a E ee 80 GIOSS FOTEIENGES x civ acing aena a RE Sand ate 81 MIF Book File Statements MIF Statements for Structured Documents and Books MIF Equation Statements MIF Asian Text Processing Statements Global document properties 0 0 cece eee eens 82 Pagese aan Sis Meese EAE ie nove Rennes AGnniein E ae 99 Graphic objects and graphic frames wo eee 01 EXE TIOWS hls
101. 0000A 0002 00080000 00060000 for a dashed line with the following specifications number of dash segments 2 dash segment 1 line segment 8 0 points long dash segment 2 gap in dashed line 6 0 points long Arrow style 0x07 Specification by data type Byte byte byte byte metric metric Description of data Tip angle in degrees byte between 5 and 85 degrees Base angle in degrees byte between 10 and 175 degrees Arrow type byte O stick 1 hollow 2 filled Scale the arrow byte 0 no 1 yes Length in points metric Scale factor metric Size of data in bytes 12 Default value default arrow style 273 Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 FrameVector Facet Format Example 07 0000000C 10 5A 02 00 000C0000 00004000 for an arrow style with the following specifications tip angle 16 10 base angle 90 5A arrow type filled 02 arrow scaled no 00 length 12 points 000C0000 scale factor 0 25 00004000 Rotation angle 0x20 Specification by data type Metric Description of data Angle in degrees Size of data in bytes 4 Default value 0 Example 20 00000004 00500000 for the rotation angle of 80 Pen pattern 0x21 Specification by data type Byte Description of data Index to pen patterns see Values for Pen and Fill statements on pa
102. 0000A0008526567756C617200 e The font weight is Regular amp 2E0000000A0008526567756C617200 e The font word spread value is 50 amp 330000000400008000 e The font style is Small Caps amp 2C0000000400001000 The text in the text line is FrameVector Graphic amp 88000000160014 xFrameVector Graphic x00 The rest of the styles are inherited from previous objects The following record specifies the end of the text line amp 8900000000 Specification of the polyline The polyline in this example has the following specifications e The arrow style has a tip angle of 16 and a base angle of 120 amp 070000000C1078 e The arrow style is defined so that the arrow is filled and is scaled as it gets wider The length of the arrow is 12 points If the line is widened the arrow head also is widened by a corresponding factor of 0 25 0201000C00000004000 e The style of the head cap of the polyline is arrow amp 270000000100 e The polyline consists of two points amp 820000001400000002 e The positions of the two points are 114 points 85 points and 51 points 85 points 00720000005500000033000000550000 The rest of the styles are inherited from previous objects Specification of the arc The arc in this example has the following specifications The fill pattern of the arc is none OF amp 22000000010F e The style of the head cap of the arc is square amp 270000000103 e The position of the arc is 4 poin
103. 003FF amp 8000000000 amp 8007FF amp 00000001 Graphic data 4 Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 267 Framelmage Facet Format amp 8003FF amp 0000000 amp 8003FF amp 0000000 amp 8003FF amp 0000000 amp 8003FF amp 0000000 amp 8003FF amp 0000000 amp 8003FF amp 0000000 amp 8007FF amp x EndInset Graphic data 4 Online manual 268 FrameVector Facet Format FrameVector is a format for vector graphics that is recognized by FrameMaker on all platforms The specification of the FrameVector format is documented in this appendix Imported graphics can contain graphic data in FrameVector format This data is called the FrameVector facet of the graphic FrameMaker can use this facet to display and print the graphic For more information about facets see Facet Formats for Graphics In a MIF file the FrameVector facet is contained in the Import Object statement For more information about the statement see ImportObject statement on page 110 Specification of a FrameVector facet A FrameVector facet begins with the following facet name facet data type and version number lines FrameVector amp v amp lt MakerVectorXXX gt In the version number line XXX is a three character string identifying the version of FrameMaker For example the character string lt MakerVector5 0 gt identifies an imported graphic created in FrameMaker 5 0 If the imported graphi
104. 00550000 amp 22000000010F amp 270000000103 amp 850000001800040000002B0000002F0000002C0000005A0000005A0000 amp FF00000000 amp x EndInset The following sections explain the syntax used to describe this facet Definition op codes for the FrameVector graphic ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 285 FrameVector Facet Format The example begins with the ASCII string lt MakerVector 5 0 gt The x characters indicate that the data that follows is in hexadecimal format The following lines specify the FrameVector version 5 0 and the size 5 x 3 or 360 points by 216 points and position 0 0 of the FrameVector graphic amp 010000000150 amp 020000001000000000000000000168000000D80000 Since colors are not used in this example the color op codes are not specified Specification of the rectangle shadow The drop shadow of the rectangle is drawn first since it appears behind the other graphic objects The rectangle has the following specifications e The line width is 0 5 point amp 230000000400008000 e The pen pattern is none OF amp 21000000010F e The color is black amp 24000000080006426C61636B00 The line is solid not dashed amp 260000000100 Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 286 FrameVector Facet Format e The fill pattern is grey 04 amp 220000000104 e The rotation angle is 0 amp 200000000400000000 e The position of the rectangle is 122 points 82 points amp 8300000010007A000000
105. 1 1 0 0 char x num 1 1 num 2 2 gt 172 12 lt MathFullForm chem 0 0 1 1 char x num 1 1 num 2 2 gt x 1 lt MathFullForm Xx 2 3 chem 1 1 1 0 char x num 1 1 num 2 2 num 3 3 gt 13 lt MathFullForm x 3 chem 1 0 1 1 char x num 1 1 num 2 2 num 3 3 gt 12 lt MathFullForm x 374 chem 1 1 1 1 char x num 1 1 num 2 2 num 3 3 num 4 4 gt tensor The tensor expression represents specially formatted tensor notation The first operand describes the position of the tensor indexes subsequent operands define the indexes The leftmost tensor index corresponds to the least significant bit of the first operand in binary format the rightmost index corresponds to the most significant bit 0 is the subscript position 1 is the superscript position The following table shows forms of tensor Example MathFullForm statement A 2 lt MathFullForm tensor 2 char x num 1 1 num 2 2 gt 1 a lt MathFullForm tensor 1 char x num 1 1 num 2 2 gt 2 x lt MathFullForm tensor 1 char x num 1 1 num 2 2 num 3 3 23 x 23 lt MathFullForm tensor 6 char x num 1 1 num 2 2 num 3 3 1 R 2 lt MathFullForm tensor 2 char x num 1 1 num 2 2 num 3 3 13 A 3 lt MathFullForm tensor 5 char x num 1 1 num 2 2 num 3 3 2 3 lt MathFullForm tensor 4 char x num 1 1 num 2 2 num 3 3
106. 16 Example 02 00000010 00000000 00000000 020A0000 00BD0000 for a graphic with the following specifications x position 0 points 0000 y position 0 points 0000 width 522 points 020A height 189 points OOBD Note This must be the second op code for a FrameVector graphic Online manual CMYK color definition 0x03 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 272 FrameVector Facet Format Specification by data type String metric metric metric Metric Description of data Name of color tag string Percentages of cyan magenta yellow and black metric metric metric metric Size of data in bytes Variable Example 03 0000001B 00 OB 53 61 67 65 20 47 72 65 65 6E 00 00500000 00230000 00320000 00000000 for a color named Sage Green with the following specifications cyan 80 0050 magenta 35 0023 yellow 50 0032 black 0 0000 Note See Definition op codes on page 269 for more information on color definitions RGB color definition 0x04 Specification by data type String metric metric metric Description of data Name of color tag string Percentages of red green and blue metric metric metric Size of data in bytes Example Variable 03 0000001B 00 OB 53 61 67 65 20 47 72 65 65 6E 00 00280000 00410000 00330000 for a color named Sage Green with the following specifications red 40 0028 gre
107. 2 Search for the first body page and locate its TextRect statement Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 44 Using MIF Statements To find the first body page search for the first occurrence of lt PageType BodyPage gt Suppose the first body page in your MIF file looks like this lt Page lt Unique 45155 gt lt PageType BodyPage gt lt PageNum 1 gt lt PageSize 8 5 11 0 gt lt PageOrientation Portrait gt lt PageAngle 0 0 gt lt PageBackground Default gt lt TextRect lt ID 7 gt lt Unique 45158 gt lt Pen 15 gt lt Fill 15 gt lt PenWidth 1 0 pt gt lt ObColor Black gt lt DashedPattern lt DashedStyle Solid gt gt end of DashedPattern lt ShapeRect 1 0 1 0 6 5 9 0 gt lt TRNext 0 gt gt end of TextRect gt end of Page The ID for the Text Rect on this body page is 7 Remember this ID number If there is more than one Text Rect on the body page remember the ID of the first one 3 Locate the text flow associated with the TextRect statement on the first body page and delete it Suppose you are working with the previous example You would search for the statement lt TextRect ID 7 gt to locate the text flow It might look similar to the following lt TextFlow lt Notes gt end of Notes lt Para lt Unique 45157 gt lt PgfTag MyFormat gt lt ParaLine lt TextRectID 7 gt lt String A single line of text gt gt gt end of Para gt end of TextFlow
108. 2 Shortest Prefix 3 Properties Advanced gt _______ 7 _ Hyphenate I ey Word Spacing of Standard Space Shortest Word Shortest Suffix 3 To Selection Minimum 90 0 Optimum 100 0 Update All Maximum 110 0 Standard Space 0 25 em oo Tagged Allow Automatic Letter Spacing ody A None o None Ominami F Frame Above Below 4 The following table shows the corresponding MIF statements In MIF file lt PgfHyphenate Yes gt lt HyphenMaxLines 2 gt lt HyphenMinWord 5 gt lt HyphenMinPrefix 3 gt lt HyphenMinSuffix 3 gt lt PgfMinWordSpace 90 gt lt PgfOptWordSpace 100 gt lt PgfMaxWordSpace 110 gt lt PgfLetterSpace Yes gt lt PgfTopSeparator gt lt PgfBotSeparator gt In Paragraph Designer Automatic Hyphenation on Max Adjacent Shortest Word Shortest Prefix Shortest Suffix Minimum Word Spacing Optimum Word Spacing Maximum Word Spacing Allow Automatic Letter Spacing Frame Above Frame Below 4 Online manual The Table Cell properties are defined as follows in the Paragraph Designer Paragraph Tag Properties Apply To Selection Update All Formats Tagged Numbered Commands From Table Format Plus From Table Format Plus From Table Format Plus From Table Format Plus The following table shows the corresponding MIF statements In MIF file In Paragraph Designer
109. 250 Facet Formats for Graphics Unsigned bytes If the facet data contains a backslash character another backslash precedes it as an escape character For example if the data contains the string x yz the facet contains x yz Within the facet data nonprintable ASCII characters or non ASCII bytes greater than 7 are represented in hexadecimal Any section of data represented in hexadecimal is preceded and followed by the characters x For example the following FrameImage facet contains data represented in hexadecimal which is enclosed between two sets of x characters FramelImage amp v amp x amp 59a66a95 amp 00000040 amp 0000FC0001FC0000 amp x EndInset Integer data The integer data type stores integer values in a facet For example the fmbitmap program stores the dimensions of the graphic the x coordinate of the hot spot and the y coordinate of the hot spot as integer data in a facet Data facet amp i amp 64 amp 64 amp 1 amp 1 Metric data Metric data describes a graphic in terms of units of measurement The following table shows the abbreviations used to denote units within a facet Units Abbreviation Centimeters cm Ciceros cicero cc Didots dd Inches in Millimeters mm Picas pica pipe Points point pt Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 251 Facet Formats for Graphics Graphic insets UNIX versions A graphic inset contains graphic data
110. 4 157 for exception columns and body rows 70 for heading and footing cells 70 for objects 103 color map in FramelImage file 262 color custom 77 ColorAttribute 79 ColorBlack 78 ColorCatalog 78 ColorCyan 78 ColorLibraryFamilyName 78 ColorLibraryInkName 78 ColorMagenta 78 ColorOverprint 79 ColorTag 78 ColorTint 79 ColorTintBaseColor 79 ColorYellow 78 ColumnGap 100 Columns 100 columns in a table body cell paragraph format 71 footing cell paragraph format 71 heading cell paragraph format 71 number 73 width 73 columns text default number per page 84 89 Combined fonts 199 CombinedFontAllowBaseFamilyBold edAndObliqued 200 CombinedFontBaseEncoding 200 CombinedFontBaseFamily 199 CombinedFontCatalog 199 CombinedFontDefn 199 CombinedFontName 199 CombinedFontWesternFamily 200 CombinedFontWesternShift 200 CombinedFontWesternSize 200 comma 190 Comment 55 Condition 57 condition tags creating and applying 40 43 syntax 57 Conditional 57 in ParaLine 122 in Row 74 conditional rows ina table 74 conditional text showing hiding 85 91 ConditionCatalog 57 cong 190 Context 152 ContextFormatRule 151 154 ContextLabel 154 ContPageNum 91 140 Corel Draw files imported 111 cos 187 cosh 187 cot 187 coth 187 CountElement 152 CountElements 152 Cropped 108 cross 189 cross references 126 automatically active 46 creating 36 csc 187 csch 187 CSeparation 57 244 CState 57 CStyle 57 CTag 57
111. 4 View 80 View Only documents setting options 45 view options settings 86 93 ViewCutout 80 ViewInvisible 80 ViewNumber 80 Views 79 volume numbering inabook 139 VolumeNumComputeMethod 90 140 VolumeNumStart 89 139 VolumeNumStyle 89 139 VolumeNumText 89 139 w wedge 192 widow orphan lines in a paragraph 60 lines in a table 69 window placement document window 83 89 302 WMF files imported 111 WPG files imported 111 X XRef 122 125 XRefDef in BookXRef 142 in XRefFormats 81 XRefEnd 126 XRefFormat 81 XRefFormats 81 XRefLocked 126 131 XRefName 81 126 XRefSrcFile in BookXRef 142 in ParaLine 126 XRefSrcIsElem 126 142 XRefSrcText in BookXRef 142 in ParaLine 126 xwd files imported 111
112. 520000 e The size of the rectangle is 192 points by 25 points 00C0000000190000 Specification of the polygon The polygon in this example has the following specifications e The pen pattern is solid 00 amp 210000000100 The fill pattern is white 07 amp 220000000107 e The polygon has three points amp 810000001C00000003 e The positions of the three points are 15 points 65 points 41 points 113 points and 76 points 65 points 000E00000041000000290000007 10000004C000000410000 The rest of the styles are inherited from the previous object Specification of the rectangle The white rectangle in this example has the following specifications e The position of the rectangle is 114 points 74pt amp 830000001000720000004A0000 e The size of the rectangle is 192 points by 25 points 00C0000000190000 The rest of the styles are inherited from previous objects Specification of the text line The text line in this example has the following specifications e The position of the text line is 123 points 92 points and the text line is left aligned amp 8700000009007B0000005C000000 e The text line uses the Helvetica font amp 2A0000000C00000A xHelvetica x00 e The text line uses a 9 point font amp 2B0000000400090000 e The font variation is Regular amp 300000000A0008526567756C617200 e The font angle is Regular Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 287 FrameVector Facet Format amp 2F000
113. 78 lt DAutoChBars boolean gt Turns automatic change bars on or off Document view properties lt DGridOn boolean gt Turns on page grid upon opening lt DPageGrid dimension gt Spacing of page grid lt DSnapGrid dimension gt Spacing of snap grid lt DSnapRotation degrees gt Angle of rotation snap lt DRulersOn boolean gt Turns on rulers upon opening lt DFullRulers boolean gt Turns on formatting ruler upon opening lt DBordersOn boolean gt Turns on borders upon opening lt DSymbolsOn boolean gt Turns on text symbols upon opening lt DGraphicsOff boolean gt Yes displays text only Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 87 MIF Document Statements lt DPageScrolling keyword gt Specifies how FrameMaker displays consecutive pages keywordcan be one of Variable Horizontal Vertical Facing lt DCurrentView integer gt Specifies current color view 1 6 lt DLinkBoundariesOn boolean gt View Only document properties Turns on boundaries for Macintosh publishers upon open ing lt DViewOnly boolean gt lt DViewOnlyXRef keyword gt Yes specifies View Only document locked Changes behavior of active cross references in View Only document see page 46 keywordcan be one of GotoBehavior OpenBehavior NotActive lt DViewOnlySelect keyword gt Disables enables user selection in View Only document incl
114. Adobe FrameMaker 70 MIF Reference Online Manual 7 Adobe Adobe the Adobe logo Acrobat Acrobat Reader Adobe Type Manager ATM Display PostScript Distiller Exchange Frame FrameMaker InstantView and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Apple PowerBook QuickTime Mac Macintosh and Power Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc registered in the United States and other countries HP UX is a registered trademark of Hewlett Packard Company Microsoft MS DOS Windows and Windows NT are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Sun and Solaris are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems Inc in the United States and other countries Unix is a registered trademark and X Window System is a trademark of The Open Group All other trademarks are property of their respective owners 2002 Adobe Systems Incorporated All rights reserved Contents Introduction Using MIF Statements MIF Document Statements Why USe MIE2 dudes shot atadaas sr a a E cee E ty eee 1 Wsinigithissmantal cc oes coats vac aah Gale a ia Eaa aE O See oak 1 Style conventions 6 cette teen t eee 2 Overview of MIF statements 6 0 cece cece eee ees 2 MIFstatement Syntax Aisssas enno yeas pancetta bend Bene ees eee nies 4 Working with MIF files nannaa nananana e eee ees 9 Creating a simple MIF file for FrameMaker 0 02002 000
115. BusinessKazu Custom lt VolumeNumfText string gt When VolumeNumSt y1e is set to Custom this is the string to use Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 90 MIF Document Statements lt VolNumComputeMethod keyword gt Volume numbering keyword can be one of StartNumbering restart numbering Cont inueNumbering continue numbering from previous docu ment in book UseSameNumbering use the same numbering as previous docu ment in book Chapter numbering lt ChapterNumStart integer gt Starting chapter number lt ChapterNumStyle keyword gt Style of chapter numbering keyword can be one of Arabic UCRoman LCRoman UCAlpha LCAlpha anjiNumeric ZenArabic ZenUCAlpha ZenLCAlpha anjikazu BusinessKazu Custom lt ChapterNumText string gt When ChapterNumSt ye is set to Custom this is the string to use lt ChapterNumComputeMethod keyword gt Chapter numbering keyword can be one of StartNumbering restart numbering Cont inueNumbering continue numbering from previous docu ment in book UseSameNumbering use the same numbering as previous docu ment in book Page numbering lt DPageNumStyle keyword gt Page numbering style keyword can be one of Arabic UCRoman LCRoman UCAlpha LCAlpha ZenLCAlpha ZenUCAlpha KanjiNumeric Kanjikazu BusinessKazu lt DPagePointStyle keyword gt Point page number style keyword can be one of Arabic UCRoman LCRoman
116. ColumnWidthP PTotal Sum of the values for all Tob1ColumnWidthP statements in the table PWidth Available space for all proportional columns Tb 1Width the sum of fixed width columns For example suppose you want a four column table to be 7 inches wide but only the last three columns to have proportional width e The columns have the following widths Column 1 has a fixed width value of 1 lt Tb1ColumnWidth 1 gt Column 2 has a proportional value of 2 lt Tb1ColumnWidthP 2 gt Column 3 has a proportional value of 1 lt Tb1ColumnWidthP 1 gt Column 4 has a proportional value of 1 lt Tb1ColumnWidthP 1 gt e Available width for proportional columns PWidth is 7 1 or 6 e Sum of all proportional values PTotal is2 1 1or4 e Width for Column 2 is 2 PTotal x PWidth 2 4 x 6 or 3 e Width for Column 3 or Column 4 is 1 PTotal x PWidth 1 4 x 6 or 1 5 Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 77 MIF Document Statements RulingCatalog statement The RulingCatalog statement defines the contents of the Ruling Catalog which describes ruling styles for tables A document can have only one RulingCatalog statement which must appear at the top level in the order given in MIF file layout on page 52 Syntax lt RulingCatalog lt Ruling gt Defines ruling style see Ruling statement on page 77 lt Ruling gt Additional statements as needed gt End of RulingCatalog statement
117. CompositeEnd 214 RubiTextBegin 214 RubiTextEnd 214 rulers displaying 86 93 Ruling in RulingCatalog 77 ruling style cell 75 properties 77 in table formats 69 RulingCatalog 77 RulingColor 77 RulingGap 77 RulingLines 77 RulingPen 77 RulingPenWidth 77 RulingSeparation 77 244 RulingTag 77 RunaroundGap 102 RunaroundType 102 S sample files 9 ScaleFactor 106 299 ScaleHead 106 sec 188 sech 188 semicolon 188 Separation 102 244 in Frame 102 in objects 102 Series 98 sgn 188 ShapeRect in Fllipse 107 in Frame 107 in ImportObject 110 111 in Math 177 in Rectangle 117 in RoundRect 117 in TextRect 118 side heads changes in specification 243 specification in text frame 119 sim 192 sin 188 sinh 188 Smart Quotes 84 91 Smart Spaces 84 91 Smoothed in Polygon 116 in PolyLine 116 in Rectangle 117 sn 190 spanning columns rows 75 Sparel 5 206 SpclHyphenation 122 special characters 7 predefined 123 SpecialCase 161 spell checking language default for document 87 94 in paragraphs and characters 64 sqrt 193 SqueezeHorizontal 206 SqueezeTable 206 SqueezeVertical 206 StartPageSide 139 statements for book files 135 143 for document files 52 125 for equations 173 197 StopCountingAt 152 straddling columns rows 75 straight quotation mark 5 String in ParaLine 122 126 in TextLine 118 string in MathFullForm 182 strings 5 in equations 182 quotation marks around 5 syntax 5 structured documents 244 subs
118. EDEndElementRules 151 EDExclusions 145 EDGeneralRule 145 EDInclusions 145 EDInitialTablePattern 146 EDObject 145 EDObjectFormatRules 149 EDPgfFormat 146 EDPrefixRules 150 EDStartElementRules 150 EDSuffixRules 146 EDTag 145 165 168 EDTextFormatRules 149 EDTSuffixRules 150 EDValidHighestLevel 145 Element 166 170 element properties general rule 145 highest level element 145 inclusions exclusions 145 object type 145 tag 145 ementBegin 161 ementContext 166 ementDef 145 ementEnd 162 ementPrefix 154 E E E ElementDefCatalog 144 E E E ementReferenced 161 elements 161 marking in document 161 163 ementSuffix 154 se 152 self 153 Namespace 161 162 NameSpacePath 162 E E E E E E NamespacePrefix 162 EndInset 110 EndParentheses 205 EPS files imported 111 EPSI format 258 equal 190 EqualizeWidths in determining table width 76 in Tbl 73 equations 173 197 alignment 178 atomic expressions in 181 186 binary operators in 189 characters in 182 indices in 194 large operators in 192 matrices in 196 N ary operators in 190 numbers in 181 operators in 186 196 optional operands in 193 rotation 177 samples of 179 197 size 178 strings in 182 unary operators in 186 equiv 190 error messages 234 236 ETag 161 166 170 ETextSnippet 170 Exclusion 145 exists 187 exp 187 F facets defined 110 EPSI 258 FrameImage 260 FrameVector 268 fact 187 FAngle 63 157 FBold 65 FCase 65 158
119. Element lt Unique 123457 gt lt ETag Rubi gt lt Attributes Typical MIF to define attributes gt end of Attributes lt Collapsed No gt lt SpecialCase No gt lt AttributeDisplay AllAttributes gt gt end of Element lt String Rubi text gt lt RubiTextEnd gt lt RubiCompositeEnd gt lt String Some more text gt end of Paraline ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 215 MIF Asian Text Processing Statements Online manual Examples The examples in this appendix show how to describe text and graphics in MIF files The current examples are valid only for unstructured documents You can import the MIF file into an existing FrameMaker template or you can open the MIF file as a FrameMaker document In either case if you save the resulting document in MIF format you will create a complete description of the document not just the text or graphics If you find any MIF statement difficult to understand the best way to learn more is to create a sample file that uses the statement Use FrameMaker to edit and format a document that uses the MIF feature and then save the document as a MIF file Examine the MIF file with any standard text editor The examples in this appendix are provided online For FrameMaker on this platform Look here UNIX SFMHOME fminit language Samples where language is the lan guage in use such as usenglish Macintosh The Samples folder where MIF Reference is installed Windo
120. FEncoding AAC gt originally written as Traditional Chinese CNS lt MIFEncoding HX gt originally written as Simplified Chinese MIFEncoding statement for Korean FrameMaker recognizes one encoding scheme for Korean KSC5601 All platform versions of FrameMaker write KSC5601 for Korean Each MIF file that contains Korean text must include a MIFEncoding statement near the beginning of the file It must appear before any Korean text in the file The string value in the MIFEncoding statement is the Korean spelling of the word Korean FrameMaker reads this fixed string and determines what the hexadecimal encoding is for it From that FrameMaker expects the same encoding to be used for all subsequent Asian text in the document To see the characters spelling the word Korean you must view the MIF file on a system that is enabled for Korean character display When the MIF is displayed on a Roman system the characters appear garbled Syntax lt MIFEncoding Fha originally written as Korean Combined Fonts Combined fonts assign two component fonts to one combined font name This is done to handle both an Asian font and a Western font as though they are in one font family In a combined font the Asian font is the base font and the Roman font is the Western font For example you can create a combined font named Mincho Palatino that uses Mincho for Asian characters and switches to Palatino for Roman characters When r
121. FRAMEMAKER 7 0 10 Using MIF Statements Save the edited MIF file as a text file by using the Save As command and choosing Text Only from the Format pop up menu Give the saved file the suffix mi f When you save a document as Text Only FrameMaker asks you where to place carriage returns For a MIF file choose the Only between Paragraphs option In UNIX versions FrameMaker saves a document in text format in the ISO Latin 1 character encoding You can change the character encoding to ASCII by changing the value of an X resource See the description of character encoding in the online manual Customizing FrameMaker In Macintosh and Windows versions press Esc F t c to toggle between FrameMaker s character encoding and ANSI for Windows or ASCII for Macintosh Importing MIF files You can use the File menu s Import gt File command to import MIF files into an existing document but you must make sure that the imported statements are valid at the location where you are importing them A MIF file can describe both text and graphics make sure that you have selected either a place in the text flow if you are importing text or graphics or an anchored frame if you are importing graphics For example to import a MIF file that describes a graphic first create an anchored frame in a document select the frame and then import the MIF file see Bar chart example on page 217 When you import or include MIF files make sure that object IDs are
122. FRAMEMAKER 7 0 223 Examples lt DashedStyle Dashed gt lt NumSegments 8 gt lt DashSegment 4pt gt solid lt DashSegment 8pt gt lt DashSegment 12pt gt solid lt DashSegment 16pt gt lt DashSegment 20pt gt solid lt DashSegment 24pt gt lt DashSegment 20pt gt solid lt DashSegment 16pt gt lt DashSegment 12pt gt solid lt DashSegment 8pt gt gt end of DashedPattern lt HeadCap Butt gt lt TailCap Butt gt lt NumPoints 2 gt lt Point 1 0 3 gt lt Point 7 5 3 gt gt end of PolyLine This one has a missing DashSegment statement so the first 10 point segment is repeated with a default gap of 10 points lt PolyLine lt DashedPattern lt DashedStyle Dashed gt Missing NumSegments lt DashSegment 10pt gt Missing a second DashSegment This polyline inherits the butt cap and tail style from the previous PolyLine statement lt NumPoints 2 gt lt Point 1 0 4 gt lt Point 7 5 4 gt gt end PolyLine This one is a really dense dotted line lt PolyLine lt DashedPattern lt DashedStyle Dashed gt lt DashSegment Ipt gt lt DashSegment Ipt gt gt This polyline also inherits the butt cap and tail style from the previous PolyLine statement lt PenWidth Ipt gt lt NumPoints 2 gt lt Point 1 0 5 gt lt Point 7 5 5 gt gt end PolyLine Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 224 Examples When you ve defined a custom dashed line style in one FrameMaker docum
123. Form int i2i char x char a char b gt Expressions with optional operands Some expressions have optional operands In these expressions the optional operands follow the primary operand The following table contains an example of each expression with optional operands Example MathFullForm statement Vx lt MathFullForm grad char x gt V31 lt MathFullForm grad num 1 1 num 2 2 gt logx lt MathFullForm log char x gt log x lt MathFullForm log char x char x gt lt MathFullForm oppartial char x gt Ox ax lt MathFullForm oppartial char x char x gt Ox d lt MathFullForm optotal char x gt dx a lt MathFullForm optotal char x char x gt dx af lt MathFullForm sqrt char x gt Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 194 MIF Equation Statements Example MathFullForm statement ae lt MathFullForm sqrt char x char x gt x lt MathFullForm substitution char x gt x lt MathFullForm substitution char x char x gt x lt MathFullForm substitution char x char x char x gt x For partial and full differentials such as x Indexes dx d 189 an ae see page There are three expressions for describing indexes indexes chem and tensor indexes The indexes expression describes any number of subscripts and superscripts The first operand is t
124. FrameMaker document and create user variables for the values you want to update see your user s manual then insert the variables in the table where you want them To change the values of the variables create a MIF file with new variable definitions You can create MIF variable definitions from sources such as records in a database values in a spreadsheet or data gathered from measurement equipment For example the following MIF file defines two variables lt MIFFile 7 00 gt lt VariableFormats lt VariableFormat lt VariableName 90 Revenue gt lt VariableDef 2 342 165 gt gt lt VariableFormat lt VariableName 91 Revenue gt lt VariableDef 3 145 365 gt gt gt When you import the MIF file into the document that contains the table FrameMaker updates the variables in the table Database publishing This database publishing example shows how to use the data storage and manipulation capabilities of a database and the formatting capabilities of FrameMaker through MIF In this example inventory information for a coffee distributor is stored in a database Database fields contain a reference number the type of coffee the number of bags in inventory the current inventory status and the price per bag A sales representative creates an up to date report on the coffee inventory by using a customized dialog box in the database application to select the category of information and sort order Publish Price List
125. IF file layout on page 52 Syntax lt FontCatalog lt Font gt Defines a character format see PgfFont and Font statements next lt Font gt Additional statements as needed gt End of FontCatalog statement PgfFont and Font statements The pgfFont and Font statements both define character formats The PgfFont statement must appear in a Pgf statement The Font statement must appear in a FontCatalog Para Or Text Line statement New statements have been added to the PgfFont and Font statements to express combined fonts in FrameMaker documents For more information see Combined Fonts on page 199 Syntax lt PgfFont Font lt FTag tagstring gt Character format tag name Font name lt FFamily string gt Name of font family lt FAngle string gt Name of angle such as Oblique lt FWeight string gt Name of weight such as Bold lt FVar string gt Name of variation such as Narrow lt FPostScriptName string gt Name of font when sent to PostScript printer see Font name on page 66 lt FPlatformName string gt Platform specific font name only read by Macintosh and Windows versions see page 67 Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 64 MIF Document Statements Font language lt FLanguage keyword gt Language to use for spelling and hyphenation keywordcan be one of NoLanguage USEnglish UKEnglish German SwissGerman French CanadianFrench
126. IF interpreter reads a MIF file Creating cross references In a FrameMaker document you can create cross references that are automatically updated A cross reference can refer to an entire paragraph or to a particular word or phrase in a paragraph The text to which a cross reference points is called the reference source the actual location of the cross reference is the reference point The format of a cross reference determines its appearance and the wording Cross reference formats include building blocks instructions to FrameMaker about what information to extract from the reference source A common building block is lt pagenum gt which FrameMaker replaces with the page number of the reference source Another common building block is lt paratext gt which FrameMaker replaces with the text content of the paragraph excluding autonumbering and special characters such as tabs and forced line breaks Within a FrameMaker document you insert and format cross references by choosing Cross Reference from the Special menu In a MIF file you create a cross reference as follows e Create the format of cross references by using XRefFormats and XRefFormat statements e Insert a marker at the reference source by using a Marker statement e Insert the reference point by using an XRef statement Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 37 Using MIF Statements Creating cross reference formats The cross reference formats for a document are defin
127. IF statements describing interline spacing and padding which appeared under the Document statement in previous versions have been replaced by corresponding statements under the Text Flow statement MIF 4 00 MIF 5 00 lt DMaxInterLine dimension gt lt TFMaxInterLine dimension gt lt DMaxInterPgf dimension gt lt TFMaxInterPgf dimension gt In version 5 if FrameMaker finds the DMaxInterLine and DMaxInterPgf statements in a 4 00 document FrameMaker applies these settings to all flows in the document Text frame and text flow statements Version 5 introduces text frames which are composed of any number of text columns separated by a standard gap In MIF files text frames are described by the same statement used in previous versions for text columns the TextRect statement In version 5 three new statements have been added under the Text Rect statement to specify multicolumn text frames e lt TRNumColumns integer gt e lt TRColumnGap dimension gt e lt TRColumnBalance boolean gt When reading 5 00 MIF files previous versions of FrameMaker will remove these statements and assume that the text frame is actually a single text column When reading MIF files from previous versions FrameMaker in version 5 will convert multiple text columns on a page into a single multicolumn text frame To represent each text column as a separate text frame include the MIF statement lt TRNumColumns 1 gt in the description of each TextR
128. IX only TRFE troff me to MIF UNIX only TRFS troff ms to MIF UNIX only MML Maker Mark up Language CVBN Corel Ventura compound document Windows DCA DCA to MIF UNIX TEXT Plain text Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 130 MIF Document Statements Code Description TXIS Text ISO Latin 1 TXRM Text Roman 8 Note that this is not a comprehensive list of codes Codes may be added to this list by Adobe or by developers at your site plat formis a code specifying the platform on which the filter was run The code is a string of four characters The following table lists some of the possible codes Code Description MAC6 Macintosh 68000 series MACP Power Macintosh WINT Windows NT WIN3 Windows 3 1 WIN4 Windows 95 UNIX Generic X 11 Sun HP filter_vers isa string of four characters identifying the version of the filter on that platform For example version 1 0 of a filter is represented by the string 1 0 filter_name is a text string less than 31 characters long that describes the filter TiApiClient statement The TiApiclient statement defines a text inset created and maintained by an FDK client application Syntax lt TiApiClient lt TiClientName string gt Specifies the name used to register the FDK client application with FrameMaker lt TiClientSource string gt Specifies the location of the source
129. MIF file 4 Edit the MIF file to create a MIF template that you can include in your generated MIF file see Including template files on page 43 The MIF template used for this example is in the sample file coffee mif 5 Use your database to create any custom dialog boxes or report generating procedures 6 Create a database query or procedure that extracts data from the database and writes it out into a MIF file Use a MIF include statement to include the document template in the new document Online manual 228 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 229 Examples The database user can now open a fully formatted report The code for the procedure that extracts information from the database and outputs the MIF strings is shown in this appendix This procedure is written in the ACIUS 4th DIMENSION command language You could use any database query language to perform the same task The procedure does the following 7 Creates a new document 8 Sends the MIFFile identification line 9 Uses include to read in the formatting information stored in the template coffee mif 10 Sends the MIF statements to create a table instance 11 In each body cell sends a field that includes the information extracted from the database 12 Creates a text flow that uses the TextRect 1D from the empty body page in the coffee mif template 13 Includes the atb1 statement that places the table instance in the document text flow 14 Closes the document Online manu
130. Maker displays this text when BDisplayText is set to AsText see lt BDisplayText keyword gt on page 138 Generated components lt FileNameSuffix string gt Filename suffix added to generated file lt DeriveType keyword gt Type of generated file keywordcan be one of AML alphabetic marker list APL alphabetic paragraph list IDX index IOA author index IOM index of markers IOS subject index IR index of references LOF list of figures LOM list of markers LOP list of paragraphs LOT list of tables LR list of references TOC table of contents lt DeriveTag tagstring gt Tags to include in generated file lt DeriveLinks boolean gt Yes automatically creates hypertext links in generated files Book component pagination and numbering properties lt StartPageSide keyword gt The page side on which to start keywordcan be one of ReadF romF ile default NextAvailableSide StartLeftSide StartRightSide Volume numbering lt VolumeNumStart integer gt Starting volume number lt VolumeNumStyle keyword gt Style of volume numbering keywordcan be one of Arabic UCRoman LCRoman UCAlpha LCAlpha anjiNumeric ZenArabic ZenUCAlpha ZenLCAlpha anjikazu BusinessKazu Custom lt VolumeNumText string gt When VolumeNumSt y1e is set to Custom this is the string to use Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 MIF Book File Sta
131. Name of weight Name of variation lt FPostScriptName string gt Name of font when sent to PostScript printer see Font name on page 66 lt FPlatformName string gt Platform specific font name only read by Macintosh and Win dows versions see FPlatformName statement on page 67 Default font size color and width lt FSize dimension gt Size in points only lt FSizeChange dimension gt Change to default font size lt FColor tagstring gt Font color see ColorCatalog statement on page 78 lt FSeparation integer gt Font color no longer used but written out by FrameMaker for backward compatibility see Color statements on page 244 lt FStretch percent gt The amount to stretch or compress the font where 100 means no change lt FStretchChange percent gt The amount to change the width setting for the font where 100 means no change Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 158 MIF Statements for Structured Documents and Books Default font style lt FUnderlining keyword gt Turns on underlining and specifies underlining style keywordcan be one of FNoUnderlining FSingle FDouble FNumeric lt FOverline boolean gt Turns on overline style lt F Strike boolean gt Turns on strikethrough style lt F ChangeBar boolean gt Turns on the change bar lt FPosition keyword gt lt FOutline boolean gt
132. OnlyWinPopup 138 BXmlDocType 164 BXmlEncoding 137 164 BXmlFileEncoding 164 BXmIPublicld 164 BXmlStandAlone 138 164 BXmilStyleSheet 138 164 BXmlUseBOM 164 BXmlVersion 137 164 BXmlWellFormed 164 byte encoded data in FrameImage file 262 Cc cap 190 Catalogs Character 62 68 Color 77 79 Element 161 162 Paragraph 58 62 Table 68 76 CColor 57 cdot 190 ceil 187 Cell 75 in Row 74 CellA ffectsColumnWidthA in Cell 75 in determining table width 76 CellAngle 75 CellBRuling 75 CellColor 75 CellColumns 75 CellContent 75 CellLRuling 75 CellRows 75 CellRRuling 75 cells contents 75 fill pattern default 75 margins 69 rotation 75 ruling style 75 straddling columns rows 75 CellSeparation 75 245 CellTRuling 75 CenteredPunct 205 CGM files imported 111 change 187 change bars properties 86 93 chapter numbering in a book 140 ChapterNumComputeMethod 90 140 290 ChapterNumStart 90 140 ChapterNumStyle 90 140 ChapterNumText 90 140 Char 123 in ParaLine 122 in TextLine 118 char in MathFullForm 182 Character Catalog 62 68 character format properties language used for spell checking and hyphenation 64 character formats creating and applying 21 inheriting format properties 22 character set 7 character spread 65 158 characters in equations 182 CharClass 205 CharUnits 54 chem 194 choice 189 cmut 189 Collapsed 161 Color 78 in ColorCatalog 78 color for body cells 70 for cells 75 for characters 6
133. Post ScriptName statements In addition Macintosh and Windows versions of FrameMaker also write the FPlat formName statement A UNIX version of FrameMaker ignores FP lat formName When FrameMaker reads a MIF file that includes more than one way of identifying a font it checks the font name in the following order 1 Platform name 2 Combination of family angle weight and variation properties 3 PostScript name If you are writing filters to generate MIF you do not need to use all three methods You should always specify the PostScript name if it is available You should use the platform name only if your filter will be run on a specific platform A filter running on a specific platform can easily find and write out the platform name but the name cannot be used on other platforms Font encoding The lt FEncoding gt statement specifies which encoding to use for a font The default is Roman or standard 7 bit encoding If this statement is not included for a font 7 bit encoding is assumed Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 67 MIF Document Statements This statement takes precedence over all other font attributes For example if the document includes a font with lt FEncoding JISX0208 ShiftJIS gt but that font family is not available on the user s system then the text will appear in some other font on the system that uses Japanese encoding If there is no Japanese encoded font on the system the text appears in Roman encodi
134. R 7 0 255 Facet Formats for Graphics Remote application specific facets A remote application specific facet contains the pathname or database key for an existing data file or database Since application specific data is normally duplicated in a separate application file remote facets conserve file space Because the application specific facet contains only a pathname remote facets are easier to implement Display and print facet I g l i I Your graphic application Graphic inset with a remote application specific facet FrameMaker document Application specific facet Remote application specific facet data Display and print facets must be contained in the graphic inset file They cannot be remote facets To write a remote facet your graphic application must write an application data file and store its data type and pathname in the graphic inset file A remote application specific facet has the following format facet_name amp facet_type amp path_for_facet_file EndInset For example the following lines describe the remote facet described in the application data file diagrams BlockDiagram application_name facet amp v amp diagrams BlockDiagram EndInset Example of graphic inset file The following example is the external graphic inset file generated by the fmbitmap program wh
135. RefFormats and XRefFor mat statements on page 81 lt xXRefLastUpdate seconds microseconds gt Specifies the time when the cross reference was last updated time is measured in the number of seconds and microseconds that have passed since January 1 1970 lt XRefLocked boolean gt Yes means the cross reference is part of a text inset that obtains its formatting information from the source document lt XRefSrcText string gt Text to search for lt XRefSrcIsElem boolean gt Yes means the source of the cross reference is an element from a structured document lt XRefSrcFile pathname gt Device independent pathname of file in which to search for source text for pat hname syntax see page 8 gt End of XRef statement lt Font gt Embedded character change for the following cross reference text see page 63 lt String string gt Text of cross reference lt XRefEnd gt End of cross reference Usage The xRef statement marks where a cross reference appears in text The xRefName statement applies a format to the cross reference text its string argument must match the name of the format provided by an xRefFormat statement The xRefSrcText statement identifies the cross reference source If the source text is in a separate file the xRefS rcFile statement provides a device independent filename You can omit it or give it an empty string argument if the cross reference source is in the same file
136. Row statement contains a Cel1 statement for each column in the table even if a straddle hides a cell Extra cell statements are ignored too few ce11 statements result in empty cells in the rightmost columns of the row When you rotate a cell to a vertical orientation the width of unwrapped text affects the height of the row You can use RowMaxHeight and RowMinHeight to protect a row s height from extremes caused by rotating cells containing multiline paragraphs or to enforce a uniform height for the rows Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 75 MIF Document Statements FrameMaker writes out the RowHeight statement for use by other programs It is not used by the MIF interpreter Even if the statement is present the MIF interpreter recalculates the height of each row based on the row contents and the RowMinHeight and RowMaxHeight statements Cell statement A Ce11 statement specifies a cell s contents It also includes format straddle and rotation information as needed The statement must appear in a Row statement Syntax lt Cell lt CellFill integer gt Fill pattern for cell 0 1 5 see page 103 lt CellColor tagstring gt Color for cell see ColorCatalog statement on page 78 lt CellSeparation integer gt Color for cell no longer used but written out by FrameMaker for backward compatibility see Color statements on page 244 lt CellLRuling tagstring gt Left edge ruling style fr
137. Ruling statement The Ruling statement defines the ruling styles used in table formats It must appear within the RulingCatalog statement Syntax lt Ruling lt RulingTag tagstring gt Ruling style name an empty string indicates no ruling style lt RulingPenWidth dimension gt Ruling line thickness lt RulingGap dimension gt Gap between double ruling lines lt RulingColor tagstring gt Color of ruling line see ColorCatalog statement on page 78 lt RulingSeparation integer gt Color of ruling line no longer used but written out by FrameMaker for backward compatibility see Color statements on page 244 lt RulingPen integer gt Pen pattern 0 through 7 or 15 see page 103 lt RulingLines integer gt 0 none 1 single or 2 double ruling lines gt End of Ruling statement Color You can assign colors to text and objects in a FrameMaker document A FrameMaker document has a set of default colors you can also define your own colors and store them in the document s Color Catalog A FrameMaker document has three color models you can use to create colors CMYK RGB and HLS You can also choose inks from installed color libraries such as PANTONE In a MIF file colors are defined by a color statement within a colorCatalog statement Regardless of the color model used to define a new color colors are stored in a MIF file in CMYK You can define a color as a tint of an existing color Tints ar
138. Sie wap Bocca betes bik tele basa aa a tac suns A 19 Text insets text imported by reference 6 cece 27 Publishers See see ecto nent cake a Me nab ek e beet 33 MIF book file overview 60 0 ee cece eee cece teen e es 35 MIF book file identification line cece eee 36 Book statements a ssclegcd eet eigen bees eee eed een 36 Structural element definitions 00 eee eee eees 44 Attribute definitions 60 47 FOP MAtTUICS san cece Enn Rae lake amacwlan Maite vlads aime aiitaune hea 48 Format changelists ss 2 enteess temian iane E R AN ce 54 El ments aossen tapi sinea Nak Aata noa Eai AA hA 61 XML data for structured documents 6 eee 64 Preference settings for structured documents 0 2 eee eee 64 Text in structured documents n annaua 67 Structured book statements n n eee eee ee eee eee eee 68 MIF Messages ciiai e plc diate ened aaa a soda Ware sega AN 71 Document statement einer eiie eat e aE AEn a i caus S EE a 73 M thistatement chr acsdaees eae E Te ek RO 77 MathFullForm statement 6 eee cee eens 78 Asian Character Encoding 6 cece cece cece ees 98 Combined FONTS a seneraran a er eE e eiaa 99 Kumihian Tables Seran mean engage aa aea EE E O ceess 202 PANTS A E E EE E E EAE Examples MIF Messages MIF Compatibility Facet Formats for Graphics EPSI Facet Format FramelImage Facet Format Frame Vector Facet Format Text examples aret tensed dines wad Moa k Posie Meares AREA ORLA 216 Bar
139. TD or schema that defines the namespace Additional pairs of prefix and path statements as needed gt Endof Namespace statement lt AttributeDisplay keyword gt Default attribute display setting for element keywordcan be one of AllAttributes display all attributes ReqgAndSpec display required and specified attributes None don t display attributes lt Atributes Element s attributes lt Attribute Attribute s name and values lt AttrName string gt Attribute name lt AttrValue string gt Attribute value lt AttrValue string gt Attribute value if attribute allows more than one value gt Endof Attribute statement lt Attribute gt Additional statements as needed gt lt UserString string gt Endof Attributes statement A string in which clients can store private data can be up to 1023 char acters in length gt Endof ElementBegin statement lt ElementEnd tagstring gt End of specified element Usage FrameMaker writes out the tagst ring value in an Element End statement for use by filters Your application does not need to supply the tagst ring value when it writes MIF files If the interpreter reads unbalanced Element Begin and Element End statements it ignores superfluous element ends and closes all open elements at the end of a Text Flow statement If the interpreter reads a flow that does not have an element
140. Tag Left _ Fixed k The following table shows the corresponding MIF statements In MIF file In Paragraph Designer lt PgfTag Numbered gt Paragraph Tag lt PgfFIndent 0 0 gt First Indent lt PgfLIndent 0 25 gt Left Indent lt PgfRIndent 0 0 gt Right Indent lt PgfAlignment Left gt Alignment Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 14 Using MIF Statements In MIF file In Paragraph Designer lt PgfSpBefore 0 0 pt gt Space Above lt PgfSpAfter 0 0 pt gt Space Below 4 lt PgfLeading 2 0 pt gt Line Spacing leading is added to font size lt PgfLineSpacing Fixed gt Line Spacing fixed lt PgfNumTabs 1 gt Number of tab stops lt TabStop Begin definition of tab lt TSX 0 25 gt Tab position lt TSType Left gt Tab type lt TSLeaderStr gt Tab leader none gt end of TabStop lt PgfUseNextTag No gt Turn off Next Tag feature lt PgfNextTag gt Next 1 Tag name none The Default Font properties are defined as follows in the Paragraph Designer Paragraph Tag Start Keep With ees J Next Previous 4 Properties Pagination Format Widow Orphan Lines f1 Apply A In Column Run In Head Default Punctuation To Selection ied vy Side Head Alignment First Baseline Update All Across All Columns Formats Tagged Numbered y Across All Columns and Side Heads vy Asis Commands The following t
141. TblColumnWidthP in determining table width 76 in TblFormat 70 TbIF 73 TblFormat in Tbl 73 in TblCatalog 68 TblH 73 TbIHFFill 70 TbIHFRowRuling 69 TblHFSeparation 70 244 TblID 72 TblInitNumBodyRows 71 TblInitNumColumns 71 TblInitNumFRows 71 300 TblInitNumHRows 71 TblLastBRuling 70 TblLIndent 68 TblLocked 71 131 TbILRuling 70 TbINumByColumn 69 TblNumColumns 73 TblPlacement 69 TbIRIndent 68 TbIRRuling 70 TblRulingPeriod 69 Tbls 72 TblSeparatorRuling 69 TblShadeByColumn 70 TblShadePeriod 70 TblSpAfter 68 TblSpBefore 68 TblTag in Tbl 72 in TblFormat 68 TbITitle 73 TblTitleContent 73 TblTitleGap 69 TbITitlePgfl 69 TbITitlePlacement 69 TbITRuling 70 TblWidth 70 TblXColumnNum 69 TblIXColumnRuling 69 TbIXFill 70 TblXRowRuling 69 TblXSeparation 70 244 templates including in MIF 43 tensor 195 text columns default number per page 84 89 number ina text frame 33 text example 216 text flows 119 125 defined 31 imported by reference 128 131 text frames defined 31 placement of side heads 119 specifying number of columns 33 text imported by reference 127 text insets 127 130 defined 127 record of filter used 128 TextFlow 119 125 162 TextInset 127 TextInsetEnd 128 TextRect in Page 100 TextRectID 122 TFAutoConnect 119 TFFeather 119 TFLineSpacing 119 TFMaxInterLine 120 TFMaxInterPgf 120 TFMinHangHeight 120 TFPostScript 119 TFSideheadGap 242 TFSideheadPlacement 242 TFSideheads 120 TFSidehe
142. The following examples show MathFullForm statements for complete equations Example 1 b Jb 4ac ee 2a lt MathFullForm equal char x over plus minus char b pm sqrt plus power char b num 2 2 minus times num 4 4 char a char c times num 2 2 char a gt Example 2 M o a Ce gee 5 207 E gt E Mz lt MathFullForm approx power char sigma minus num 1 1 fract id plus num 1 1 times over id plus char X minus char R times num 2 2 power char sigma num 2 2 id rightarrow indexes 0 1 char E num 0 0 indexes 0 1 char E num 1 1 over indexes 0 1 char M num 2 2 power indexes 0 1 char M nu m 1 1 num 2 2 id times char sigma id rightarrow indexes 0 1 char E num 0 0 indexes 0 1 c har E num 1 1 gt Online manual 198 MIF Asian Text Processing Statements This chapter describes the MIF statements used to express Asian text in a document It includes character encoding statements combined Asian and Western fonts Kumihan tables and rubi text Asian Character Encoding Western text in a MIF file is written out as 7 bit ASCII However 7 bit encoding is insufficient for Asian text Asian text in MIF files is represented by double byte encoding There are different encoding schemes for each supported language and the MIF file must include a statement that can be used to determine which encoding to use The MIF
143. The xRefEnd statement marks the end of the cross reference Any String or Char statements between the xRef and xRefEnd statements represent the actual text of the cross reference These intermediary statements are optional For an example of a cross reference in MIF see Creating cross references on page 36 The xRefLocked statement is used for text insets that retain formatting information from the source document If the lt xRefLocked Yes gt statement appears in a specific cross reference that cross reference is part of a text inset that retains formatting information from the source document The cross reference is not affected by global formatting performed on the document If the lt XxRefLocked No gt statement appears in a specific cross reference that cross reference is not part of a text inset or is part of a text inset that reads formatting information from the current document The cross reference is affected by global formatting performed on the document For more information about text insets see Text insets text imported by reference next Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 127 MIF Document Statements Text insets text imported by reference In a FrameMaker document text can be imported by reference from another file When the text in the original file is modified the imported text in the FrameMaker document is updated with changes Text imported by reference is called a text inset In a MIF file t
144. Value string gt Additional statements as needed gt Endof EDAttrDefValues statement lt EDAttrRange Range of values the attribute is allowed to have lt EDRangeStart string gt The minimum value the attribute must have lt EDRangeEnd string gt The maximum value the attribute must have gt Endof EDAttrRange statement gt Endof EDAttrDef statement Format rules Format rules allow the template builder to specify the format of an element in specific circumstances A format rule can be either a context rule or a level rule A context rule contains clauses that specify an element s formatting based on its parent and sibling elements For example one clause of a format rule could specify that a Para element has the FirstBody paragraph format if it is the first child of a Heading element Another clause could specify that a Para element has the Body paragraph format in all other contexts A level rule contains clauses that specify an element s formatting on the basis of the level to which it is nested within specific types of ancestor elements For example one clause of a level rule could specify that a Para element appears in 12 point type if it has only one Section element among its ancestors Another clause could specify that a Para element appears in 10 point type if there are two Section elements among its ancestors Element definitions contain format rules grouped into the following statements EDT
145. a type String Description of data Name of color tag Size of data in bytes Variable Default value Black Example 03 0000001B 00 OB 53 61 67 65 20 47 72 65 65 6E 00 for a font in the color Sage Green Font weight 0x2E Specification by data type String Description of data Name of font weight type uses the same values as the MIF FWeight statement Size of data in bytes Variable Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 278 FrameVector Facet Format Default value default font weight Example Font angle 0x2F 2E 00000008 00 08 52 65 67 75 6C 61 72 00 for the font weight Regular Specification by data type String Description of data Size of data in bytes Name of font angle type uses the same values as the MIF FAngle statement Variable Default value default font angle Example 2F 00000008 00 08 52 65 67 75 6C 61 72 00 for the font angle Regular Font variation 0x30 Specification by data type Description of data String Name of font variation type uses the same values as the MIF FVar statement Size of data in bytes Variable Default value default font variation Example 30 00000008 00 08 52 65 67 75 6C 61 72 00 for the font variation Regular Font horizontal kerning 0x31 Specification by data type Metric Description of data Hori
146. a word processor your filter should convert document text to a single TextF low statement Ignore line and page breaks except forced breaks in your source document because the text will be repaginated by the MIF interpreter If the document uses style sheets convert paragraph styles to paragraph formats in a PgfCatalog statement and convert table styles to table formats in a Tb1Catalog statement Output filters You can write output filters that convert a MIF file to any format you want While you should be familiar with all MIF statements to determine which ones you need to translate a FrameMaker document your output filter doesn t need to convert all the possible MIF statements In most cases a MIF description of a FrameMaker document contains more information than you need Because MIF appears as a series of nested statements your output filter must be able to scan a MIF file for the information it needs and skip over statements that it will not use Installing a filter In UNIX versions you can set up FrameMaker to automatically start a script that runs a filter based on the filename suffix The filter can convert a file to a MIF file FrameMaker then interprets the MIF file storing the results in a FrameMaker document For more information about installing your filter see the online manual Customizing FrameMaker Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 49 Using MIF Statements Minimizing MIF statements The following tips may
147. aLink statement For more information on subscribers and text insets see Text insets text imported by reference on page 127 Online manual DataLink Statement ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 134 MIF Document Statements The Dat aLink statement defines a text publisher It is embedded along with the lines of text where the link occurs The DataLink statement occurs in a ParaLine statement Syntax lt DataLink lt D LSource pathname gt Specifies the edition with a device independent filename lt D LOut Yes gt Yes specifies that the statement describes a publisher lt OneLinePerRec boolean gt Yes treats returns as paragraphs one line per paragraph No treats returns as line breaks lt MacEdition integer gt Points to the resource ID of the sect and alis records gt Ends the DataLink statement Free form text Para statements containing and describing the published text see Para statement on page 121 lt DataLinkEnd gt End of the published text Usage The MacEdition statement provides information for compatibility with Macintosh standards for creating edition manager documents integer points to the resource ID for the sect and alis resources in the resource fork This information is replicated inside the MIF description but the information in the resource fork takes precedence over the MIF data If this field is missing the MacEdit ion statement uses the filena
148. able shows the corresponding MIF statements In MIF file In Paragraph Designer lt PgfFont lt FFamily Times gt Family lt FSize 12 0 pt gt Size lt FEncoding gt Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 15 Using MIF Statements In MIF file In Paragraph Designer lt FAngle Regular gt Angle lt FWeight Regular gt Weight lt FLanguage gt Language lt FVar Regular gt Variation lt FColor Black gt Color lt FDW 0 0 pt gt Spread lt FStretch 100 gt Stretch lt FUnderlining NoUnderlining gt Underline lt FOverline No gt Overline lt FStrike No gt Strikethrough lt FChangeBar No gt Change Bar lt FPosition FNormal gt Superscript Subscript lt FCase FAsTyped gt Capitalization lt FPairKern Yes gt Pair Kern lt FTsume No gt Tsume Asian systems only gt end of PgfFont The Pagination properties are defined as follows in the Paragraph Designer Paragraph Tag Numbered gt Properties Pagination 3 Apply To Selection Update All Formats Tagged Numbered Commands Format Start Keep With Next g C Previous 4 Widow Orphan Lines f1 A In Column V Run In Head Default Punctuation f v Side Head Alignment First Baseline v Across All Columns y Across All Columns and Side Heads y s Is Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 16
149. ach of the four supported Asian languages Syntax lt Kumihan Defines a Kumihan table lt Klanguage keyword gt The language for this table keywordcan be one of Japanese TraditionalChinese SimpleChinese Korean lt CharClass Defines character class assignments lt SqueezeTable Defines the squeeze table lt SpreadTable Defines the spread table Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 205 MIF Asian Text Processing Statements lt LineBreakTable Defines the line break table lt ExtraSpaceTable Defines the extra space table Ends the Kumihan statement CharClass statement The CharClass statement assigns individual characters to one of 25 classes The JIS standard recognizes 20 classes and MIF includes an additional five classes Spare1 through Spare5 so you can assign characters custom character classes MIF Statement Column Description Position lt CharClass lt BegParentheses chars gt 1 The characters to use as opening parentheses lt EndParentheses chars gt 2 The characters to use as ending parentheses lt NoLineBeginChar chars gt 3 Characters that cannot start a new line of text lt QuestionBang chars gt 4 Characters for questions and exclamations lt CenteredPunct chars gt 5 Punctuation characters that must be centered between characters lt PeriodComma chars gt 6 Punctu
150. ach statement row Each value corresponds to one of the 25 character classes respec tively These values specify how to break a line after a character of the class identified by the row statement when followed by a character of the class identified by the column position Syntax lt LineBreakTable lt BegParentheses numerals gt lt EndParentheses numerals gt lt NoLineBeginChar numerals gt lt QuestionBang numerals gt lt CenteredPunct numerals gt lt PeriodComma numerals gt lt NonSeparableChar numerals gt lt PrecedingSymbol numerals gt lt SucceedingSymbol numerals gt lt AsianSpace numerals gt Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 210 MIF Asian Text Processing Statements lt Hiragana numerals gt lt Others gt lt BaseCharWithSuper numerals gt lt BaseCharWithRubi numerals gt lt Numeral numerals gt lt UnitSymbol numerals gt lt RomanSpace numerals gt lt RomanChar numerals gt lt ParenBeginWariChu numerals gt lt ParenEndWariChu numerals gt lt Sparel numerals gt lt Spare2 numerals gt lt Spare3 numerals gt lt Spare4 numerals gt lt Spare5 numerals gt gt End of LineBreakTable statement The possible values for numerals are O Line break is allowed 1 Line break is not allowed 2 Break the line according to Roman text rules 3 This character pair shou
151. adWidth 242 TFSynchronized 119 TFTag 119 therefore 189 TiAPIClient 130 TiAutoUpdate 127 TiClientData 130 TiClientName 130 TiClientSource 130 TiClientType 130 TiEOLisEOP 132 TIFF files imported 111 TiFlow 131 TiFlowName 131 TiFormatRemoveOverrides 131 301 TiFormatRemovePageBreaks 131 TiFormatting 131 TilmportHint 127 TiLastUpdate 126 127 TiMacEditionId 127 TiMainFlow 131 times 192 TiName 127 TiPageSpace 131 TipAngle 106 TiSrcFile 127 TiTblHeadersEmpty 132 TiTblIsByRow 132 TiTbINumCols 132 TiTbINumHdrRows 132 TiTbINumSep 132 TiTblSep 132 TiTblTag 132 TiText 132 TiTextTable 132 TiTxtEncoding 132 TiTxtTblEncoding 133 TLAlignment 118 TLOrigin 117 top level statements about 5 TrapWise application 87 94 239 TRColumnBalance 118 TRColumnGap 118 TRNext 118 TRNumColumns 118 TRSideheadGap 118 TRSideheadPlacement 118 TRSideheadWidth 118 TSDecimalChar 59 156 TSLeaderStr 59 156 TSType 59 156 TSX 59 156 166 TSXRelative 156 two sided layout for documents 84 91 U ucomma 189 uequal 189 unary operators in equations 186 Unconditional 58 122 Unique 102 in ElementBegin 161 Units 54 units default 54 units font size 54 UnitSymbol 205 upbrace 189 UserString 162 Vv Value 96 103 137 var 189 Variable 122 VariableDef 80 VariableFormat 80 VariableFormats 80 VariableLocked 122 131 VariableName 80 122 variables creating 38 vector graphics imported 111 vee 192 Verbose 5
152. al ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 230 Examples In the following example database commands are shown like this SEND PACKET Comments are preceded by a single back quote Local variables are preceded by a dollar sign This procedure first gets the information entered by the user and stores it in local variables 1 Name of sales representative 2 Phone number 3 Discount CR char 13 carriage return character DQ char 34 double quotation mark character C_TIME vDoc CLOSE DOCUMENT vDoc vDoc Create document vDisc 1 Num 3 100 Send header SEND PACKET vDoc lt MIFFile 7 00 gt Generated by 4th Dimension for Version 7 0 of FrameMaker CR Read in the MIF template for the report SEND PACKET vDoc include coffee mif CR Generate table SEND PACKET vDoc lt Tbls lt Tbl lt TbIID 2 gt lt TblFormat lt TblTag Format A gt gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt TbINumColumns 5 gt lt TbIColumnWidth 6 DQ gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt TbIColumnWidth 3 25 DQ gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt TbIColumnWidth 5 DQ gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt TbIColumnWidth 1 7 DQ gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt TbIColumnWidth 1 0 DQ gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt TbITitle CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt TbITitleContent CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt Para lt PgfTag TableTitle gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt ParaLine lt String Offerings as of String Current date 5 gt gt gt gt gt
153. alog The following example applies the default character format Emphasis to a variable lt VariableFormat lt VariableName Product Number gt lt VariableDef lt Emphasis gt A15 24 lt Default xa6 Font gt gt gt end of VariableFormat You can specify character formats as building blocks that is the character format name must be enclosed in angle brackets Because of MIF parsing requirements you must use a backslash sequence for the closing angle bracket You must also use hexadecimal notation for special characters in the variable definition In this example xa6 is the hex notation for the paragraph symbol For more information about special characters in strings see page 7 Using system variables Whenever you open or import a MIF file the MIF interpreter provides the default system variables You can redefine a system variable but you cannot provide new system variables System variables are defined by a VariableFormat statement For example the following statement shows the default definition for the system variable Page Count lt VariableFormat lt VariableName Page Count gt lt VariableDef lt lastpagenum gt gt gt end of VariableFormat System variables contain building blocks that provide certain information to FrameMaker These building blocks are preceded by a dollar sign and can only appear in system variables Some system variables have restrictions on which building blocks they can con
154. ameMaker repeats information and provides default objects and formats for all documents You may find it difficult to determine the minimum number of statements that are necessary to define your document by looking at a FrameMaker generated MIF file To better understand how FrameMaker reads MIF files study the following example This MIF file uses only four statements to describe a document that contains one line of text lt MIFFile 7 00 gt The only required statement lt Para Begin a paragraph lt ParaLine Begin a line within the paragraph lt String Hello World gt The actual text of this document gt end of Paraline End of ParaLine statement gt end of Para End of Para statement Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 12 Using MIF Statements The MIFFile statement is required in each MIF file It identifies the FrameMaker version and must appear on the first line of the file All other statements are optional that is FrameMaker provides a set of default objects if you specify none Comments in a MIF file are preceded by a number sign By convention the substatements in a MIF statement are indented to show their nesting level and to make the file easier to read The MIF interpreter ignores spaces at the beginning of a line This example is in the sample file he11o mif To see how FrameMaker provides defaults for a document open this file in FrameMaker Even though the MIF file does not specify any formatting Fra
155. amily name Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 MIF Asian Text Processing Statements The FPostScriptName and FP lat formName statements all refer to the base font The following new statements have been added to express the corresponding values for the Roman font e FWesternPostScriptName e FWesternPlat formName Syntax lt PgfFont lt FPostScriptName string gt The PostScript name for the base font lt FPlatformName string gt lt FWesternPostScriptName string gt The platform name for the base font The PostScript name for the Roman font lt FWesternPlatformName string gt The platform name for the Roman font lt FCombinedFontName string gt The name of the combined font as defined in the combined font catalog lt FEncoding string gt Specifies the encoding for the base font This is to specify the encoding for a double byte font If not present the default is Roman keywordcan be one of JISX0208 ShiftJIS BIG5S GB2312 80 EUC KSC5601 1992 End of the PgfFont statement Example The following is an example of a combined font in a Para statement lt Para lt Unique 996885 gt lt PgfTag Body gt lt ParaLine lt Font lt FTag gt lt FPlatformName M Osaka P gt lt FWesternPlatformName M Times P gt lt FFamily Osaka gt lt FCombinedFontName MyCombinedFont gt lt FEncoding JISX0208 ShiftJIS gt lt FLocked No gt gt
156. an create as many master pages as you need but you cannot apply all of them to the appropriate body pages You can only apply a left page a right page and one additional custom master page to the body pages Furthermore you can only link the custom master page to the first page in a document When you are importing a document into FrameMaker you do not know how much text the MIF interpreter will put on a page you can only determine where the first page begins When the interpreter reads the MIF file it applies the custom master page layout to the first page in the document For each subsequent page it uses the DParity and DTwoSides statements to determine when to add a left page and when to add a right page Other master page layouts that you ve defined are not lost when the interpreter reads a MIF file The user can still apply these page layouts to individual body pages For an example of a MIF file with a first page layout see the sample file frstpage mif Adding headers and footers Headers and footers are defined in untagged text flows on the master pages of a document When FrameMaker creates default master pages it automatically provides untagged text flows for headers and footers If you are importing a document that has headers and footers you define additional text frames on the master pages Link an untagged text flow to each additional text frame on the master page The untagged text flow contains the text of the header or
157. an gt Use curved left and right quotation marks lt DSmartSpacesOn boolean gt Prevents entry of multiple spaces lt DLinebreakChars string gt OK to break lines at these characters Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 85 MIF Document Statements lt DPunctuationChars string gt Punctuation characters that FrameMaker does not strip from run in heads these characters override the default punctuation set in PgfRunInDefaultPunct see page 60 Conditional text defaults lt DShowAllConditions boolean gt Shows or hides all conditional text lt DDisplayOverrides boolean gt Turns format indicators of conditional text on or off Footnote properties lt DFNoteTag string gt Paragraph and reference frame tag for document foot notes lt DFNoteMaxH dimension gt Maximum height allowed for document footnotes lt DFNoteRestart keyword gt Document footnote numbering control by page or text flow keywordcan be one of PerPage PerFlow lt FNoteStartNum integer gt First document footnote number lt DFNoteNumStyle keyword gt Document footnote numbering style keywordcan be one of Arabic UCRoman LCRoman UCAlpha LCAlpha ZenLCAlpha ZenuCAlpha KanjiNumeric Kanjikazu BusinessKazu Custom lt DFNoteLabels string gt Characters to use in custom document footnote numbers lt DFNoteAnchorPos keyword gt Placement of document footnote number in text keyword can be one of FNSup
158. and control state ments which can appear anywhere at the top level of a file Each statement except the MIFFile statement is optional Most main statements use substatements to describe objects and their properties Statement Description MIFFile Labels the file as a MIF document file The MIFF ile statement is required and must be the first statement in the file Control statements Establish the default units ina Units statement the debugging setting ina Verbose statement and comments in a Comment statement These statements can appear any where at the top level as well as in some substatements Macro statements Define macros with a def ine statement and read in files with an include statement These statements can appear anywhere at the top level ColorCatalog Describes document colors The ColorCatalog statement contains Color state ments that define each color and tag ConditionCatalog Describes condition tags The ConditionCatalog statement contains Condition statements that define each condition tag and its properties CombinedFontCatalog Describes combined fonts The CombinedFontCatalog statement contains Com binedFontDe fn statements that define each combined font and its component fonts PgfCatalog Describes paragraph formats The PgfCatalog statement contains Pgf statements that define the properties and tag for each paragraph format ElementDefCatalog Defines
159. and opened an empty custom document instead Close the document and check your MIF file for errors Try adding a verbose statement to your file to get more complete messages If your MIF statements are syntactically correct but cause unexpected results in the document check for mismatched ID numbers and check the placement of statements Many MIF statements are position dependent and can cause errors if they appear in the wrong place in a file For example an ATb1 statement that comes before its corresponding Tb1 statement causes an error Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 51 Using MIF Statements Here are some additional tips for debugging MIF files e Use the Verbose statement to generate comments To debug a specific section of a MIF file you can precede the section with the lt Verbose Yes gt statement and end the section with the lt verbose No gt statement e Make sure angle brackets are balanced e Make sure that MIF statement names are capitalized correctly MIF statement names and keyword values are case sensitive e Make sure that string arguments are enclosed in straight single quotation marks See MIF data items on page 5 for an example e Make sure ID numbers are unique e Make sure that every table anchor has a corresponding table instance and that every table instance has an anchor in the text flow e Make sure that tag names with spaces are enclosed in straight single quotation marks e Make sure pair
160. angle brackets Because Comment statements can be nested within one another the MIF interpreter examines all characters following an angle bracket until it finds the corresponding angle bracket that ends the comment lt Comment The following statements define the paragraph formats gt lt Comment lt These statements have been removed lt Font lt FBold gt lt FlItalic gt gt gt gt The MIF interpreter processes number signs within Comment statements as normal comments ignoring the remainder of the line lt Comment When a number sign appears within a lt Comment gt statement the MIF interpreter ignores the rest of the characters in that line including angle brackets lt gt gt End of lt Comment gt Statement Macro statements MIF has two statements that allow you to define macros and include information from other files Although these statements usually appear near the beginning of a MIF file you need not put them in that position However the MIF interpreter does not interpret a macro that occurs before its definition define statement The define statement creates a macro When the MIF interpreter reads a MIF file it replaces the macro name with its replacement text A define statement can appear anywhere in a MIF file however the macro definition must appear before any occurrences of the macro name Syntax define name replacement Creates a macro Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0
161. aph catalog format to apply If the FmtChange List statement includes this statement it can t include any of the following statements Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 156 MIF Statements for Structured Documents and Books lt PgfFIndent dimension gt First line left margin measured from left side of current text column lt PgfFIndentChange dimension gt Change to the first line left margin lt PgfFIndentRelative boolean gt Yes means the first indent is relative to the left indent instead of the left side of the current text column lt PgfLIndent dimension gt Left margin measured from left side of current text column lt PgfLIndentChange dimension gt Change to the left margin lt PgfRIndent dimension gt Right margin measured from right side of current text column lt PgfRIndentChange dimension gt lt PgfAlignment keyword gt Change to the right margin Alignment within the text column keywordcan be one of LeftRight Left Center Right lt PgfSpBefore dimension gt Space above paragraph lt PgfSpBeforeChange dimension gt lt PgfSpAfter dimension gt Change to space above paragraph Space below paragraph lt PgfSpAfterChange dimension gt Change to space below paragraph lt PgfLineSpacingFixed boolean gt Yes means the lines spacing is fixed to the default font size lt PgfLeading dimension gt Space below ea
162. aracter in the class specified in that position in the statement If a value of 1 is specified FrameMaker does not allow a line break oe 3 E Sos Som o Beng O S SOLA o o Z 25 2 g 5 O o g a HO 2 a U woso gS e Sod o ovo saaga a5 v Z os aue e g oan eM oOo 4 SS ws Bs DH w v z 2 o ys ak ee PBS o ERa nna 2 at DoT o Ly 86008 8 Bag Sess Gees es gpk UvUoeDUOH Ss a u gt a GC GE MwWannantuen SAEZ Lonau em pO CH FS BF FY YY vw Ww SBowe ee eo ves Boo ES FE Evo HH HH KH eof oF oS eB BREE eS SBE OSCE EAR AR A ame OOA AA HH TOMMAD HHA HH HHA lt BegParentheses WOT Te Te de de a Teed A ed dT De eh 37 oT Oe I eT The column position of each numerical value in the statement specifies the action to take for each class In the preceding example a line break does not occur between a character in the BegParentheses class anda character in the EndParentheses Class because the value 1 is in the second position which is the column position for the EndParentheses class of characters For more information on the LineBreakTable statement see LineBreakTable statement on page 209 Writing Kumihan tables as MIF FrameMaker only writes out Kumihan tables in MIF when you are running FrameMaker on Asian system software If you are running on an Asian system when you save a document as MIF the Kumihan tables are written out as part of the document This is most critical with the character classes To specify a character class in MIF yo
163. aragraph Catalog lt ParaLine lt String Streck Metals gt gt gt gt gt end of Cell lt Cell lt CellContent lt Para lt PgfTag CellBody gt Forces lookup in Paragraph Catalog lt ParaLine lt String 27 25 gt gt gt gt gt end of Cell lt Cell lt CellContent lt Para lt PgfTag CellBody gt Forces lookup in Paragraph Catalog lt ParaLine lt String 2 75 gt gt gt gt gt end of Cell gt end of Row lt Row The third body row lt Cell lt CellContent lt Para lt PgfTag CellBody gt Forces lookup in Paragraph Catalog lt ParaLine lt String Linbrech Alloys gt gt gt gt gt end of Cell lt Cell lt CellContent lt Para lt PgfTag CellBody gt Forces lookup in Paragraph Catalog lt ParaLine lt String 63 75 gt gt gt gt gt end of Cell lt Cell lt CellContent lt Para lt PgfTag CellBody gt Forces lookup in Paragraph Catalog lt ParaLine lt String 2 50 gt gt gt gt gt end of Cell gt end of Row gt end of TblBody gt end of Tbl gt end of Tbls lt TextFlow lt Para lt PgfTag Body gt lt ParaLine lt ATbl 1 gt gt Reference to table ID 1 gt gt ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 226 Examples Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 227 Examples Updating several values in a table You can update several values in a table or elsewhere in a document by importing a MIF file To update a table insert a table in a
164. aration values refer to the reserved default colors that appear in the Color pop up menu in the FrameMaker Tools palette This value Corresponds to this color lt Separation 0 gt Black lt Separation 1 gt White lt Separation 2 gt Red lt Separation 3 gt Green lt Separation 4 gt Blue lt Separation 5 gt Cyan lt Separation 6 gt Magenta lt Separation 7 gt Yellow Version 4 and later versions of FrameMaker read separation statements and convert them to the equivalent color statements FrameMaker writes both color statements and separation statements for backward compatibility For the reserved default colors FrameMaker writes the equivalent separation value For custom colors FrameMaker writes the separation value 5 Cyan so that you can easily find and change custom colors If your application creates files that will be read by both older before version 4 and newer after version 4 FrameMaker product versions include both color and separation statements in the MIF files otherwise use only the color statements Math statements The following table lists the changes for math statements MIF 3 00 MIF 4 00 DMathItalicFunctionName DMathFunctions DMathItalicOtherText DMathNumbers DMathStrings DMathVariables In addition the diacritical expression defines new diacritical marks see Using char and diacritical for diacritical marks on page 184 The diacritical e
165. are in pixels you cannot specify the units keyword A token value The allowed token values are listed for each statement you can provide only one value lt token gt Ellipsis points in a statement indicate required substatements or arguments The entire expanded statement occurs at this point Unit values You can specify the unit of measurement for most dimension data items The following table lists the units of measurement that FrameMaker supports and their notation in MIF Measurement unit Notation in MIF Relationship to other units point pt or point 1 72 inch inch orin 72 points millimeter mmormillimeter 1 inch is 25 4 mm centimeter cm or centimeter 1 inch is 2 54 cm pica pc or pica 12 points didot dd or didot 0 01483 inches cicero cc or cicero 12 didots Dimension data types can mix different units of measurement For example the statement lt CellMargins L T R B gt can be written as either of the following lt CellMargins 6 pt 18 pt 6 pt 24 pt gt lt CellMargins 6 pt 25 5 pica 2 pica gt Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 7 Introduction Math values The MathFullForm statement uses met ric values in formatting codes A met ric unit represents one point 1 72 inch The met ric type is a 32 bit fixed point number The 16 most significant bits of a met ric value represent the digits before the decimal the 16 least significant bits represent the digits afte
166. at contains both tables and anchored frames start by creating the MIF statements that describe tables Then add the statements that describe anchored frames e Use the default properties provided by FrameMaker e If you are not concerned with testing certain document components let FrameMaker provide a set of default document objects and formats Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 11 Using MIF Statements MIF file layout FrameMaker writes the objects in a MIF document file in the following order This section Contains these objects File ID MIF file identification line MIFF ile statement Units Default units Units statement Catalogs Color Condition Paragraph Format Element Font or Character Format Ruling Table Format Views Formats Variable Cross reference Objects Document Dictionary Anchored frames Tables Pages Text flows FrameMaker provides all of these objects even if the object is empty To avoid unpredictable results in a document you must follow this order when you create a MIF file Creating a simple MIF file for FrameMaker The rest of this chapter explains how to create some simple MIF files for FrameMaker by hand These instructions do not apply to structured documents which require that you create elements first The most accurate source of information about MIF files is a MIF file generated by FrameMaker MIF files generated by FrameMaker can be very lengthy because Fr
167. at least one Value statement you can include as many Value statements as you like FrameMaker ignores any Key that does not have at least one Value following it MIF does not represent entries for Creator Creation Date Or Modification Date For additional information and an example of the syntax for the Key and Value statements see PDF Document Info on page 82 Online manual Syntax ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 137 MIF Book File Statements lt PDFBooklInfo Specifies the information that appears in the File Info dictionary when you save the book as PDF Each Document Info entry consists of one Key statement followed by at least one Value statement lt Key string gt A string of up to 255 ASCII characters that represents the name of a Document Info field in PDF the name of a File Info field must be 126 characters or less Represent non printable characters via HH where identifies a hexadecimal representation of a character and HH is the hexadecimal value for the character For example use 23 to represent the character Zero value hex codes 00 are illegal For more information see PDF Document Info on page 82 lt Value string gt A string of up to 255 ASCII characters that represents the value of a Document Info field because a sin gle MIF string contains no more than 255 ASCII characters you can use more than one Value state ment for a given Key A Value can include Unicode characters
168. atalog lt TblINumColumns 2 gt Number of columns in this table lt TblColumnWidth 2 0 gt Width of first column lt TblColumnWidth 1 5 gt Width of second column lt TblH Begin table heading lt Row Begin row lt Cell First cell in row lt CellContent lt Para Cells can contain paragraphs lt PgfTag CellHeading gt Applies format from Paragraph Catalog lt ParaLine lt String Coffee gt Text in this cell gt gt end of Para gt end of CellContent gt end of Cell lt Cell Second cell in row Online manual gt lt CellContent lt Para lt PgfTag CellHeading gt lt ParaLine lt String Price per Bag gt gt gt end of Para gt end of CellContent gt end of Cell gt end of Row end of TblH lt TblBody Table body lt Row Begin row gt SK gt lt Cell First cell in row lt CellContent lt Para lt PgfTag CellBody gt lt ParaLine lt String Brazil Santos gt gt gt end of Para gt end of CellContent gt end of Cell lt Cell Second cell in row lt CellContent lt Para lt PgfTag CellBody gt lt ParaLine lt String 455 00 gt gt gt end of Para gt end of CellContent gt end of Cell end of Row end of TblBody end of Tbl end of Tbls ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 25 Using MIF Statements A table cell is a text column that contains an untagged text flow not connected to
169. atalog statement Within the text flow conditional and Unconditional statements show where conditional text begins and ends Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 57 MIF Document Statements ConditionCatalog statement The Condit ionCatalog statement defines the contents of the Condition Catalog A MIF file can have only one Condit ionCatalog statement which must appear at the top level in the order given in MIF file layout on page 52 Syntax lt ConditionCatalog lt Condition gt Defines a condition tag see Condition statement next lt Condition gt Additional statements as needed End of ConditionCatalog statement Condition statement The Condition statement defines the state of a condition tag and its condition indicators which control how condi tional text is displayed in the document window The statement must appear in a Condit ionCatalog statement The property statements can appear in any order Syntax lt Condition lt CTag string gt Condition tag string lt CState keyword gt Whether text with this tag is shown or hidden keyword can be one of CHidden CShown lt CStyle keyword gt Format of text with this condition keywordcan be one of CAsIs CUnderline CDoubleUnderline CStrike COverline CChangeBar lt CColor tagstring gt Color for condition tag see ColorCatalog statement on page 78 lt CSeparation integer gt Color for condition
170. ateAcrobatInfo 88 95 DGraphicsOff 86 93 DGridOn 86 93 diacritical 185 Dictionary 99 diff 187 DInclusions 165 div 189 diver 187 DLanguage 87 94 DLinebreakChars 84 91 DLinkBoundariesOn 87 93 DLOut 134 DLParentFormats 243 DLSource 134 243 MagicMarker 89 97 Margins 83 89 MathCatalog 174 MathFunctions 174 MathGreek 174 MathGreekOverrides 174 D D D D D D DMathItalicFunctionName 245 D MathItalicOtherText 245 DMathLargeHoriz 174 DMathLargelntegral 173 DMathLargeLevell 173 DMathLargeLevel2 173 DMathLargeLevel3 173 DMathLargeSigma 173 DMathLargeVert 174 DMathMediumHoriz 173 DMathMediumIntegral 173 DMathMediumLevell 173 DMathMediumLevel2 173 DMathMediumLevel3 173 DMathMediumSigma 173 DMathMediumVert 174 DMathNew 174 DMathNewType 175 DMathNumbers 174 DMathOpName 174 175 DMathOpOverrides 174 DMathOpPositionA 174 175 DMathOpPositionB 174 175 DMathOpPositionC 174 175 DMathOpTLineOverride 174 175 DMathShowCustom 174 DMathSmallHoriz 173 DMathSmallIntegral 173 DMathSmallLevell 173 DMathSmallLevel2 173 DMathSmallLevel3 173 DMathSmallSigma 173 DMathSmallVert 174 DMathStrings 174 DMathVariables 174 DMaxInterLine 242 DMaxInterPgf 242 DMenuBar 88 97 DNarrowRubiSpaceForJapanese 213 DNarrowRubiSpaceForOther 213 DNextUnique 83 89 DNoPrintSepColor 87 94 292 DocFileInfo 97 Document 83 89 164 document files 52 MIF sections of 52 document properties 82 97 Acrobat preference
171. ation that is not centered lt NonSeparableChar chars gt 7 Characters that cannot have line breaks between them lt PrecedingSymbol chars gt 8 Characters such as currency symbols or lt SucceedingSymbol chars gt 9 Characters such as or degree lt AsianSpace chars gt 10 Characters for spaces in Asian text lt Hiragana chars gt 11 The set of hiragana characters lt Others gt 12 All characters not assigned to any class automatically belong to lt Others gt lt BaseCharWithSuper chars gt 13 FrameMaker uses this class to allow spreading between the end of a footnote and the next character Do not assign any characters to this class lt BaseCharWithRubi chars gt 14 The rubi block including oyamoji and rubi text This class has to do with Rubikake and Nibukake rules that specify how to handle spac ing between a rubi block and an adjacent character lt Numeral chars gt 15 Characters for numerals lt UnitSymbol chars gt 16 This class is not used by FrameMaker lt RomanSpace chars gt 17 Characters for spaces in Roman text lt RomanChar chars gt 18 Characters for Roman text lt ParenBeginWariChu chars gt 19 The current version of FrameMaker does not support Warichu this class is not used by FrameMaker Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 MIF Asian Text Processing Statements MIF Statement Column Description Position lt ParenEndWariChu chars gt 20 The cur
172. b1lID ID gt Table ID number lt TblTag tagstring gt Applies format from Table Catalog Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 73 MIF Document Statements lt TblFormat gt Overrides Table Catalog format as needed see page 68 Table columns lt TblNumColumns integer gt Number of columns in the table A Tb1lColumnWidth dimension gt Width of first column lt Tb1lColumnWidth dimension gt Width of second column Width of remaining columns as needed lt EqualizeWidths Makes specified columns the same width as the widest column for filters only see page 76 lt TblColumnNum integer gt First column lt TblColumnNum integer gt More columns as needed gt End of EqualizeWidths statement Table title lt TblTitle Begin definition of table title lt Tb1TitleContent Table title s content represented in one or more Para statements lt Notes gt Footnotes for table title see page 120 lt Para gt Title text see page 121 lt Para gt Additional statements as needed gt End of To1TitleContent statement gt End of Tol Title statement Table rows lt TblH Table heading rows omit if no table headings lt Row gt See Row statement next lt Row gt Additional statements as needed gt End of Tb1H statement lt Tb1lBody Table body rows lt Row gt See Row statement
173. bdirectory lt c gt Filename Macintosh lt v gt MyVolume lt c gt MyFolder lt c gt MySubfolder lt c gt Filename Windows lt v gt c lt c gt mydir lt c gt subdir lt c gt filename Relative pathnames A relative pathname shows the location of a file relative to the current directory In all FrameMaker versions the device independent relative pathname for the same file is lt c gt Filename Online manual Using MIF Statements MIF statements can completely describe any FrameMaker document no matter how complex As a result you often need many MIF statements to describe a document To learn how to use MIF statements it helps to begin with some simple examples This chapter introduces you to MIF beginning with a simple MIF example file with only a few lines of text Additional examples show how to add common document objects such as paragraph formats a table and a custom page layout to this simple MIF file The examples in this chapter are also provided in online sample files You can open these examples in FrameMaker and experiment with them by adding additional MIF statements Look for the sample files in the following location In this version Look here UNIX SFMHOME fminit language Samples MIF where language is the language in use such as usenglish Macintosh The MIF folder in the Samples folder Windows The MIF directory under the samples directory Working with MIF files AMIF file is
174. been made to the Page statement MIF 3 00 MIF 4 00 lt PageOrientation keyword gt lt PageAngle gt and lt DPageSize gt A page s size and orientation landscape or portrait is determined by the PageAngle statement and the Document substatement DPageSize FrameMaker writes the PageOrient ation statement for backward compatibility MIF generators should use the PageAngle statement instead of PageOrientation When the MIF interpreter reads a Page statement that includes both a PageAngle and a PageOrientation statement it ignores the PageOrientat ion statement When the interpreter reads a Page statement that contains a PageOrientation statement but no PageAngle statement it determines the page s angle from the PageOrien tation statement If the page orientation matches the orientation determined by the DPageSize statement the page s angle is 0 degrees otherwise the page s angle is 90 degrees A page that has neither a PageAngle nora PageOrientation statement has an angle of 0 degrees Online manual 248 Facet Formats for Graphics When you copy a graphic into a FrameMaker document the FrameMaker document stores the graphic data in one or more facets Each facet contains data in a specific graphic format FrameMaker uses facets to display and print graphics In UNIX versions of FrameMaker you can associate a graphic application with FrameMaker through the FrameMaker API or through the FrameServer interface You can set
175. ber signifying a dimension You can specify the units such as 1 11 72 pt and 8 3 cm lfno units are specified the default unit is used see Units statement on page 54 degrees A decimal number signifying an angle value in degrees You cannot specify units any number is interpreted as a degree value Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 6 Introduction This term or symbol Means percentage A decimal number signifying a percentage value You cannot specify units any number is inter preted as a percentage value metric A dimension specified in units that represent points where one point is 1 72 inch see Math val ues on page 7 Only used in Mat hFul1Form statements WH Pair of dimensions representing width and height You can specify the units XY Coordinates of a point Coordinates originate at the upper left corner of the page or graphic frame You can specify the units LTRB Coordinates representing left top right and bottom indents You can specify the units LIWH Coordinates representing the left and top indents plus the dimensions representing the width and height of an object You can specify the units X YWH Coordinates of a point on the physical screen represented by X and Y plus dimensions describing the width and height Used only by the DWindowRect and DViewRect statements within the Document statement and the BWindowRect statement within the Book statement The val ues
176. both simple and complex lines A simple line is represented as a PolyLine with lt NumPoints 2 gt The NumPoints statement is optional When the MIF interpreter reads a MIF file it counts the Point statements to determine the number of points in the polyline Rectangle statement The Rectangle statement describes rectangles and squares It can appear at the top level or in a Page or Frame statement Syntax lt Rectangle Generic object statements Information common to all objects see page 101 lt ShapeRect L T W H gt Position and size of object before rotation in page or graphic frame coordi nates lt Smoothed boolean gt Yes smooths angles to rounded curves gt End of Rectangle statement RoundRect statement A RoundRect statement describes a rectangle with curved corners It can appear at the top level or ina Page or Frame statement Syntax lt RoundRect Generic object statements Information common to all objects see page 101 lt ShapeRect L T W H gt Position and size of object before rotation in page or graphic frame coordi nates lt Radius dimension gt Radius of corner 0 square corner gt End of RoundRect statement TextLine statement The TextLine statement describes a text line It can appear at the top level or in a Page or Frame statement A text line is a single line of text that FrameMaker treats differently from other text Text lines grow and shrink as they are edited but
177. by the ATb1 statement must exactly match the ID given by the Tb11D statement If it does not the MIF interpreter ignores the ATb1 statement and the table instance does not appear in the document You cannot use multiple ATb1 statements that refer to the same table ID An ID can be any positive integer from 1 to 65535 inclusive The only other statements that require an ID are AFrame statements linked Text Rect statements and Group statements For more information about these statements see Graphic objects and graphic frames on page 101 Rotated cells A table can have rotated cells and straddle cells The following table includes rotated cells in the heading row Coffee Price Brazil Santos 455 00 Ina MIF file a cell that is rotated simply includes a cel1Angle statement that specifies the angle of rotation lt Cell lt CellAngle 270 gt lt CellContent gt gt end of Cell Cells can only be rotated by 90 180 or 270 degrees Cells are rotated clockwise Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 27 Using MIF Statements Straddle cells The contents of a straddle cell cross cell borders as if there were a single cell You can straddle cells horizontally or vertically The following table includes a heading row that straddles two columns Brazilian Coffee Coffee Price per Bag Brazil Santos 455 00 The MIF code for the straddle cell includes a ce11Columns statement that speci
178. c When printing an imported graphic FrameMaker selects one of the following facets in order of preference EPSI Encapsulated PostScript e Native platform facet QuickDraw PICT WMF e FrameVector TIFF e Framelmage and other bitmap facets When displaying an imported graphic FrameMaker selects one of the following facets in order of preference e Native platform facet QuickDraw PICT WMF e FrameVector FrameImage TIFF e Other bitmap facets Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 249 Facet Formats for Graphics All versions of FrameMaker recognize EPSI with DCS Cyan DCS Magenta DCS Yellow and DCS Black for color separations TIFF FrameImage and FrameVector facets Macintosh versions of FrameMaker also recognize QuickDraw PICT and QuickTime facets Windows versions of FrameMaker also recognize WMF and OLE facets If the graphic data does not have a corresponding facet supported by FrameMaker for displaying or printing FrameMaker can use filters to convert the graphic data into one of two internal facets FrameImage for bitmap data and FrameVector for vector data For example FrameMaker does not have a facet for HPGL so HPGL data is converted into a FrameVector facet In Macintosh and Windows versions of FrameMaker users can choose to automatically save a cross platform facet of an imported graphic If a cross platform facet does not already exist FrameMaker generates a FramelImage facet for the impor
179. c is stored in a separate file the file must include the header string lt MakerVectorxxx gt Specification of FrameVector data A description of a graphic in FrameVector format consists of records Each record contains the following fields e A unique one byte op code e A four byte integer specifying the size of the data e The actual data The following figure illustrates the breakdown of a typical record One byte op code Four byte field describing the size of Actual data of variable length the data 9 bytes long in this case as specified by the previous field 87 00000009 017A0000002D000000 A Types and listing of op codes Fach record begins with an op code The op code can be one of the following three types Definition e The definition op codes specify the version of the FrameVector graphic and any global information used in the graphic such as colors Any definitions used by the style and object op codes must be specified before these op codes e Style Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 269 FrameVector Facet Format e The style op codes define the styles applied to all operations until the styles are changed For example all graphics objects use the same line width fill pattern and color until the style op codes change All styles need to be defined before specifying the first object op code e Object e The object op codes define graphics objects The following tables list the op codes with a brie
180. cTheta 309 gt lt ArcDTheta 51 gt Online manual Define the group for all the objects to make the chart easier to manipulate after it s imported into a FrameMaker document lt Group lt ID 1 gt gt Custom dashed lines ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 222 Examples FrameMaker provides eight predefined dashed line options You can define a custom pattern for dashed lines by using the DashedPattern statement within an Object statement This example is in the file custdash mif lt MIFFile 7 00 gt This is a sparse dot dash line lt PolyLine lt Pen 0 gt lt Fill 15 gt lt PenWidth 4pt gt lt ObColor Black gt lt DashedPattern lt DashedStyle Dashed gt lt NumSegments 4 gt lt DashSegment 10pt gt lt DashSegment 10pt gt lt DashSegment 0 5pt gt lt DashSegment 10pt gt gt end of DashedPattern lt HeadCap Round gt lt TailCap Round gt lt NumPoints 2 gt lt Point 1 0 1 gt lt Point 7 5 1 gt gt end of PolyLine This is a very sparse dotted line lt PolyLine lt DashedPattern lt DashedStyle Dashed gt lt NumSegments 2 gt lt DashSegment 0 5pt gt lt DashSegment 20pt gt gt end of DashedPattern The polyline inherits round head caps and tail caps from the previous PolyLine statement lt NumPoints 2 gt lt Point 1 0 2 gt lt Point 7 5 2 gt gt end of PolyLine This is a wild one lt PolyLine lt DashedPattern Online manual ADOBE
181. can contain text might have the following general rule lt EDGeneralRule lt TEXT gt gt If you don t provide a general rule statement for a container element the MIF interpreter applies the default rule lt ANY gt The rule means that any element or text is allowed The following general rule describes an element that must contain at least one element named Item lt ElementDef lt EDTag BulletList gt lt EDValidHighestLevel No gt lt EDGeneralRule Item gt lt EDObject EDContainer gt gt end of ElementDef For more information about content rules see the online manual FrameMaker Structure Application Developer s Guide Attribute definitions Element definitions can specify attribute definitions which describe attributes information stored with an element other than its content The definition of an attribute can specify that the attribute is required for all elements with the element definition It can also provide a list of the values the attribute can have and a default value EDAttrDef statement The EDAttrDef statement defines the formatting properties to be applied to a container table table child or footnote element in different contexts It must appear in an Element Def statement Syntax lt EDAttrDef Begin attribute definition lt EDAttrName string gt Attribute name lt EDAttrType keyword gt Attribute type keyword canbe one of FAtt rChoice a value from a list of choices FAttrInt
182. ch character is rendered within a specific area For Asian characters this area is the same for each character These rules determine how to compress this area for optimum line rendering Syntax lt SqueezeTable lt SqueezeHorizontal numerals gt Defines how to squeeze horizontal text lt SqueezeVertical numerals gt Defines how to squeeze vertical text gt End of SqueezeTable statement 206 Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 207 MIF Asian Text Processing Statements The possible values for numerals are No squeeze Half squeeze from top or left Half squeeze from bottom or right Quarter squeeze from all sides Same as 3 but do not apply vertical squeeze to a semicolon This character pair should not have occurred OUBWN O Usage The squeezeHorizontal and SqueezeVertical statements include 25 numerical values one for each character class The values are separated by a space An example of a squeeze table statement is lt SqueezeTable 4 D Sos z HS 8 SS 2s 2 3G 4 Oo g n a uO G29 oS O0 a a om coYVFeeeanag a5 _ v 3 8 Stns Pagan we ze 62s ee Pep os PBs ce kh GAAS wy o Oogo00 gD aSs see knOv HR ee eG oep ON eer Ge DG ge MMH AM HH sF euvuendvg MHOU YH Cee ge wWDoY YY A Oni ta se 9 89a Pov EY gGegevdee eR HR K Ce ete ee See 2 ee oe ee ee Oe v ao S S AMM ZOUMA ZAAL TEOMA MAZDA AAAA lt SqueezeHorizontal 112003 2000000050 0012000 0 0 lt SqueezeVertical
183. ch line in a paragraph lt PgfLeadingChange dimension gt Change to space below each line in a paragraph lt PgfNumTabs integer gt Number of tabs in a paragraph To clear all the tabs in a para graph specify 0 lt TabStop lt TSX dimension gt Begin definition of tab stop the following property statements can appear in any order but must appear withina TabStop statement Horizontal position of tab stop lt TSXRelative boolean gt Yes means the tab stop is relative to the left indent lt TSType keyword gt lt TSLeaderStr string gt Tab stop alignment keywordcan be one of Left Center Right Decimal Tab stop leader string for example lt TSDecimalChar integer gt Align decimal tab around a character by ASCII value in UNIX versions type man ascii ina UNIX window for alist of char acters and their corresponding ASCII values Endof TabStop statement Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 157 MIF Statements for Structured Documents and Books lt TabStop gt Additional statements as needed lt MoveTabs dimension gt Move all tabs by a specified distance A format change list can have one or more TabStob statements or a MoveTabs statement It can t have both Default font name properties lt FFamily string gt Name of font family lt FAngle string gt Name of angle lt FWeight string gt lt FVar string gt
184. change list can specify absolute values or relative values For example it can specify that the paragraph left indent is one inch or it can specify that it is one inch greater than the inherited left indent Alternatively a change list can simply specify a paragraph catalog format to apply to a paragraph If it does this it can t specify changes to any other paragraph properties If aFmtChangeList statement defines a named change list it must include an FclTag statement specifying its name In addition it must contain one statement for each paragraph format property it changes For example if a named change list changes only the first indent by a relative value it contains only FclTag and PgfFIndent Change statements If it changes the space below and the leading with absolute values it contains FclTag PgfSpBefore and PgfLeading statements If a FmtChangeList statement changes a paragraph property to an absolute value the statement it uses is the same as the corresponding paragraph format statement for example PgfLIndent If the change list changes a property with a relative value the statement it uses has the name of the corresponding paragraph format statement with the word Change appended to it for example PgfLIndentChange Syntax Basic properties lt FmtChangeList Begin format change list lt FclTag tagstring gt Format change list name if the format change list is named lt FclPgfCatalogRef tagstring gt A paragr
185. chart example 2 2 cette ett ees 217 Pie chartexample esm EE E 221 Custom dashed INES lt muis aea ia e E EE 222 Table examples dueren n a a e Eat 224 Database publishing 2 6 eee cece eee eee 227 General form for MIF messages 0 eee cece teen ee 234 List of MIF messages 0 2 ee cece eee teen eens 234 Changes between version 6 0 and 7 0 06 02 cece eee eee 237 Changes between version 5 5 and 6 0 20 ese e eee eee 238 Changes between version 5 and 5 50 eee cece cece eee 239 Changes between versions 4 and 5 cece cece eee 240 Changes between versions3 and4 sce eee 244 Facets for imported graphics 6 cece cee eens 248 Basic facet tOrMat e a ead vida paket r a MaMa EDT 249 Graphic insets UNIX versions 00 2 0c cece eee eee ee eee eee 251 General rules for reading and writing facets n n naana 256 Specification of an EPSI facet 6 cece cece eee 258 Example of an EPSI facet 0 cece cece eee ees 258 Specification of a Framelmage facet n n annaa 260 Specification of Framelmage data cece eee eee 260 Differences between monochrome and color 6 cece eee eee 263 Sample unencoded Framelmage facet 00 02 c eee eee eee ee 264 Sample encoded Framelmage facet 00 cece c eee eee eee 266 Specification of a FrameVector facet oe eee 268 Specification of FrameVector data cece eee eee 268 Sample FrameVector facet 60 cece eee eens 284 Introduction MIF Maker In
186. complete description of arrow style properties see your user s manual p yte prop y Syntax lt ArrowStyle lt TipAngle integer gt Arrowhead tip angle in degrees lt BaseAngle integer gt Arrowhead base angle in degrees lt Length dimension gt Arrowhead length lt HeadType keyword gt Arrowhead type keywordcan be one of Stick Hollow Filled lt ScaleHead boolean gt Yes scales head as arrow line gets wider lt ScaleFactor dimension gt Scaling factor for arrowhead as line gets wider End of ArrowStyLe statement Ellipse statement The Ellipse statement describes circles and noncircular ellipses It can appear anywhere at the top level or in a Frame Or Page statement Online manual Syntax ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 107 MIF Document Statements lt Ellipse Generic object statements Information common to all objects see page 101 lt ShapeRect L T W H gt Position and size of object s bounding rectangle before rotation in the page or graphic frame coordinates End of Ellipse statement Frame statement Usually a Frame statement contains a list of Object and Frame statements that define the contents of the graphic frame and are listed in the draw order from back to front The Frame statement can appear at the top level or in a Page Frame or AFrame statement Syntax lt Frame Generic object statements Information c
187. complete description of a Font statement To apply a predefined character format to text use the FTag statement lt MIFFile 7 00 gt Hand generated lt FontCatalog lt Font lt FTag Emphasis gt lt FAngle Italic gt gt end of Font gt end of FontCatalog lt Para Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 22 Using MIF Statements lt PgfTag Body gt lt ParaLine lt String You can format characters within a paragraph by gt lt Font lt FTag Emphasis gt gt end of Font lt String applying gt lt Font lt FTag gt gt end of Font lt String a character format from the character catalog gt gt end of ParaLine gt end of Para Remember to include a second Font statement to end the scope of the applied character format To locally define a character format use a complete Font statement lt Para lt PgfTag Body gt lt ParaLine lt String You can also format characters by gt lt Font lt FTag Emphasis gt character property statements gt end of Font lt String applying gt lt Font lt FTag gt gt end of Font lt String a locally defined character format gt gt end of ParaLine gt end of Para Like paragraph formats character formats inherit properties from previously defined character formats Unlike paragraph formats however a character format ends at the close of a Para statement See the sample file charfmt mif for exampl
188. cribe graphics 112 subset 192 subseteq 192 substitution 194 SuccedingSymbol 205 SuffixBegin 163 sum 192 Sun rasterfile imported 111 supset 192 supseteq 192 syntax for strings 5 T Table Catalog 29 68 76 table format properties 68 76 alignment 69 autonumber of paragraphs in cells 69 body cell paragraph formats 71 cell margins 69 color 70 column widths 70 fill pattern 70 footing cell paragraph formats 71 footnotes 85 91 heading cell paragraph formats 71 indents 68 numbering paragraphs in cells 69 placement on page 69 ruling default 69 shading default 70 shading exception column 70 space above below 68 title paragraph format 69 title placement 69 widow orphan control 69 tables 68 76 anchors 25 column widths 73 creating and formatting 23 31 example of 224 IDs 26 instances 23 number of columns 73 rotated cells 26 straddled cells 27 titles 73 TabStop 59 156 157 Tag 103 107 TailCap in Arc 105 in PolyLine 116 tan 188 tanh 189 Tbl in Tbls 72 TblAlignment 69 TblAltShadePeriod 70 TblBlockSize 69 TblBody 73 TblBodyFill 70 TblBodyRowRuling 69 TblBodySeparation 70 244 TbIBRuling 70 TblCatalog 68 TblCellMargins 69 TblColumn 70 TblColumnBody 71 TblColumnF 71 TblColumnH 71 TblColumnNum in determining table width 76 in Tbl 73 in TblFormat 70 TblColumnRuling 69 TblColumnWidth in determining table width 76 in Tbl 73 in TblFormat 70 TblColumnWidthA in determining table width 76
189. ct defined 101 ObjectAttribute 103 objects 101 119 color for 103 dashed pattern 102 examples of 217 222 fill for 103 generic object data 101 imported 110 115 object attributes 103 pen for 103 rotation 102 ObTint 102 oint 192 OKWord 99 OLE object 112 OneLinePerRec 134 243 operators in equations 186 196 oplus 191 oppartial 193 optional operands in equations 193 optotal 193 Others 205 otimes 191 output filters 48 297 over 190 overline 188 Overprint 102 P Page 99 page layouts 31 36 default 32 double sided 35 first master page 35 headers and footers 35 single sided 33 text column 32 page numbering inabook 140 inadocument 84 90 page size 84 89 PageAngle 100 PageBackground 100 PageNum 99 PageNumbering 141 PageNumStart 140 PageNumStyle 140 PageOrientation 247 pages adding 99 background for 100 body 99 breaking 60 hidden 99 master 99 name 99 numbering in a document 99 orientation 247 reference 99 rotation 100 table placement on 69 types of 99 PageSize 100 PageTag 99 PageType 99 Para in Cell 75 in Notes 120 in Tbl 73 in TextFlow 120 Paragraph Catalog 58 62 creating 18 paragraph format properties alignment 59 alignment in cells 61 default font 60 keep with next paragraph 60 language used for spell checking and hyphenation 64 leading 59 letter spacing 60 numbering 60 space above below 59 widow orphan line control 60 paragraph formats adding to Paragraph Catalog 18 creating 13
190. d below the paragraph by modifying the paragraph s format not by adding extra carriage returns In a FrameMaker document you store paragraph formats in a Paragraph Catalog and assign a tag name to the format You can then apply the same format to many paragraphs by assigning the format tag to the paragraphs You can also format a paragraph individually without storing the format in the Paragraph Catalog Or you can assign a format from the Paragraph Catalog and then override some of the properties within a particular paragraph Formats that are not stored in the Paragraph Catalog are called local formats Creating a paragraph In a MIF file paragraphs are defined by a Para statement A Para statement contains one or more ParaLine state ments that contain the lines in a paragraph the actual text of the line is enclosed in one or more St ring statements lt Para Begin a paragraph lt ParaLine Begin a line within the paragraph lt String Hello World gt The actual text of this document gt End of ParaLine statement gt End of Para statement The Para ParaLine and String statements are the only required statements to import text You could use this example to import a simple document into FrameMaker by placing each paragraph in a Para statement Break the paragraph text into a series of String statements contained in one ParaLine statement It doesn t matter how you break up text lines within a Para statement the MIF interpr
191. d objects 110 115 graphic file formats 111 pathname syntax 113 record of filter used 113 size 111 imported text 127 ImportHint 110 importing MIF files 9 ImportObEditor 110 ImportObFile 110 113 ImportObFileDI 110 113 ImportObFixedSize 110 ImportObject 110 115 ImportObUpdater 111 in 191 include 56 Inclusion 145 InCondition 58 in Row 74 indents paragraph 59 table 68 indexes 194 indexes for pen and fill patterns 103 indices in equations 194 inheritance of character format properties 22 of paragraph format properties 20 InitialAutoNums 98 inprod 189 int 192 IsTextRange 154 J jotdot 191 K ket 188 Key 96 137 Klanguage 204 Kumihan 204 Kumihan tables 202 212 KumihanCatalog 204 L landscape pages 247 language used for spell checking and hyphenation default for document 87 94 in paragraphs and characters 64 ap 188 arge operators in equations 192 eading of a paragraph 59 eft angle bracket lt 5 eft quotation mark 5 Leftarrow 191 eftarrow 191 Length 106 eq 191 essthan 191 etter spacing 65 Level 153 LevelFormatRule 152 154 im 189 ine breaks 84 91 ist 191 1 191 n 188 ocking a document 87 93 138 og 193 paren 188 LRarrow 191 rarrow 191 M MacEdition 134 243 MacPaint files imported 111 macros 55 margins cell 69 296 page defaults 83 89 Marker 123 in ParaLine 122 markers 36 123 MarkerTypeCatalog 124 markup statements data ite
192. data type Point byte Description of data Baseline origin of the text line in points point Text line alignment byte O left 1 center 2 right Size of data in bytes 9 Example 87 00000009 017A0000 002D0000 00 for a text line with the following specifications x position 378 points 017A y position 45 points 002D alignment left Note The specification of the start of a text line begins with op code 87 and can contain combi nations of fonts and text A text line must end with op code 89 Text in text line 0x88 Specification by data type String Description of data Actual text written in text line Size of data in bytes Variable Example 88 00000005 0005 74 65 78 74 00 for the text line text Online manual End of text line 0x89 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 283 FrameVector Facet Format Specification by data type N A Description of data None Size of data in bytes 0 Example 89 00000000 Beginning of clipping rectangle 0x8A Specification by data type Rectangle Description of data Position and size of clipping rectangle in points Size of data in bytes 16 Example 8A 00000010 00670000 004F0000 00130000 003C0000 for a clipping rectangle with the following specifications x position 103 points 0067 y position 79 points 004F width 19 points 0013 height 60 points 003C Note
193. dd extra space if the adjacent characters are one each of Japanese and Roman characters Delete one of two space characters Note that FrameMaker does not use this action because the Smart Spaces feature performs it automatically This character pair should not have occurred WMBWN OO fon 1 Usage Fach statement row in the extra space table includes 25 numerical values one for each character class The values are separated by a space An example of a extra space table is lt ExtraSpaceTable RS 3a 6 a 5 oz n 2 amp en S82 Ae T O 2 2 U wosp qo ars ob ee ag a FS eS o 2 8 SEBS SF g s DH wY z 2 SAS te es a ae em MS Bw He U2 aS a a oe Rov a Fp oc SF fF BSENnV YE Soe cea EE Be A Hep a GMM Annan tue Eanuason agawy TH S S a gFvHv wv YW wHoHveew ae ov ews evove ee gs FS lt v vee ee See Be ge ee od oe eee eta ee Am ZOOM AA H HKTOMRM AD HME MAA HHHHAY lt BegParentheses Le Te Ve Ne Bede he ey De ea de PD Oe a 6 da Pad lt EndParentheses Te See ee ihe ale eS ad Te 1 110 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 gt end of ExtraSpaceTable In the preceding example a extra space is not allowed between a character in the EndParentheses class anda character in the CcenteredPunct class because the value 1 Extra space is not allowed is in the fifth position which is the column position for the centeredPunct class of characters Rubi text Rubi text is a Japanese system for representing the pronunciation of words as a string of phonetic charac
194. de FrameVector CGM Corel Draw Micrografx Drawing Format DXF EPS GEM HPGL IGES PICT WME and WPG Note that some of these graphic file formats can also contain bitmap data Size position and angle of imported graphics When you import a MIF file FrameMaker determines the size of the graphic by the graphic type and the value of the ImportObFixedSize statement If the file format is Image scaled Size determined by Bitmap with lt ImportObFixedSize Yes gt No ShapeRect statement Bitmap with lt ImportObFixedSize No gt Yes BitMapDpi statement Vector Yes Dimensions specified in the vector data Encapsulated PostScript QuickDraw PICT No Bounding box information in imported image Position and coordinate systems Some types of graphics such as EPS use coordinate systems to specify the position of the graphic When these types of graphics are imported into a FrameMaker document the Nat iveo rigin statement specifies the coordinates of the origin of the graphic within the page or frame If the imported graphic is updated FrameMaker uses the coordinates from the NativeOrigin statement to prevent the graphic from shifting on the page or frame Size and scale of TIFF graphics FrameMaker doesn t use internal TIFF dpi information for sizing purposes because not all TIFF files contain that information and because it may be incorrect FrameMaker allows users to set the dpi manually when importing the TIFF file Once th
195. ditional text The variableLocked statement is used for text insets that retain formatting information from the source document If the lt variableLocked Yes gt statement appears in a specific variable that variable is part of a text inset that retains formatting information from the source document The variable is not affected by global formatting performed on the document If the lt variableLocked No gt statement appears in a specific variable that variable is not part of a text inset or is part of a text inset that reads formatting information from the current document The variable is affected by global formatting performed on the document Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 123 MIF Document Statements For more information about text insets see Text insets text imported by reference on page 127 Char statement The Char statement inserts an extended ASCII character in a ParaLine statement It must appear in a ParaLine Text Line Or BookXRef statement Syntax lt Char keyword gt Preset name for special character for allowed keyword values see Usage next Usage To include an extended ASCII character in a ParaLine statement you must either use a hexadecimal code to represent the character or use the Char statement with a predefined character name For example you can represent the pound sterling character with the hex code xa3 or with the statement lt Char Pound gt as shown in
196. e lt DSmallCapsSize percent gt lt DSuperscriptShift percent gt Scaling factor for small caps expressed as percentage of current font size Baseline offset of superscripts expressed as percentage of current font size lt DSubscriptShift percent gt lt DSuperscriptStretch percent gt Baseline offset of subscripts expressed as percentage of current font size Amount to stretch or compress superscript where 100 means no change lt DSubscriptStretch percent gt Amount to stretch or compress subscript where 100 means no change Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 95 MIF Document Statements lt DSmallCapsStretch percent gt Amount to stretch or compress small caps where 100 means no change lt DRubiSize percentage gt The size of the rubi characters proportional to the size of the oyamoji characters see Rubi text on page 212 Reference properties lt DUpdateXRefsOnOpen boolean gt lt DUpdateTextInsetsOnOpen boolean gt Yes specifies that cross references are automatically updated when the document is opened Yes specifies that text insets are automatically updated when the doc ument is opened PDF preferences lt DAcrobatBookmarksIncludeTagNames boolean gt Yes specifies that each PDF Bookmark title begins with the name of the paragraph tag lt DGenerateAcrobatInfo boolean gt Yes sets the document s print options to their required states f
197. e 1000 0 through 1000 0 lt CombinedFontBaseEncoding keyword gt lt CombinedFontAllowBaseFamilyBoldedAndObliqued boolean gt Specifies the encoding for the base font keyword can be one of JISX0208 ShiftJIS BIGS GB2312 80 EUC KSC5601 1992 Yes allows a simulation of the bold or italic Asian component font to be used if Bold or Italic Oblique is applied to the combined font End of the CombinedFontDe fn state ment More CombinedFontDe fn statements as needed End of the CombinedFontCatalog statement Example The following is an example of a combined font catalog lt CombinedFontCatalog lt CombinedFontDefn lt CombinedFontName MyCombinedFont gt lt CombinedFontBaseFamily Osaka gt lt CombinedFontWesternFamily Times gt lt CombinedFontWesternSize 75 0 gt lt CombinedFontWesternShift 0 0 gt lt CombinedFontBaseEncoding JISX0208 ShiftJIS gt lt CombinedFontAllowBaseFamilyBoldedAndObliqued Yes gt gt end of CombinedFontDefn gt end of CombinedFontCatalog PgfFont or Font statement When a combined font is used in a paragraph or text line the PgfFont or Font statement includes the combined font name and the base font s family name These statements also include the PostScriptName and PlatformName for both the base and the Roman fonts FCombinedFontName is a new statement to express the combined font name The Framily statement expresses the base font s f
198. e lt GroupID 1 gt lt TLOrigin 0 46 0 42 gt lt TLAlignmen gt Center gt lt String 1986 gt Center gt lt String 1987 Center gt lt String 1988 Center gt lt String 1989 gt Right gt lt String 25 gt Right gt lt String 50 gt Right gt lt String 75 gt Right gt lt String 100 gt Draw all the gray bars first since they have the same fill ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 219 Examples Online manual Set the fill for the first bar the others inherit the fill pattern lt Rectangle lt GroupID 1 gt lt Fill 4 gt lt ShapeRect 0 97 1 10 0 gt lt Rectangle lt GroupID 1 gt lt ShapeRect 1 47 1 47 0 gt lt Rectangle lt GroupID 1 gt lt ShapeRect 1 97 1 72 0 gt lt Rectangle lt GroupID 1 gt lt ShapeRect 2 47 1 97 0 gt Now draw all the b pattern lt Rectangle lt GroupID 1 gt lt Fill 1 gt lt ShapeRect 1 10 1 97 0 gt lt Rectangle lt GroupID 1 gt lt ShapeRect 1 60 1 72 0 gt lt Rectangle lt GroupID 1 gt lt ShapeRect 2 10 1 22 0 gt lt Rectangle lt GroupID 1 gt lt ShapeRect 2 60 0 85 0 gt Define the group for all the objects to make the chart easier to manipulate after it s imported into a FrameMaker document lt Group lt ID 1 gt gt 3 3 3 3 ack bars since they have the same fill Set the fill for the first bar t
199. e SGML application associated with the document For information on registering SGML applications see the online manual FrameMaker Structure Application Developer s Guide lt DExc lusions gt Lists exclusions inherited when document is included in a struc tured book see ElementDef statement on page 145 lt DIncl lusions gt Lists inclusions inherited when document is included in a struc tured book see ElementDef statement on page 145 lt DSeparateInclusions boolean gt Yes means structured FrameMaker lists inclusions separately in the element catalog lt DApplyFormatRules boolean gt Yes uses element format rules to reformat document on opening and to remove format overrides for input filters only not gener ated by FrameMaker Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 166 MIF Statements for Structured Documents and Books lt DBookElementHierarchy If the document is in a book list of ancestors of the document s root element lt ElementContext Describes ancestor element of the document s root element lt PrevElement lt ETag tagstring gt Tag of sibling element preceding ancestor element lt Attributes gt gt lt Element lt ETag tagstring gt Tag of ancestor element lt Attributes gt gt lt NextElement lt ETag tagstring gt Tag of sibling element following ancestor element lt Attributes
200. e XRefFormats statement A cross reference format is defined by an xRefFormat statement Within text an XRef statement and a Marker statement indicate where each cross reference appears XRefFormats and XRefFormat statements The xRefFormats statement defines the formats of cross references to be used in document text flows A MIF file can have only one XRefFormats statement which must appear at the top level in the order given in MIF file layout on page 52 The xRefFormat statement supplies a cross reference format name and its definition The statement must appear in an XRefFormats statement Syntax lt XRefFormats lt XRefFormat lt XRefName string gt Cross reference name lt XRefDef string gt Cross reference definition gt End of XRefFormat statement lt XRefFormat gt More cross reference definitions as needed gt End of XRefFormats statement Usage XRefName supplies the cross reference format name which is used later by the xRef statement to apply a format to the text of the cross reference The xRefDef statement supplies the cross reference format definition which is a string that contains text and cross reference building blocks Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 82 MIF Document Statements For more information about cross references and their building blocks see your user s manual or the online Help system Global document properties A FrameMaker document has properties that
201. e colors that are mixed with white A tint is expressed by the percentage of the base color that is printed or displayed A tint of 100 is equivalent to the pure base color and a tint of 0 is equivalent to no color at all Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 78 MIF Document Statements You can specify overprinting for a color However if overprinting is set for a graphic object the object s setting takes precedence When a graphic object has no overprint statement the overprint setting for the color is assumed You can set up color views to specify which colors are visible in a document The color views for a document are specified in the views statement The current view for the document is identified in a Dcurrent View statement The color of a FrameMaker document object is expressed in a property statement for that object In this manual the syntax description of a FrameMaker document object that can have a color property includes the appropriate color property substatement ColorCatalog statement The ColorCatalog statement defines the contents of the Color Catalog A document can have only one Color Catalog statement which must appear at the top level in the order given in MIF file layout on page 52 Syntax lt ColorCatalog lt Color gt Defines a color see Color statement next Color gt Additional statements as needed gt End of ColorCatalog statement Color statement The Colo
202. e counter value starts from the initial setting Syntax lt InitialAutoNums lt AutoNumSeries lt FlowTag string gt Specifies flow that the file uses to number the series lt Series string gt Specifies autonumber series lt NumCounter integer gt Initializes auttonumber counter lt NumCounter gt Additional statements as needed gt End of AutoNumSeries statement lt AutoNumSeries gt Additional statements as needed End of InitialAutoNums statement Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 99 MIF Document Statements Dictionary statement The Dictionary statement lists all the words in the document dictionary A MIF file can have only one Dictionary statement which must appear at the top level in the order given in MIF file layout on page 52 Syntax lt Dictionary lt OKWord string gt Word in dictionary lt OKWord string gt Additional statements as needed gt End of Dictionary statement Pages Pages in a MIF file are defined by a Page statement A FrameMaker document can have four types of pages e Body pages contain the document s text and graphics e Master pages control the appearance of body pages e Reference pages contain boilerplate material or graphic art that is used repeatedly in a document or custom math elements e Hidden pages contain hidden conditional text in a special text flow When FrameMaker wri
203. e cross reference source text which must be unique When FrameMaker writes a cross reference it adds a unique number and the paragraph tag to the MText statement as shown in the previous example While the number is not required it guarantees that the cross reference points to a unique source Inserting the reference point The final step in creating a cross reference is to insert an XRef statement at the position in text where the cross reference should appear The xRef statement provides the name of the cross reference format defined in XRefFormat the source text and the pathname of the file containing the source lt Para lt PgfTag Body gt lt ParaLine lt String This is a cross reference to gt lt XRef lt XRefName Page gt Cross reference format Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 38 Using MIF Statements lt XRefSrcText 34126 Heading My Heading gt Source text lt XRefSrcFile gt File containing source gt end of XRef lt XRefEnd gt 1 lt String gt gt end of ParaLine gt end of Para The format name must exactly match the name of a format defined in xRefFormats The source text must be unique and must match the string in the MText statement in the corresponding reference point marker The XRefSrcFile statement is only required if the reference source is in a different file from the reference point It must be a valid MIF filename see Device independent pathnames on
204. e format format_definition Anecessary dimension value was not found in a MIF statement The XRefName statement is not specified for a cross reference format No name was given for the variable definition variable_definition Object ignored must come before lt TextFlow gt statements The VariableName statement is not specified for a variable All object statements must come before the first Text F low statement in a MIF file Processing opcode op_code FrameMaker is currently processing the specified opcode Skipped string The MIF file contains a syntax error 235 MIF Messages Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 236 This message Means String too long over 255 or 1023 characters overflow ignored The maximum length for most lt UserString gt strings is 1023 characters The maximum length for all other strings is 255 char acters Structured MIF statement ignored This FrameMaker is set to use the unstructured program inter face and so it does not support structured MIF statements Syntax error in lt MathFullForm gt statement The MIF file contains a syntax error ina Mat hFullFormstate ment Unable to start new object FrameMaker cannot allocate memory for a new object In UNIX versions try to free some swap space and restart FrameMaker In the Macintosh or Windows versions try quitting other applica tions and closing other open windows then
205. e graphic is imported FrameMaker displays the dpi infor mation in the Object Properties dialog box Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 112 MIF Document Statements QuickDraw PICT graphics on the Macintosh Macintosh versions of FrameMaker doesn t parse a QuickDraw PICT image Instead these FrameMaker treats the image as an opaque object that is rendered by the operating system After you import a QuickDraw PICT image however you can set an explicit dpi with the Properties command on the Graphics menu When you do so FrameMaker scales the image on the assumption that its original size was 72 dpi Normally QuickDraw PICT graphics are treated as vector graphics but you can use BitMapDpi to help optimize printed output Angle of imported graphics If an object contains both a lt FlipLR Yes gt statement and an Angle statement with a nonzero value the object is first flipped around the vertical axis and then rotated by the value specified in Angle Methods of importing graphics As mentioned previously an imported graphic can be imported by reference or copied into the document In Macintosh and Windows versions an imported graphic can be a subscriber or an embedded OLE object The following table shows how the structure of the Import Object statement differs depending on how the graphic is imported For an explanation of the facet syntax see Facet Formats for Graphics If the graphic is The ImportObject statement
206. e in any format your application understands and a graphic inset file can contain as many application specific facets as you want When selecting application specific facets for your graphic inset file you might want to include an industry standard facet for example EDIF for EDA applications so that you can use the graphic inset file to share data with applica tions other than FrameMaker Application specific facets can be contained entirely within the graphic inset file a local facet or the graphic inset file can contain a reference to an external data file or database a remote facet Local application specific facets A local application specific facet is contained in the graphic inset file The formats for external and internal graphic insets described in the sections External graphic insets on page 251 and Internal graphic insets on page 252 apply to local application specific facets 253 Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 254 Facet Formats for Graphics The following illustration shows the relationship between your application FrameMaker document and a graphic inset file with a local application specific facet Display and print facet Your graphic application Application specific facet FrameMaker document Graphic inset with a local application specific facet Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKE
207. e information on format change lists see Format change lists on page 154 Object format rules can t include this statement lt FmtChangeList gt The definition of an unnamed format change list For more information on format change lists see Format change lists on page 154 Object format rules can t include this statement lt ContextFormatRule gt The definition of a nested context format rule lt LevelFormatRule gt The definition of a nested level format rule lt ContextLabel labelstring gt lt ElementPrefix string gt The context label for generated files It cannot contain white space characters or any of these special characters Grin Sei Mh pags EER og oll P NS ps oe db When a user displays the Set Up dialog box to set up a generated file the label appears next to elements to which the If Elself or Else statement applies Only text and object format rules can include this statement A string that appears before the element Only prefix rules can include this statement lt ElementSuffix string gt A string that appears after the element Only suffix rules can include this statement Each If ElseIf and Else statement can include only one of the following formatting statements e FormatTag FmtChangeList FmtChangeListTag e ContextFormatRule e LevelFormatRule Format change lists A format change list specifies how a paragraph format change
208. e manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 110 MIF Document Statements ImportObject statement The Import Object statement describes an imported graphic It can appear at the top level or within a Page or Frame statement The imported graphic is either copied into the document or imported by reference e Ifthe imported graphic is copied into the document the data describing the graphic is recorded within the Impor tObject statement The description of a graphic in a given format is called a facet e FrameMaker uses facets to display graphics print graphics or store additional graphic information Imported graphics can have more than one facet which means that the graphic is described in more than one format e Ifthe graphic is imported by reference the data describing the graphic is not stored within the Import Object statement Instead a directory path to the file containing the graphic data is recorded in the Import Object statement Syntax lt ImportObject Generic object statements Information common to all objects see page 101 lt ImportObFile pathname gt Object s UNIX style pathname no longer used but written out by FrameMaker for backward compatibility lt ImportObFileDI pathname gt Object s device independent pathname see page 8 lt ImportHint string gt lt ShapeRect L T W H gt Record identifying the filter used for graphics imported by reference see Record of the filter used to im
209. e number Example MathFullForm statement 3 1415927 lt MathFullForm num 3 141592653589793 3 1415927 gt There are two special cases of the num expression Example MathFullForm statement Infinity lt MathFullForm num Infinity Infinity gt NaN lt MathFullForm num NaN NaN gt NaN means not a number These forms of num usually result from computations Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 182 MIF Equation Statements string string contains a character string Character strings must be enclosed in straight double quotation marks To include characters in the extended ASCII range above 0x127 use a backslash sequence see Character set in strings on page 7 To include a straight double quotation mark precede the quotation mark with a straight double quotation mark Example MathFullForm statement FrameMath lt MathFullForm string FrameMath gt using quotes lt MathFullForm string using quotes gt char char describes a character Example MathFullForm statement x lt MathFullForm char x gt The char expression can contain one of the letters a through z one of the letters A through Z a custom math element or one of the character names shown in the following table Example MathFullForm statement N lt MathFullForm char aleph gt a lt MathFullFo
210. e of each large operator with only one operand with char x as a sample operand Example MathFullForm statement Nx lt MathFullForm bigcap char x gt Ux lt MathFullForm bigcup char x gt f lt MathFullForm int char x gt x fe lt MathFullForm oint char x gt lt MathFullForm prod char x gt Il lt MathFullForm sum char x gt yx Expressions with range operands have multiple display formats that change how operands are positioned around the symbol Extended unions and intersections have two display formats The formats are the same for both expressions as an example the following table shows the two display formats for an intersection with three operands Example 3 Q1 2 MathFullForm statement lt MathFullForm bigcap num 1 0 1 num 2 0 2 num 3 0 3 gt Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 193 MIF Equation Statements Example MathFullForm statement n l lt MathFullForm 2 bigcap ili num 1 0 1 num 2 0 2 num 3 0 3 gt Sums products and integrals have three display formats The formats are the same for all of these operators as an example the following table shows the display formats for an integral with three operands Example MathFullForm statement b lt MathFullForm int char x char a char b gt i lt MathFullForm int ili char x char a char b gt b lt MathFull
211. e page frame u Manual line break to left boolean U integerU Underline O no underline 1 underline v Manual line break to right boolean VstringV Font variation for example Narrow W stringW Font weight for example Bold xmetricx Horizontal kern value Online manual 180 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 181 MIF Equation Statements Format code Meaning ymetricy Vertical kern value When expressions have multiple display formats there is one default format Additional formats are numbered For example the id expression has three display formats Example MathFullForm statement x lt MathFullForm id char x gt x lt MathFullForm id ili char x gt x lt MathFullForm id i2i char x gt Atomic expressions Atomic expressions are expressions that don t take other expressions as operands They usually act as operands in more complex expressions prompt prompt is a placeholder to show an expression s undefined operands Of the character formatting specifications only kerning values affect the appearance of a prompt Example MathFullForm statement 2 lt MathFullForm prompt gt num num describes a number It always has two operands the first shows the number as used for computations internal precision and the second shows the number as displayed When fewer digits are displayed than are used internally an ellipsis appears after th
212. e type of graphic inset that your application supports In most cases one format is adequate but you might want to give users more than one option Both types require a display and print facet External graphic insets An external graphic inset file remains independent of the FrameMaker document The FrameMaker document contains only a pathname for the graphic inset file Because the graphic inset data is not contained in the FrameMaker document users can access the graphic inset data from FrameMaker from your application or from another application To edit an external graphic inset from FrameMaker users must open FrameMaker document select the graphic inset and choose the Graphic Inset command from the Special menu FrameMaker passes the external graphic inset filename to your application and instructs your application to edit the graphic inset When users finish editing a graphic inset they issue your application s command for pasting a graphic inset to FrameMaker and FrameMaker immediately updates the graphic inset file If users edit the graphic inset from another application FrameMaker displays the updated graphic inset the next time the document is opened Note that if the graphic inset file is moved or deleted FrameMaker will be unable to display the data and will inform the user that the graphic inset is missing Your graphic External graphic inse application ile
213. eading a MIF paragraph that uses Mincho Palatino FrameMaker displays Asian characters in Mincho and Roman characters in Palatino If the Mincho font is not installed on the user s system FrameMaker displays the Asian text in a font that uses the same character encoding as Mincho CombinedFontCatalog statement Combined fonts are defined for the document in the CombinedFontCatalog statement For each combined font there is a CombinedFontDefn statement that specifies the combined font name and identifies the Asian and the Roman component fonts Note that the combined font catalog must precede the first PgfFont and Font statements in the document Syntax lt CombinedFontCatalog lt CombinedFontDefn Defines a single combined font lt CombinedFontName string gt The name of the combined font lt CombinedFontBaseFamily string gt The name of the Asian component font Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 200 MIF Asian Text Processing Statements lt CombinedFontWesternFamily string gt The name of the Roman component font lt CombinedFontWesternSize percent gt The size of the Roman component font expressed as a percentage of the base font size allowed values are 1 0 through 1000 0 lt CombinedFontWesternShift percent gt The baseline offset of the Roman font expressed as a percentage of the base font size where a positive value raises the Roman baseline above the Asian baseline allowed values ar
214. eatures that are unsupported by another application If you are writing an input filter for converting equations created with another application to FrameMaker equations you must provide a ShapeRect or MathOrigin substatement to specify the equation s location on the page The other Math substatements are not required If you don t provide them the MIF interpreter uses preset values If you don t define the equation in a Mat hFul1Form statement an equation prompt appears in the FrameMaker document MathFullForm statement The MathFullForm statement consists of a string containing a series of expressions that define the mathematical structure of an equation Each expression defines a component of the equation and can be nested within other expressions 178 Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 179 MIF Equation Statements A sample MathFullForm statement This example shows an equation and the MathFul1Form statement that defines it The diagram shows the hierarchy of the MathFul1lForm statement Symbols that appear in the equation are shown in parentheses following the athFullForm expression y a x b lt MathFullForm equal char y times char a power id plus char x char b num 2 2 gt end of MathFullForm equal char y times char a power id num 2 parentheses plus char x char b MathFullForm statement syntax In addition to the mathematical structure of
215. ect statement Side head layout information has been transferred from the Text Flow statement to the TextRect statement The following statements which appeared under the Text Flow statement in previous versions are replaced by corre sponding statements under the Text Rect statement in 5 00 MIF 4 00 MIF 5 00 lt TFSideheadWidth dimension gt lt TRSideheadWidth dimension gt lt TFSideheadGap dimension gt lt TRSideheadGap dimension gt lt TFSideheadPlacement keyword gt lt TRSideheadPlacement keyword gt If FrameMaker in version 5 finds the Text Flow MIF statements for side heads FrameMaker will convert these state ments to the equivalent statements under the Text Rect statement If these types of statements are found under both the Text Rect statement and the Text Flow statement the state ments under the Text Rect statement will be used Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 243 MIF Compatibility Note that the existence of side heads in a text flow is still specified by the TFSideheads statement which is under the TextFlow statement For more information about the MIF syntax for text frames see TextRect statement on page 118 For more infor mation about the MIF syntax for text flows see Text flows on page 119 Graphic frame statements In version 5 graphic frames can be anchored inside or outside text frames Graphic frames can also be aligned along the inside or outside edge of a text frame in
216. ed back to 0 degrees in the earlier version All other objects are rotated back to 0 degrees FrameMaker writes both BRect and ShapeRect values for backward compatibility For text lines text frames imported graphics table cells and equations that are rotated at an angle of 90 180 or 270 degrees the BRect value is the position and size of the object after rotation For any object rotated at any other angle the BRect value is the position and size of the object before rotation which is the same as the ShapeRect value Device independent pathnames The following codes for pathname components in a device independent pathname are obsolete and are ignored by the MIF interpreter Code Meaning A Apollo dependent pathname D DOS dependent pathname M Macintosh dependent pathname U UNIX dependent pathname For information about valid codes see Device independent pathnames on page 8 Document statements The following changes have been made to Document statements MIF 3 00 MIF 4 00 lt DCollateSeparations boolean gt lt DNoPrintSepColor gt and lt DPrintProcessColor gt Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 247 MIF Compatibility In addition the Document statement has a number of new property statements that set options for View Only documents see page 87 set options for structured documents and define custom math operators see page 174 Page statement The following change has
217. ed in one XRefFormats statement A document can have only one XRefFormats statement The xRefFormats statement contains one or more XRefFormat statements that define the cross reference formats A cross reference format consists of a name and a definition lt XRefFormats lt XRefFormat lt XRefName Page gt lt XRefDef page x11 lt pagenum gt gt gt end of XRefFormat gt end of XRefFormats The name can be any string allowed in a MIF file see Character set in strings on page 7 In this example a nonbreaking space x11 appears between the word page and the page number Each cross reference format must have a unique name names are case sensitive The cross reference definition contains text and cross reference building blocks See your user s manual or the online Help system for a list of building blocks Inserting the reference source marker To mark the location of the reference source insert a Marker statement at the beginning of the reference source The following example creates a cross reference to a heading lt Para lt PgfTag Heading gt lt ParaLine lt Marker lt MType 9 gt Identifies this as a cross reference lt MText 34126 Heading My Heading gt Cross reference source gt end of Marker lt String My Heading gt gt end of ParaLine gt end of Para The lt MType 9 gt statement identifies this as a cross reference marker it is required The MText statement contains th
218. ed in the XML declara tion when the XML file was opened lt DXmlFileEncoding string gt lt BXmlFileEncoding string gt The XML encoding that was found in the imported XML file lt DXm1Publicld string gt lt DXm1Publicld string gt The public identifier for the XML document type lt DXmlStandAlone int gt lt BXmIStandAlone int gt The XML standalone parameter that was specified in the XML declara tion when the XML file was opened determines whether or not the XML document requires a DTD lt DXmlStyleSheet string gt lt BXmlStyleSheet string gt The URI for the stylesheet associated with the imported XML docu ment lt DXm1UseBOM int gt lt BXm1lUseBOM int gt The Byte Order Mark that was specified in the imported XML docu ment lt DXm1WellFormed int gt lt BXm1WellFormed int gt Indicates whether the XML document was wellformed or not lt DXmlVersion string gt lt BXmlVersion string gt The XML version that was specified in the XML declaration when the XML file was opened Preference settings for structured documents Document statement In addition to document preferences for standard FrameMaker documents see Document statement on page 82 the MIF Document statement describes preferences for structured FrameMaker documents Online manual Syntax ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 165 MIF Statements for Structured Documents and Books lt Docum ent See page
219. ed in the XML declaration when the XML file was opened lt BXmlEncoding string gt The XML encoding parameter that was specified in the XML declara tion when the XML file was opened Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 138 MIF Book File Statements lt BXmlIStandAlone int gt The XML standalone parameter that was specified in the XML declara tion when the XML file was opened determines whether or not the XML document requires a DTD lt BXmlStyleSheet string gt The path or URI to the stylesheet that was specified for the XML file plus the type parameter specifying the type of stylesheet View only book statements In versions 6 0 and later a book can be View Only The following statements indicate whether the book is View Only and how to display the book window when it is View Only Syntax lt BViewOnly boolean gt Yes specifies View Only book locked lt BViewOnlyWinBorders boolean gt o suppresses display of scroll bars and border buttons in book win dow of View Only book lt BViewOnlyWinMenubar boolean gt o suppresses display of book window menu bar in View Only book Unix only lt BViewOnlyPopup boolean gt o suppresses display of book context menus in View Only book lt BViewOnlyNoOp Oxnnn gt Disables a command in a View Only document command is specified by hex function code see page 47 BDisplayText statement The BDisplayText statement defines the the type of text
220. ed statements are balanced For example XRef and XRefEnd statements must be paired e Make sure that right angle bracket gt and backslash characters in text are preceded by a backslash e Make sure that hexadecimal characters for example xe6 have a space after them Other application tools The Frame Developer s Kit FDK provides tools that you can use to write filters and to perform custom document processing The FDK includes the Application Program Interface API which you can use to create a C application that can create and save documents modify documents and interact with the user The FDK also includes the Frame Development Environment FDE which allows you to make your FDK clients portable to the platforms that FrameMaker supports MIF files can be used by C applications text processing utilities or UNIX shell scripts You might want to work directly with MIF files if you are filtering large numbers of files in batch mode You also might want to work with MIF files if you are doing simple document processing such as changing a few tag names or if you are setting options for View Only documents You can use the FDK and MIF files together for example a database publishing application can extract values from a database and write out the information as a table in a MIF file An FDK client can then automatically open the MIF file as a FrameMaker document Where to go from here This chapter has given you a start at wo
221. ee Specifying page layout on page 31 A page of type HiddenPage contains the document s hidden conditional text See How FrameMaker writes a conditional document on page 42 Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 101 MIF Document Statements A page s size and orientation landscape or portrait is determined by the PageAngle statement and the Document substatement DPageSize If DPageSize defines a portrait page one whose height is greater than its width pages with an angle of 0 or 180 degrees are portrait pages with an angle of 90 or 270 degrees are landscape If DPageSize defines a landscape page one whose width is greater than its height pages with an angle of 0 or 180 degrees are landscape pages with an angle of 90 or 270 degrees are portrait The filter statements are not generated by FrameMaker When it reads a MIF file generated by a filter the MIF inter preter uses these statements to set up columns and text flows on master pages Graphic objects and graphic frames In a FrameMaker document graphic objects can appear directly on a page or within a graphic frame The following objects are considered graphic objects e Anchored and unanchored frames e Text frames e Text lines e Objects created with the drawing tools on the Tools palette arcs arrows ellipses polygons polylines rectangles and rounded rectangles e Math equations e Groups e Imported graphic images such as xwd TIFF bitmap images or
222. ement For a description of a MIF statement use the table of contents or statement index to locate the statement For a description of the differences between the MIF statements for this version of FrameMaker and earlier versions see MIF Compatibility Style conventions This manual uses different fonts to represent different types of information e What you type is shown in text like this e MIF statement names pathnames and filenames are also shown in text like this e Placeholders such as MIF data are shown in text like this e For example the statement description for PgfTag is shown as lt PgfTag tagstring gt e You replace tagst ring with the tag of a paragraph format This manual also uses the term FrameMaker as in FrameMaker document or FrameMaker session to refer to FrameMaker and to refer to structured or unstructured documents Overview of MIF statements When you are learning about MIF statements you may find it useful to understand how FrameMaker represents documents How MIF statements represent documents FrameMaker represents document components as objects Different types of objects represent different components in a FrameMaker document For example a paragraph is considered an object a paragraph format is considered a formatting object The graphic objects that you create by using the Tools palette are yet another type of object Each object has properties that represent its characteris
223. ementRules Begin start element rules any combination of level and context format rules lt LevelFormatRule gt A level format rule see LevelFormatRule statement on page 152 lt ContextFormatRule gt A context format rule see ContextFormatRule statement on page 151 Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 151 MIF Statements for Structured Documents and Books lt ContextFormatRule gt Additional context format rule statements as needed lt LevelFormatRule gt Additional level format rule statements as needed gt Endof EDStartElementRules statement EDEndElementRules statement The EDEndElement Rules statement defines a special set of format rules to be applied to the last paragraph in a parent element The EDEndElementRules statement must appear in an ElementDef statement It is valid only for container elements An EDEndElementRules statement can contain zero or more substatements describing level and context format rules Syntax lt EDEndElementRules Begin end element rules any combination of level and context format rules lt LevelFormatRule gt A level format rule see LevelFormatRule statement on page 152 lt ContextFormatRule gt A context format rule see ContextFormatRule statement on page 151 lt ContextFormatRule gt Additional context format rule statements as needed lt LevelFormatRule gt Additional level for
224. ements are used to format the ele ment lt Formatting statement gt A statement suchasa FormatTag or FmtChangeListTag state ment that specifies how to change the formatting when the Level state ment applies see Formatting statements next for a list of formatting state ments gt End of If statement lt Elself Begin Elself clause lt Level levelstring gt lt Formatting statement gt Additional formatting statements as needed Endof ElseIf statement lt Else An optional Else clause lt Formatting statement gt Additional formatting statements as needed gt Endof Else statement Online manual Formatting statements ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 154 MIF Statements for Structured Documents and Books If ElseIf and Else statements can use the following statements to specify an element s formatting lt IsTextRange boolean gt Yes if the element is formatted as a text range instead of as a paragraph Only text format rules can include this statement lt FormatTag tagstring gt The format tag If IsTextRange specifies Yes tagstring specifies a character format tag otherwise it specifies a paragraph tag table tag marker type cross reference format or equation size Only text and object format rules can include this statement lt FmtChangeListTag tagstring gt The tag of a named format change list a format change list in the format change list catalog For mor
225. en 65 0041 blue 51 0033 Note See Definition op codes on page 269 for more information on color definitions PANTONE color definition 0x05 Specification by data type String string Description of data Name of color tag string PANTONE name or number string Size of data in bytes Variable End of the vector graphic OxFF Example 05 0000001A 00 OB 53 61 67 65 20 47 72 65 65 6E 00 00 04 35 37 30 00 for a color named Sage Green with the PANTONE number 570 Note See Definition op codes on page 269 for more information on color definitions Specification by data type N A Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 FrameVector Facet Format Description of data None Size of data in bytes 0 Example FF 00000000 Note This must be the last op code for a FrameVector graphic Specifications of style op codes This section describes each style op code Op codes are listed by number and description The op code number is shown in parentheses Note that these styles remain in place until another style op code resets the style Dashed line style 0x06 Specification by data type Short metric metric Description of data Number of dash segments short Size of data in bytes Length of dash segments in points metric metric Variable Default value None solid Example 06 000
226. ent lt BegParentheses LITE gt lt EndParentheses II Hua gt For more information on the CharClass statement see CharClass statement on page 205 The four statements that define the tables of rules that apply to the characters of each class are SqueezeTable SpreadTable LineBreakTable and Ext raSpaceTable Each of these statements specify the actions FrameMaker takes for the characters in each of the 25 classes For example the LineBreakTable statement specifies whether a line break can occur between a character of one class and a character of another class Here is an example of a LineBreakTable statement that specifies when a line break can occur between a character in the BegParentheses class and a character in each of the 25 classes lt BegParentheses L111111111111111111311111 gt Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 203 MIF Asian Text Processing Statements The 25 numerical values for the BegParentheses statement specify the actions FrameMaker takes when a character from each of the 25 classes such as an ending parenthesis character follows a character in the BegParen theses class The position of each numerical value after the BegParentheses statement specifies the class For example the first position is the BegParentheses Class the EndParentheses class is the second position and so on If a numerical value of 0 is specified FrameMaker allows a line break between a character the BegParentheses class and a ch
227. ent This type of information transfer is often called database publishing For example you can write a C program or a database script to retrieve information from a database and store that information as a MIF file A user can then open or import the MIF file to get a fully formatted FrameMaker document that contains up to date infor mation from the database There are four key elements to a typical database publishing solution e The database provides a system to enter manipulate select and sort data You can use any database that can create text based output files e MIF provides the data interchange format between the database and FrameMaker MIF can completely describe a document in ASCII format including information such as text and graphics page layout and indexes and cross references e FrameMaker provides the text formatting FrameMaker reads MIF files and dynamically manages line breaks page breaks headers and footers and graphics The user can view print save or even navigate through an online document using hypertext commands Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 50 Using MIF Statements e Optional control programs allow you to tightly integrate the database and FrameMaker Some database publishing applications are controlled entirely from the database system or through hypertext commands embedded in a FrameMaker document More complicated applications may require an external control program such as a C program that
228. ent you can easily copy and paste the custom style into another document by pressing Shift and choosing Pick Up Object Properties from the Graphics menu For more information see your user s manual Table examples You can use MIF to create a table or to update a few values in an existing table Creating an entire table This example shows a table and the MIF file that describes it This table is in the sample file stocktb1 mif The widths of columns is calculated using MIF statements that are only for input filters Rather than specifying an exact width for each column the table uses the substatement Tb1ColumnwWidtha for two of the columns to specify that the column width is determined by the width of a particular cell Column widths are further affected by the EqualizeWidths statement which sets the columns to the width of the widest column within the limits specified by the Tb1column substatements As you examine this example note how the column width statements interact the column widths are originally set by the applied table format from the Table Catalog The TolFormat statement then specifies how this table instance s column properties override those in the default format The EqualizeWidths statement further overrides the format established by To1Format Table 2 StockWatch Mining and Metal 10 31 90 Weekly Close Change Ace Aluminum 24 00 3 50 Streck Metals 27 25 2 75 Linbrech Alloys 63 75 2 50
229. ent info entries and how to handle named destinations when you save the book as PDF BookComponent Provides the setup information for each file in the book Color Catalog The color definitionss of each document in the book Condition Catalog Defines the condition tags of each document in the book Combined Font Catalog Defines the combined fonts of each document in the book FontCatalog Defines the character formats of each document in the book The FontCatalog statement contains a series of Font statements that define the tags that appear in the Character Catalog of generated files PgfCatalog Defines the paragraph formats of each document in the book The PgfCatalog statement contains a series of Pgf statements that define the tags that appear in the Include and Don t Include scroll lists of the setup dialog boxes for generated files BookXRef Names and defines the book s internal cross references The Book XRef statement contains cross reference definitions in XRe fDe f statements cross reference text in XRef SrcText statements and the source filename in XRefSrcFile state ments BookUpdateReferences Specifies whether or not cross references and text insets are automatically updated when the book file is opened Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 136 MIF Book File Statements MIF book file identification line The MIF book file identification line must be the first l
230. ents A View Only document is a locked FrameMaker hypertext document that a user can open read and print but not edit You can use MIF statements to control the appearance and behavior of the document window and to control the behavior of cross references in locked documents The MIF statements for View Only documents are intended for hypertext authors who want more control over hypertext documents They do not have corresponding commands in the user interface The View Only MIF statements described in this section must appear in a Document statement These statements have no effect in an unlocked document Make sure that the Document statement also includes the following substatement lt DViewOnly Yes gt Changing the document window You can use MIF statements to change the appearance and behavior of the document window in the following ways e To suppress the document window menu bar use the following statement lt DViewOnlyWinMenubar No gt This statement has no effect in the Macintosh and Windows version of FrameMaker because those versions have an application menu bar rather than a document window menu bar e To suppress the display of scroll bars and border buttons in the document window use the following statement lt DViewOnlyWinBorders No gt e To suppress selection in the document window include the following statement Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 46 Using MIF Statements lt DViewOnlySelect No gt You ca
231. er contains the actual string lt PgfEndCond boolean gt Used only for hidden conditional text Yes indicates this is the last para graph in the current block of conditional text in the HIDDEN text flow see page 42 lt PgfCondFullPgf boolean gt Used only for hidden conditional text Yes indicates paragraph contains end of current block of hidden text and current block ends with a para graph symbol lt ParaLine gt See ParaLine statement next End of Para statement Usage By default a paragraph uses the current Pgf settings the same settings as its predecessor Optional PgfTag and Pgf statements reset the current format If there is a PgfTag statement the MIF interpreter searches the document s Paragraph Catalog for a Pgf definition with the same tag If the tag exists then the Paragraph Catalog s Pgf definition is used If no definition is found in the catalog the Pgf definition of the previous paragraph is used however its tag string is reset to the tag in the PgfTag statement ParaLine statement The ParaLine statement defines a line within a paragraph It must appear in a Para statement Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 122 MIF Document Statements Syntax lt ParaLine lt ElementBegin gt See MIF Statements for Structured Documents and Books lt TextRectID ID gt Where the following t
232. eral different types of text insets The type of the text inset is identified and described by a substatement e Text created and maintained by an FDK client is described by the TiApiclient substatement For information on the statement see the section TiApiClient statement on page 130 e A text flow imported from another FrameMaker document or from a document filtered by FrameMaker is described by the TiF low substatement For information on the statement see the section TiFlow statement on page 131 e Plain text imported by reference is described by the TiText substatement For information on the statement see the section TiText statement on page 132 e Text imported into a tabular format is described by the Ti Text Table substatement For information on the statement see the section TiTextTable statement on page 132 Usage of some of the aspects of the Text Inset statement is described in the following sections Text insets created with Publish and Subscribe Macintosh versions of FrameMaker support text and graphics Publish and Subscribe which allows applications to share information dynamically between FrameMaker documents You make text and graphics information available by creating a publisher This creates a separate file called an edition on disk You can place a copy of the edition called a subscriber in a document even if the edition is on another disk or on another Macintosh on a network In MIE
233. erences An active cross reference behaves like a hypertext gotolink command when the user clicks on a cross reference FrameMaker displays the link s destination page By default the destination page is shown in the same document window as the link s source You can use MIF statements to turn off active cross references and to change the type of hypertext link that the cross reference emulates By default cross references emulate the gotol ink behavior e To make cross references emulate the openl ink command which displays the destination page in a new document window use the following statement lt DViewOnlyXRef OpenBehavior gt Use this setting to allow users to see both the source page and the destination page e To turn off active cross references use the following statement lt DViewOnlyXRef NotActive gt Use this setting to emulate the behavior in earlier FrameMaker versions You can use the DViewOnlySelect statement to control whether active cross references highlight the marker associated with destination text e When cross references are active and lt DViewOnlySelect Yes gt is specified clicking a cross reference in the document highlights the marker associated with the destination text e When cross references are active and lt DViewOnlySelect UserOn1ly gt is specified clicking a cross reference does not highlight the marker However the user can select text in the locked document e When cross references a
234. eries of Page statements that each contain the text and graphics located on that page When you are importing a document you do not know where page breaks will fall so you cannot break the document into a series of Page statements Instead you simply create one text flow for the entire document and link it to a single empty body page When the MIF inter preter reads the file it creates as many pages as the document requires and gives each page the background specified by the master page Creating a double sided custom layout If you import a two sided document you might need to specify different page layouts for right and left pages For example a document might have a wider inside margin to allow extra room for binding You can do this in a MIF file by creating and linking a second master page and a second body page As with a single sided layout all the document s text is in one text flow When the MIF interpreter reads the file it adds alternate left and right body pages to the document You can control whether the document starts with a right page or a left page by using the DParity statement For an example of a document with left and right master pages see the sample file dblpage mif Creating a first master page In addition to left and right master pages you can create custom master page layouts that you can apply to body pages For example some books have a special layout for the first page in a chapter Ina MIF file you c
235. ers for Japanese oyamoji that is wider than the rubi text keywordcan be Wide Narrow Proportional lt DNarrowRubiSpaceForJapanese keyword gt Determines how to space rubi characters for Japanese oyamoji that is narrower than the rubi text keywordcan be Wide Narrow Proportional lt DWideRubiSpaceForOther keyword gt Determines how to space rubi characters for non Japanese oyamoji that is wider than the rubi text keywordcan be Wide Narrow Proportional lt DNarrowRubiSpaceForOther keyword gt Determines how to space rubi characters for non Japanese oyamoji that is narrower than the rubi text keywordcan be Wide Narrow Proportional gt End of the Document statement Example lt Document lt DRubiSize 50 gt lt DRubiOverhang Yes gt lt DRubiAlignAtBounds Yes gt lt DWideSpaceForJapanese Proportional gt lt DNarrowSpaceForJapanese Proportional gt lt DWideSpaceForOther Narrow gt lt DNarrowSpaceForOther Narrow gt Online manual gt end of Document RubiCompositeBegin statement ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 MIF Asian Text Processing Statements The RubiCompositeBegin statement is always matched with a RubiCompositeEnd statement Between them are the contents of the rubi composite the oyamoji and the rubi text A rubi composite can occur anywhere in a Paraline statement Also anything that can occur within a Paraline except another rubi composite can also occur between
236. erscript FNBaseline FNSubscript lt DFNoteNumberPos keyword gt Placement of number in document footnote keywordcan be one of FNSuperscript FNBaseline FNSubscript lt DFNoteAnchorPrefix string gt Prefix before document footnote number in text lt DFNoteAnchorSuffix string gt Suffix after document footnote number in text lt DFNoteNumberPrefix string gt Prefix before number in document footnote lt DFNoteNumberSuffix string gt Suffix after number in document footnote Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 86 MIF Document Statements Table footnote properties lt DTb1FNoteTag string gt lt DTb1IFNoteLabels string gt Same meaning for the following statements as the corre sponding document footnote properties lt DTb1FNoteNumStyle keyword gt lt DTb1FNoteAnchorPos keyword gt lt DTb1FNoteNumberPos keyword gt lt DTb1FNoteAnchorPrefix string gt lt DTb1FNoteAnchorSuffix string gt lt DTb1FNoteNumberPrefix string gt lt DTb1FNoteNumberSuffix string gt Change bar properties lt DChBarGap dimension gt Change bar distance from column lt DChBarWidth dimension gt Thickness of change bar lt DChBarPosition keyword gt Position of change bar keywordcan be one of LeftOfCcol RightOfCol NearestEdge FurthestEdge lt DChBarColor tagstring gt Change bar color see ColorCatalog statement on page
237. erty value is changed by a subsequent MIF statement To change a paragraph property to another state supply a Pgf statement containing the paragraph property statement set to the new state Thus in the previous example you could change the font from Bold to Regular in a Pgf statement in the second Para statement lt Para lt Pef lt PgfFont lt FWeight Regular gt gt end of PgfFont gt end of Pgf lt ParaLine lt String Second paragraph in document gt Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 21 Using MIF Statements gt end of ParaLine gt end of Para To summarize paragraphs inherit formats as follows e Formats in the Paragraph Catalog inherit properties from the formats above them e Locally defined paragraph formats inherit properties from previously specified formats e Text lines in anchored frames inherit font properties from previously specified formats including the last format in the Paragraph Catalog and previous text lines Tips The following hints may help you minimize the MIF statements for paragraph formats e If possible use the formats in the default Paragraph Catalog don t supply a PgfCatalog statement If you know the names of the default paragraph formats you can tag paragraphs with the PgfTag statement e Ifyou know that a document will use a particular template when it is imported into a FrameMaker document you can just tag the paragraphs in the text flow Don t create a n
238. es of using character formats Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 23 Using MIF Statements Creating and formatting tables You can create tables in FrameMaker documents edit them and apply table formats to them Tables can have heading rows body rows and footing rows Each row consists of table cells that contain the actual contents of the table Table 1 Coffee Inventory Title Coffee Bags Status Price per bag 4 Heading row Brazil Santos 50 Prompt 455 00 Celebes Kalossi 29 In Stock 924 00 Body rows Colombian 25 In Stock 474 35 1 853 35 Footing row Tables are like paragraphs in that they have a format A table format controls the appearance of a table including the number and width of columns the types of ruling or shading in rows and columns and the table s position in a text column Table formats can be named stored in a Table Catalog and applied to many tables A table format can also be defined locally In a FrameMaker document tables appear where they have been placed in the text flow A table behaves like an anchored frame so a table flows with the surrounding text unless you give it a specific location In a MIF file the document s tables are collected in one place and a placeholder for each table indicates the table s position in the text flow You create a table in a MIF file as follows e Specify the contents of the table by using a Tb1 s
239. eter automatically wraps lines when it reads the MIF file Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 13 Using MIF Statements Some characters must be represented by backslash sequences in a MIF string For more information see Character set in strings on page 7 Creating a paragraph format Within a FrameMaker document you define a paragraph format by using the Paragraph Designer to specify the paragraph s properties In a MIF file you define a paragraph format by using the pgf statement The Pgf statement contains a group of substatements that describe all of a paragraph s properties It has the following syntax lt Pgf lt property value gt lt property value gt gt A Pgf statement is quite long so learning how to relate its substatements to the paragraph s properties may take some practice Usually a MIF statement name is similar to the name of the setting within a dialog box The following examples show the property dialog boxes from the Paragraph Designer with the related Pg substatements Suppose you have created a paragraph format for a numbered list item with Basic properties defined as follows in the Paragraph Designer Paragraph Tag indents moored TE reat above f Tab Stops New Tab Stop Properties Basic Apply To Selection Update All Formats Tagged Numbered Commands 0 0 pt l 0 25 L Below 4j bon IE Line Spacing Alignment fi 4 0 pt Q Next 4
240. evelFormatRule statement also contains an If statement zero or more ElseIf statements and an optional Else statement The If ElseIf and Else statements define the formatting applied to the element at specified levels of nesting within the ancestor elements specified by the CountElements statement The LevelFormatRule statement must appear in a format rules statement such as an EDTextFormatRules or EDEndElementRules statement Syntax lt LevelFormatRule Begin level format rule lt CountElements Optional list of elements to count among the element s ancestors lt CountElement tagstring gt Tag of element to count lt CountElement tagstring gt Additional statements as needed gt Endof CountElements statement lt StopCountingAt tagstring gt Optional tag of element at which to stop counting 40 fi An If clause see If Elself and Else statements on page 152 lt Elself gt An optional Elself clause see If Elself and Else statements on page 152 lt ElseIf gt Additional statements as needed lt Else gt An optional Else clause see If Elself and Else statements on page 152 End of LevelFormatRule If Elself and Else statements If Elself and Else statements specify clauses within ContextFormatRule and LevelFormatRule statements In a ContextFormatRule statement they specify a context and one or more statements that define how to change for
241. ew Paragraph Catalog in MIF it s easier to create catalogs in FrameMaker document templates e If you need to provide a full Paragraph Catalog in a MIF file you can still use FrameMaker to ease the task of creating a catalog Create a template in FrameMaker save the template as a MIF file and include the Paragraph Catalog in your document For instructions see Including template files on page 43 Creating and applying character formats You can define character formats locally or store them in the Character Catalog and apply the formats to text selec tions Creating and applying character formats is very similar to creating and applying paragraph formats as described in the previous section Because the two methods are similar this section just summarizes how to create and apply character formats Ina MIF file the Character Catalog is contained in a Font Catalog statement The Font Catalog statement contains named character formats in a list of Font statements A FontCatalog statement looks like this lt FontCatalog lt Font gt Describes a character format lt Font gt Describes a character format gt end of FontCatalog A Font statement specifies the properties of a character format these are the same properties specified in the Character Designer The Font statement is just like the PgfFont statement that you use to define the default font in a paragraph format See PgfFont and Font statements on page 63 for a
242. ext column or a text frame the anchored frame can be positioned in one of the following ways If the graphic frame is anchored outside a text column or text The Frame statement contains frame On the left side of the text column or text frame lt FrameType Left gt On the right side of the text column or text frame lt FrameType Right gt Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 109 MIF Document Statements If the graphic frame is anchored outside a text column or text The Frame statement contains frame On the side of the text column or text frame closer to the binding of lt FrameType Inside gt the book the inside edge On the side of the text column or text frame farther from the binding lt FrameType Outside gt of the book the outside edge On the side of the text column or text frame closer to any page edge lt FrameType Near gt On the side of the text column or text frame farther from any page lt FrameType Far gt edge Alignment of anchored frames If a graphic frame is anchored within a text column or text frame the AnchorAlign statement specifies the alignment of the anchored frame Unless anchored at the insertion point of the cursor the graphic frame can be aligned in one of the following ways If the graphic frame is aligned The Frame statement contains With the left side of the text column or text frame lt AnchorAlign Left gt In the center of the text column or text
243. ext goes lt SpclHyphenation boolean gt Hyphenation of a word at the end of a line causes the word to be spelled differently as with German hyphenation lt Font gt Embedded character change for the following text see page 63 lt Conditional gt Turns on conditional text see page 57 lt Unconditional gt Returns to unconditional state lt String string gt Printable ASCII text in single quotation marks required lt Char gt An extended ASCII character code or special character name see page 123 lt ATb1l ID gt ID of embedded table lt AFrame ID gt ID of embedded anchored frame lt FNote ID gt ID of embedded footnote lt Marker gt Embedded marker see page 123 lt Variable Embedded variable lt VariableName string gt Variable name see page 80 lt VariableLocked boolean gt Yes means the variable is part of a text inset that obtains its format ting information from the source document gt End of Variable statement lt XRef gt Embedded cross reference see page 81 lt xXRefEnd gt lt ElementEnd gt See MIF Statements for Structured Documents and Books gt End of ParaLine statement Usage A typical ParaLine statement consists of one or more St ring Char ATbl AFrame FNote Variable XRef and Marker statements that define the contents of the line of text These statements are interspersed with statements that indicate the scope of document components such as structure elements and con
244. ext insets are defined by the Text Inset statement A Text Inset statement appears in the ParaLine statement representing the location of the text being imported When text is imported by reference the resulting text inset can be formatted either as regular text or as a table The source file from which the text is imported can be a FrameMaker document or any other kind of text file The source file can also be a file that is created maintained and updated by an FDK client a program created with the Frame Developer s Kit On Macintosh platforms the source file can also be a published edition In this case text can be imported by reference by subscribing to the edition Textinset statement The Text Inset statement defines text that has been imported by reference A Text Inset statement appears in a ParaLine statement Syntax lt TextInset lt Unique num gt Unique ID number assigned by FrameMaker lt TiName string gt Specifies a name for the text inset that may be assigned by an FDK client or by this statement in a MIF file FrameMaker does not auto matically assign a name for the text inset A TiSrcFile pathname gt Specifies the source file with a device independent filename for pathname syntax see page 8 lt TiAutoUpdate boolean gt Yes specifies that the text inset is updated automatically when the source file changes lt TiLastUpdate seconds microseconds gt Specifies the
245. extFormatRules EDObjectFormatRules EDPrefixRules Online manual 148 EDSuffixRules e EDStartElementRules EDEndElementRules EDTextFormatRules statement ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 MIF Statements for Structured Documents and Books The EDTextFormatRules statement defines the formatting properties to be applied to a container table table child or footnote element in different contexts It must appear in an ElementDef statement An EDTextFormatRules statement can contain zero or more substatements describing level and context format rules Syntax lt EDTextFormatRules Any combination of level and context format rules lt LevelFormatRule gt A level format rule see LevelFormatRule statement on page 152 lt ContextFormatRule gt A context format rule see ContextFormatRule statement on page 151 lt ContextFormatRule gt Additional context format rule statements as needed lt LevelFormatRule gt Additional level format rule statements as needed Endof EDTextFormatRules statement EDObjectFormatRules statement The EDObjectFormatRules statement defines the formatting properties to be applied to a table cross reference system variable marker graphic or equation element in different contexts It must appear in an ElementDef statement An EDObjectFormatRules statement can contain a single level format rule or a single context format rule
246. f description of each op code and the number of the page where each op code is described The definitions of many of these op codes are similar to corresponding MIF statements Definition op codes Op code Description of op code Location 0x01 Version number page 271 0x02 Bounding rectangle page 271 0x03 CMYK color definition page 272 0x04 RGB color definition page 272 0x05 Pantone color definition page 272 OxFF End of the vector graphics page 272 Note that the colors defined in a FrameVector graphic can be used only within the FrameVector graphic These colors cannot be used for other purposes in the document If the definition of a color in the FrameVector graphic does not match the definition in the color catalog of the document FrameMaker uses the definition in the color catalog when displaying the graphic Style op codes Op code Description of op code Location 0x06 Dashed line style page 273 0x07 Arrow style page 273 0x20 Rotation angle page 274 0x21 Pen pattern page 274 0x22 Fill pattern page 274 0x23 Line width page 274 0x24 Color page 275 0x25 Overprint page 275 0x26 Dashed solid line page 275 0x27 Head cap style page 275 0x28 Tail cap style page 276 0x29 Smoothed page 276 Ox2A Font name page 276 0x2B Font size page 276 Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 270 FrameVector Facet Format
247. fies the number of columns that the cell crosses The contents of the straddle cell appear in the first of the straddle columns the subsequent Ce11 state ments for the row must appear even if they are empty lt Row lt Cell lt CellColumns 2 gt Number of straddle columns lt CellContent Content is in the first cell lt Para lt PgfTag CellHeading gt lt ParaLine lt String Brazilian Coffee gt gt gt end of Para gt end of CellContent gt end of Cell lt Cell Second cell appears even though lt CellContent it is empty lt Para lt PgfTag CellHeading gt lt ParaLine gt gt end of Para gt end of CellContent gt end of Cell gt end of Row If the cell straddles rows the substatement is CellRows Creating a table format A table format includes the following properties e The properties specified by the Table Designer e These include the row and column ruling and shading styles the position of text within cell margins the table s placement within the text column and the table title position e The number and widths of columns e The paragraph format of the first paragraph in the title if there is one e The paragraph format of the topmost paragraph in the heading body and footing cell of each column Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 28 Using MIF Statements For example you could change the format of the previous table to include shaded rows and a different ruling sty
248. file can be edited with an Asian enabled text editor on the platform on which the MIF was written If the text in a MIF file is in more than one Asian language then only the language of the MIF encoding statement will be directly readable in a text editor All other non 7 bit ASCII text will be backslashed escaped using the MIF backslash x convention MIFEncoding statement for Japanese FrameMaker recognizes two encoding schemes for Japanese Shift JIS and EUC The Macintosh and Windows versions of FrameMaker write Shift JIS for Japanese text and the UNIX versions of FrameMaker write out EUC The MIF can converted between Shift JIS and EUC using a Japanese text conversion utility The MIF encoding statement is converted along with the text in the MIF file To determine which encoding was used each MIF file that contains Japanese text must include a MIFEncoding statement near the beginning of the file It must appear before any Japanese text in the file The string value in the MIFEncoding statement is the Japanese spelling of the word Nihongo which means Japanese FrameMaker reads this fixed string and determines what the encoding is for it From that FrameMaker expects the same encoding to be used for all subsequent 8 bit text in the document To see the characters spelling the word Nihongo you must view the MIF file on a system that is enabled for Japanese character display When the MIF is displayed on a Roman system the characters appear
249. file for the text inset lt TiClientType string gt Specifies the type of the source file lt TiClientData string gt Specifies additional data that can be used by an FDK client for example SQL query information gt End of TiApiClient statement Usage When updating text insets the FDK client can use the TiclientName substatement to determine if it should update a given text inset If the FDK client requires additional information the client can store the information in the TiclientData substatement For example if the FDK client queries a database for text the SQL query can be stored in the Ticli entData substatement Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 131 MIF Document Statements TiFlow statement The TiFlow statement defines a text flow that is imported by reference from a FrameMaker document or a MIF file The statement also defines imported text from other formatted documents that FrameMaker can filter for example a Microsoft Word document Syntax lt TiFlow lt TiFormatting keyword gt Specifies which document formats are used for the text inset keywordcan be one of TiSource TiEnclosing TiPlainText lt TiMainFlow boolean gt Yes specifies that the text inset is imported from the main flow of the source document No specifies that the text inset is imported from a different flow lt TiPageSpace keyword gt If the text inset is not imported from the main flow specifies whether the text inset is impo
250. fo dialog box For any document there can be an arbitrary number of XMP state ments gt End of DocFilelnfo statement Document specific menu bars lt DMenuBar string gt Name of the menu bar displayed by an FDK client when the document is opened if an empty string is specified or if the menu bar is not found the standard FrameMaker menu bar is used lt DVoMenuBar string gt Name of the menu bar displayed by an FDK client when the document Math properties is opened in View Only mode if an empty string is specified or if the menu bar is not found the standard view only menu bar is used For more information see MIF Equation Statements Structure properties For more information see MIF Statements for Structured Documents and Books Miscellaneous properties lt DMagicMarker integer gt Type number of the marker used to represent a delete mark lt DMagicMarker integer gt Type number of the marker used to represent a delete mark BookComponent statement BookComponent statements contain the setup information for files that are generated from the document for example a table of contents or an index BookComponent statements must appear at the top level in the order given in MIF file layout on page 52 These statements are used even if the document does not occur as part of a book A BookComponent statement can contain one or more DeriveTag statements Syntax
251. footer Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 36 Using MIF Statements For an example of a MIF file with a footer see the sample file footers mif Note that the footer text flow contains a variable you can place variables only in untagged text flows on a master page not in tagged flows Creating markers A FrameMaker document can contain markers that hold hidden text and mark locations For example you use markers to add index entries cross references and hypertext commands to a document FrameMaker provides both predefined marker types and markers that you can define as needed For more information about markers and marker types see page 124 Within a FrameMaker document you insert a marker by choosing the Marker command from the Special menu In a MIF file you insert a marker by using a Marker statement The Marker statement specifies the marker type and the marker text The following example inserts an index marker lt Para lt ParaLine lt Marker lt MType 2 gt Index marker lt MText Hello world gt Index entry gt end of Marker lt String Hello world gt gt end of ParaLine gt end of Para The Text statement contains the complete index entry When FrameMaker writes a Marker statement the statement includes an McurrPage substatement with the page number on which the marker appears You do not need to provide an McurrPage statement when you generate a MIF file this statement is ignored when the M
252. for an ellipse with the following specifications x position 306 points 0132 y position 36 points 0024 width 126 points 007E height 126 points 007E Specification by data type Rectangle Description of data Position and size of ellipse in points Size of data in bytes 16 Example 80 00000010 01320000 00240000 007E0000 007E0000 Polygon 0x81 Specification by data type Long point point Description of data Number of points long Position of each point in points point point Size of data in bytes Variable Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 FrameVector Facet Format Example 81 00000010 00000003 01320000 002E0000 01100000 007E0000 01680000 007D0000 for a polygon with the following specifications number of points 3 x position of point 1 306 points 0132 y position of point 1 46 points 002E x position of point 2 272 points 0110 y position of point 2 126 points 007E x position of point 3 360 points 0168 y position of point 3 125 points 007D Note When smoothed style is on this object is a closed Bezier curve Polyline 0x82 Specification by data type Long point point Description of data Number of points long Size of data in bytes Position of each point in points point point Variable Example 82 0000000C 00000002 00120000 00360000 00FC0000 003F000
253. frame lt AnchorAlign Center gt With the right side of the text column or text frame lt AnchorAlign Right gt With the side of the text column or text frame closer tothe binding lt AnchorAlign Inside gt of the book the inside edge With the side of the text column or text frame farther from the lt AnchorAlign Outside gt binding of the book the outside edge Group statement The Group statement defines a group of graphic objects and allows objects to be nested The Group statement must appear after all the objects that form the group It can appear at the top level or within a Page or Frame statement Syntax lt Group lt ID ID gt Group ID lt Unique ID gt ID persistent across sessions assigned when FrameMaker generates a MIF file used by the FDK client and should not be used by filters lt Angle gt Rotation angle of group see page 101 gt End of Group statement Usage When the MIF interpreter encounters a Group statement it searches all objects within the current graphic frame for those group IDs that match the ID of the Group statement These objects are then collected to form the group All objects with the same group ID must be listed in the MIF file before their associated Group statement is listed If multiple Group statements have the same ID the results will be unpredictable For more information about the group ID see Generic object statements on page 101 Onlin
254. ge 103 Size of data in bytes 1 Default value 0 solid Example 21 00000001 00 for a solid pen pattern Fill pattern 0x22 Specification by data type Byte Description of data Index to pen patterns see Values for Pen and Fill statements on page 103 Size of data in bytes 1 Default value 7 white Example 22 00000001 07 for a white fill pattern Line width 0x23 Specification by data type Metric Description of data Width of line in points Size of data in bytes 4 274 Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 FrameVector Facet Format Default value 1 point Example 23 00000004 00008000 for the line width of 0 5 point Color 0x24 Specification by data type String Description of data Size of data in bytes Name of color tag Variable Default value Black Example 24 00000006 00 06 42 6C 61 63 6B 00 for the color Black Overprint 0x25 Specification by data type Description of data Byte Is the object overprinted 0 no 1 yes Size of data in bytes 1 Default value 0 no Example 25 00000001 00 if not overprinted 25 00000001 01 if overprinted Dashed solid line 0x26 Specification by data type Byte Description of data Size of data in bytes Is the line dashed 0
255. gt See EDPrefixRules statement on page 149 lt EDSuffixRules gt See EDSuffixRules statement on page 150 lt EDStartElementRules gt See EDStartElementRules statement on page 150 lt EDEndElementRules gt See EDEndElementRules statement on page 151 lt EDComments string gt Comments for the element definition Endof ElementDef statement Usage The element name can contain any characters from the FrameMaker character set except the following amp lt gt JHls Content rules The content rule for a container element consists of the following statements e A required lt EDObject EDContainer gt statement specifies the element type e A required EDGeneralRule statement specifies what the element can contain and in what order the element s contents can appear e An optional EDExclusions statement specifies elements that cannot appear in the defined element or in its descendents Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 147 MIF Statements for Structured Documents and Books e An optional EDInclusions statement specifies elements that can appear anywhere in the defined element or in its descendents The general rule specification must follow the conventions for data in a MIF string If a general rule contains angle brackets lt gt the right angle bracket must be preceded by a backslash in the MIF string For example an element that
256. gt gt gt Endof ElementContext statement gt Endof DBookElementHierarchy statement lt DFCLMaximums Upper change list limits Format change lists cannot increment properties beyond these values lt PgfFIndent dimension gt Maximum first indent allowed in document lt PgfLIndent dimension gt lt PgfRIndent dimension gt Maximum left indent allowed in document Maximum right indent allowed in document lt PgfSpBefore dimension gt Maximum space before allowed in document lt PgfSpAfter dimension gt Maximum space after allowed in document lt PgfLeading dimension gt Maximum leading allowed in document lt FSize dimension gt Maximum font size allowed in document lt FDW dimension gt Maximum character spread allowed in document lt TSX dimension gt Maximum horizontal position of tab stop lt PgfCellLMargin dimension gt Maximum left cell margin for first paragraph in a cell lt PgfCellBMargin dimension gt Maximum bottom cell margin for first paragraph in a cell lt PgfCellTMargin dimension gt Maximum top cell margin for first paragraph in a cell lt PgfCellRMargin dimension gt Maximum right cell margin for first paragraph in a cell gt Endof DFCLMaximums statement Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 MIF Statements for Structured Documents and Books lt DFCLMinimums Lower change list limits Format change lists cannot decrement p
257. gt p lt MathFullForm char rho gt o lt MathFullForm char sigma gt 5 lt MathFullForm char Sigma gt T lt MathFullForm char tau gt Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 184 MIF Equation Statements Example MathFullForm statement fa lt MathFullForm char theta gt lt MathFullForm char Theta gt v lt MathFullForm char upsilon gt Y lt MathFullForm char Upsilon gt Q lt MathFullForm char varphi gt w lt MathFullForm char varpi gt g lt MathFullForm char varsigma gt 0 lt MathFullForm char vartheta gt 9 lt MathFullForm char wp gt E lt MathFullForm char xi gt lt MathFullForm char Xi gt Cc lt MathFullForm char zeta gt Using char for custom math elements The char expression can contain a custom math element by using the following syntax lt MathFullForm char T ElementName T New gt where Element Name is the name of the reference frame that contains the custom element Using char and diacritical for diacritical marks The char and the diacritical expressions both describe diacritical marks around an operand The char expression places diacritical marks around a single operand as shown in the following table The char expression is backward compatible Example lt MathFullForm gt statement x lt MathFullForm char x 1 0 0 0 0
258. gt Name of math element from reference frame lt DMathNewType keyword gt Specifies custom math element type for a list of types see the chapter on creating equations in your user s manual keywordcan be one of Atom Delimiter Function Infix Large Limit Postfix Prefix VerticalList lt DMathOpTLineOverride boolean gt No uses default glyph for operator Yes looks up operator on text line in reference frame lt DMathOpPositionA integer gt Position of first operand expressed as a percentage of equation font size lt DMathOpPositionB integer gt Position of second operand lt DMathOpPositionC integer gt Position of third operand gt End of DMat hNew statement gt End of DMathCatalog statement Usage You can define new math elements or redefine math elements that appear on the Equations palette To create a custom math element add the element s name and type to the DMathCatalog statement On a reference page with a name beginning with the word FrameMath define the math element in a named unanchored graphic frame In the frame called a reference frame create a text line that contains one or more characters that represent the math symbol you can apply specialized math fonts and change the position of the characters to get the appearance you want You can use custom elements in equations by including them in a MathFullForm statement For example to create a symbol for the set
259. h in a cell lt PgfCellTMargin dimension gt Minimum top cell margin for first paragraph in a cell lt PgfCellRMargin dimension gt Minimum right cell margin for first paragraph in a cell lt BFCLMinimums Endof BFCLMaximums statement Lower change list limits Format change lists cannot decrement proper ties below these values lt PgfFIndent dimension gt Minimum first indent allowed in book Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 170 MIF Statements for Structured Documents and Books lt PgfLIndent dimension gt Minimum left indent allowed in book lt PgfRIndent dimension gt Minimum right indent allowed in book lt PgfSpBefore dimension gt Minimum space before allowed in book lt PgfSpAfter dimension gt Minimum space after allowed in book lt FSize dimension gt lt PgfLeading dimension gt Minimum leading allowed in book Minimum font size allowed in book lt FDW dimension gt Minimum character spread allowed in book lt TSX dimension gt Minimum horizontal position of tab stop lt PgfCellLMargin dimension gt Minimum left cell margin for first paragraph in a cell lt PgfCellBMargin dimension gt Minimum bottom cell margin for first paragraph in a cell lt PgfCellTMargin dimension gt Minimum top cell margin for first paragraph in a cell lt PgfCellRMargin dimension gt Minimum right cell margin for first paragraph
260. hare documents with earlier versions of FrameMaker e Perform custom document processing e Set options for online documents in View Only format These tasks are described in Applications of MIF on page 47 You can use other FrameMaker to perform some of these tasks See Other application tools on page 51 Using this manual This manual e Describes the layout of MIF files e Provides a complete description of each MIF statement and its syntax e Provides examples of how to use MIF statements Includes MIF statements for version 7 0 of FrameMaker To get the most from this manual you should be familiar with FrameMaker For information about FrameMaker and its features see the documentation for your product In addition if you are using MIF as an interchange format between FrameMaker and another application you should be familiar with the tools needed to create and manip ulate the other application such as a programming language or database query language This chapter provides basic information about working with MIF files including opening and saving MIF files in FrameMaker It goes on to provide detailed information about the MIF language and its syntax Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 2 Introduction For an introduction to writing MIF files read Using MIF Statements You can then use the statement index subject index and table of contents to locate more specific information about a particular MIF stat
261. he number of superscripts and the second operand is the number of subscripts Subsequent operands define the subscripts and then the superscripts Note that the number of superscripts is listed before the number of subscripts However superscript operands are listed after subscript operands The following table contains an example of each indexes form Example MathFullForm statement x lt MathFullForm indexes 0 1 char x num 1 1 gt x5 lt MathFullForm indexes 0 2 char x num 1 1 num 2 2 gt lt MathFullForm indexes 1 0 char x num 1 1 gt x 2 lt MathFullForm indexes 2 0 char x num 1 1 num 2 2 gt x 2 lt MathFullForm indexes 1 1 char x num 1 1 num 2 2 gt x 34 lt MathFullForm x 2 indexes 2 2 char x num 1 1 num 2 2 num 3 3 num 4 4 gt chem The chem expression defines pre upper and pre lower indexes subscripts and superscripts Each position can have one expression The following table shows all possible forms of chem Example MathFullForm statement ix lt MathFullForm chem 1 0 0 0 char x num 1 1 gt 1 lt MathFullForm chem 0 0 1 0 char x num 1 1 gt x Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 195 MIF Equation Statements Example MathFullForm statement 1 lt MathFullForm chem 1 0 1 0 char x num 1 1 num 2 2 gt 2 x lt MathFullForm chem
262. he basic properties ruling properties and shading properties correspond to settings in the Table Designer The tagst ring value specified in any ruling substatement such as Tb1ColumnRuling must match a ruling tag defined in the RulingCatalog statement see page 77 The tagst ring value specified in any color substatement such as Tb1BodyColor must match a color tag defined in the colorCatalog statement see page 78 Usage of some of the aspects of the To1Format statement is described in the following sections Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 72 MIF Document Statements Alignment of tables The horizontal alignment of a table within a text column or text frame is specified by the Tb1Alignment statement e Ifthe table is aligned with the left center or right side of a text column or text frame the Tbl1Alignment statement is set to Left Center or Right respectively e If the table is aligned with the closer edge or farther edge of a text frame closer or farther relative to the binding of the book the Tp1Alignment statement is set to Inside or Outside respectively Locked tables and text insets The Tb1lLocked statement does not correspond to any setting in the Table Designer The statement is for text insets that retain formatting information from the source document If the lt TblLocked Yes gt statement appears in a specific table that table is part of a text inset that retains formatting information from the source doc
263. he body of the table lt Row gt One for each row in body gt end of TblBody lt TblF The footer omit if no footer lt Row gt One for each row in footer gt end of TblF gt end of Tbl ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 24 Using MIF Statements The Tb11D statement assigns a unique ID to the table instance The Tb1Format statement provides the table format You can use the Tb1Format statement to apply a table format from the Table Catalog apply a format from the catalog and override some of its properties or completely specify the table format locally Because the tables in a document often share similar characteristics you usually store table formats in the Table Catalog Table instances can always override the applied format The Tb1NumColumns statement specifies the number of columns in the table instance It is required in every table The Tb1H Tb1Body and Tb1F statements contain the table heading body and footer rows If a table does not have a heading or footing omit the statements Here s an example of a simple table that uses a default format from the Table Catalog The table has one heading row one body row and no footing rows Coffee Price per Bag Brazil Santos 455 00 You can use the following MIF statements to create this simple table lt MIFFile 7 00 gt lt Tbls lt Tbl lt TbIID 1 gt ID for this table lt TblTag Format A gt Applies format from Table C
264. he book window now can display the filename of each book component or a text snippet from the component s document In MIF BDisplayText determines which type of information to display A book can also be view only MIF now includes Bvi ewOnly BViewOnlyWinBorders BViewOnlyWinMenuBar BViewOnlyPopup and BViewOnlyNoOp statements to express whether a book is view only and how it should appear Book Components Book components store numbering properties to use when generating a book The following table shows the new MIF statements for managing different types of numbering Volume Chapter Page Footnote Table Footnote VolumeNumStart ChapterNumStart ContPageNum BFNoteStartNum BTbIFNoteNumStyle VolumeNumStyle ChapterNumStyle PageNumStart BFNoteNumStyle BTbIFNoteLabels VolumeNumText ChapterNumText PageNumStyle BFNoteRestart BTbIFNoteCompute Method VolNumCompute ChapterNumComp BFNoteLabels Method uteMethod BFNoteCompute Method Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 239 MIF Compatibility Documents Because there are new numbering properties for documents and books documents now have new numbering state ments The following table shows the new MIF statements for managing different types of numbering in documents Volume Chapter Page Footnote VolumeNumStart ChapterNumStart ContPageNum DFNoteComputeMethod VolumeNumStyle ChapterNumStyle PageNumStart VolumeNumText ChapterNumText PageNumStyle VolNumComputeMethod ChapterNumComputemeth
265. he differences between MIF 7 0 and previous versions see MIF Compatibility Modifying documents You can use MIF to perform custom document processing For example you can create a program or write a series of text editor macros to search for and change paragraph tags in a MIF file You can also edit a MIF book file to easily add or change document names in a book For an example of using MIF to easily update the values in a table see Updating several values in a table on page 227 Writing filters MIF allows you to write filters to convert data from other formats to FrameMaker format and to convert a MIF file to another document format While FrameMaker will change in future versions MIF will always remain compatible with earlier versions so your filters can continue to write MIF files Import filters MIF statements can completely describe a FrameMaker document or book file Because documents created with most word processors and text editors have fewer features than a FrameMaker document your import filters normally use only a subset of MIF statements To write an import filter first determine which MIF statements describe the format of the input file Then write a program to translate the file from its original file format to MIF If the imported document doesn t use sophisticated formatting and layout features don t include the corresponding MIF statements in your filter For example if the file was created by
266. he others inherit the fill 3 3 3 3 1 25 gt 0 88 gt 0 63 gt 0 38 gt 0 38 gt 0 63 gt 1 13 gt 1 50 gt ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 220 Examples Online manual Pie chart example ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 221 Examples When the MIF in this sample is imported into a page or graphic frame in a document FrameMaker centers the chart in the page or graphic frame This example is in the file piechart mif lt MIFFile 7 00 gt Generated by xyzgrapher 3 5 identifies this as a MIF file All dimensions are in points lt Units Upt gt Set the current pen pattern width and fill pattern lt Pen 0 gt lt PenWidth 5 gt lt Fill 0 gt Draw the black arc All arcs are part of the same circle so they have the same ArcRect All objects in the chart are grouped so they have the same Group ID lt Arc lt GroupID 1 gt lt ArcRect 12 11 144 144 gt lt ArcTheta 0 gt lt ArcDTheta 58 gt gt Continue clockwise around the chart lt Arc lt Fill 5 gt lt GroupID 1 gt lt ArcRect 12 11 144 144 gt lt ArcTheta 58 gt lt ArcDTheta 77 gt gt lt Arc lt Fill 2 gt lt GroupID 1 gt lt ArcRect 12 11 144 144 gt lt ArcTheta 135 gt lt ArcDTheta 108 gt gt lt Arc lt Fill 4 gt lt GroupID 1 gt lt ArcRect 12 11 144 144 gt lt ArcTheta 243 gt lt ArcDTheta 66 gt gt lt Arc lt Fill 6 gt lt GroupID 1 gt lt ArcRect 12 11 144 144 gt lt Ar
267. hor for the table CLOSE DOCUMENT vDoc ALERT Your MIF file is awaiting your attention Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 232 Examples Creating several tables The previous example illustrates how to use a database to create one table instance Both the Tb1s and the Text Flow statements are written to a single text file This approach however is limited to this simple case If the document contains several tables it may be more convenient to use the database to write the Tb1s statement to a separate file and then use a MIF include statement to read the file into FrameMaker For example suppose you need to publish a parts catalog Each part has a name a description and a table that gives pricing information A typical record looks like this Valve Box Lids Put the part name and description in a Text F1 For 5 25 Shaft Buffalo style valve boxes Lids come in three styles water panty gas and sewer _ Marking Stock Number Price Water 367 5044 11 36 Put the table in a Tols __ statement in a separate Sewer 367 5046 10 25 file Gas 367 5048 12 49 In the database all the information about each part is associated with its record Due to the structure of MIF however the information must appear in different portions of the MIF file the part name and description belong in the Text Flow statement while the table belongs in the Tb1s statement To accomplish this you can make the f
268. ich is shipped with the UNIX version of the FDK Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 256 Facet Formats for Graphics The graphic inset file is named tmp default fi The application specific facet for this graphic inset the file generated by the fmbitmap program is stored in a remote facet in the file tmp default Note that although the fmbitmap program writes out the ImportObFile statement this statement is obsolete and is only used with older versions of FrameMaker When defining a function to write a graphic inset file use the ImportObFileDI statement and specify a device independent pathname For more information on device independent pathnames see Device independent pathnames on page 8 lt MIFFile 7 00 gt Generated by fmbitmap lt ImportObject lt ImportObFile tmp default fi gt lt ImportObEditor fmbitmap gt BitmapFile facet amp v amp tmp default Data facet amp i amp 64 amp 64 amp 1 amp 1 FrameImage amp v amp x Kas amp x EndInset gt To see more examples of the graphic inset format you can import a graphic into a FrameMaker document import by copying and save the FrameMaker document as a MIF file General rules for reading and writing facets To write a facet you need to modify the existing function in your application for writing data The function must write the facet name and data type lines and insert an ampersand at the beginning of each line of facet data If necessa
269. ide table ruling style lt Tb1BRuling tagstring gt Bottom outside table ruling style lt TblRRuling tagstring gt Right outside table ruling style lt Tb1TRuling tagstring gt Top outside table ruling style lt TblLastBRuling boolean gt Yes means draw bottom rule on the last sheet only No means draw rule on the bottom of every sheet Shading properties lt TbIHFFill integer gt Default fill pattern for table heading and footing see page 103 lt Tb1HFColor tagstring gt Default color for table heading and footing see page 78 lt TblHFSeparation integer gt Default color for table heading and footing no longer used but written out by FrameMaker for backward compatibility see Color statements on page 244 lt Tb1BodyFill integer gt Default fill pattern for body cells see page 103 lt Tb1BodyColor tagstring gt Default color for body cells see page 78 lt Tb1lBodySeparation integer gt Default color for body cells no longer used but written out by FrameMaker for backward compatibility see Color statements on page 244 lt TblShadeByColumn boolean gt Yes specifies column shading No specifies body row shading lt TblShadePeriod integer gt Number of consecutive columns rows that use To 1BodyFill lt TbILXFill integer gt Exception fill pattern for columns or body rows see page 103 lt Tb1XColor tagstring gt Exception color for columns or body rows see page 78 lt Tb1XSe
270. identify the filter that was used to import the graphic by reference FrameMaker uses the record to find the correct filter to reimport the graphic when a user opens the document again Note that for graphics imported by copy FrameMaker uses the facet name stored with the graphic The Import Hint statement is not written for graphics imported by copy The record specified by the ImportHint statement uses the following syntax record_vers vendor format_id platform filter_vers filter_name Note that the fields in the record are not separated by spaces For example 0001PGRFPICTMAC61 0 Built in PICT reader The rest of this section describes each field in the record record_vers is the version on the record for example 0001 vendor is a code specifying the filter s vendor The code is a string of four characters The following table lists some of the possible codes Code Description PGRF Built in FrameMaker filters FAPT External FDK client filter FFLT External FrameMaker filters Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 114 MIF Document Statements Code Description IMAG External ImageMark filters XTND External XTND filters Note that this is not a comprehensive list of codes Codes may be added to this list by Adobe or by developers at your site format_id is a code specifying the format that the filter translates The code is a string of four characters The following table
271. ility see Color statements on page 244 Yes turns on overprinting for the graphic object No turns on knockout If this statement is not present then the overprint setting from the object s color is assumed lt RunaroundType keyword gt Specifies whether text can flow around the object and if so whether the text follows the contour of the object or a box shape surrounding the object keywordcan be one of Contour Box None lt RunaroundGap dimension gt Space between the object and the text flowing around the object must be a value between 0 0 and 432 0 points lt Angle degrees gt Rotation angle of object in degrees default is 0 Frames cells and equations can only be rotated in 90 degree increments all other objects can be arbitrarily rotated lt ReRotateAngle dimension gt Previous rotation angle of object in degrees lt DashedPattern lt DashedStyle keyword gt Specifies whether object is drawn with a dashed or a solid line keywordcan be one of Solid Dashed lt NumSegments integer gt Number of dash segments ignored when MIF file is read lt DashSegment dimension gt Defines a dash segment see DashSegment values on page 104 lt DashSegment dimension gt Additional statements as needed End of DashedPattern statement Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 103 MIF Document Statements lt ObjectAttribute Tagged informati
272. imension gt lt PgfLIndent dimension gt Used for structured documents only Left margin measured from left side of current text column lt PgfRIndent dimension gt Right margin measured from right side of current text column lt PgfAlignment keyword gt lt PgfSpBefore dimension gt Alignment within the text column keywordcan be one of LeftRight Left Center Right Space above paragraph lt PgfSpAfter dimension gt Space below paragraph lt PgfLineSpacing keyword gt Amount of space between lines in paragraph measured from baseline to baseline keywordcan be one of Fixed default font size Proportional largest font in line lt PgfLeading dimension gt Space below each line in a paragraph lt PgfNumTabs integer gt Number of tabs in a paragraph The statement is not required for input files the MIF interpreter calcu lates the number of tabs If it does appear it must appear before any TabStop statements otherwise the MIF interpreter ignores the tab settings lt TabStop Begin definition of tab stop the following property statements can appear in any order but must appear within a TabSt op statement lt TSX dimension gt Horizontal position of tab stop lt TSType keyword gt Tab stop alignment keywordcan be one of Left Center Right Decimal lt TSLeaderStr string gt Tab stop leader string for example lt TSDeci
273. in a cell Endof BFCLMinimums statement Endof BookSettings statement BookElements statement The BookElements statement contains all of the elements in the book s hierarchy This statement must appear after the BookComponent statements Otherwise the MIF interpreter warns you about out of bounds ECcomponent values Syntax lt BookElements Begin structure tree lt ElementBegin gt Begin element that contains other elements lt ElementEnd gt End element that contains other elements lt ElementBegin gt Additional statements as needed lt ElementEnd gt lt Element Begin element with no subelements lt ETag tagstring gt Element tag name from Element Catalog lt EComponent integer gt Corresponding book component numbering starts at 1 lt ETextSnippet string gt Text snippet for structure window gt Endof Element statement lt Element gt Additional statements as needed Endof BookElements statement Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 171 MIF Statements for Structured Documents and Books Usage The ElementBegin and ElementEnd statements define elements that contain other elements The Element statement defines an element with no subelements If the element is inserted in the book structure from the Element Catalog this statement includes only the ETag substatement If the element corresponds to a book
274. in infor mation from the document or the system such as the current date or the current page number and place it in text Headers and footers frequently use system variables You can modify a system variable s definition but you cannot create new system variables User variables contain only text and formatting information Within a FrameMaker document you insert and define variables by choosing Variable from the Special menu The variable appears in the document text where it is inserted In a MIF file you define and insert variables as follows e Define and name the document variables by using variableFormats and VariableFormat statements e Insert the variable in text by using the variable statement Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 39 Using MIF Statements Defining user variables All variable definitions for a document are contained in a single VariableFormats statement The variable Formats statement contains a VariableFormat statement for each document variable The variableFormat statement provides the variable name and definition lt VariableFormats lt VariableFormat lt VariableName Product Number gt lt VariableDef A15 24 gt gt end of VariableFormat gt end of VariableFormats The variable name must be unique case and spaces are significant For a user variable the variable definition can contain only text and character formats you can provide any character format defined in the Character Cat
275. ine of the file with no leading white space Syntax lt Book version gt comment The version argument indicates the version number of the MIF language used in the file and comment is a comment showing the name and version number of the program that generated the file For example a MIF book file saved in version 7 0 of FrameMaker begins with the following line lt Book 7 00 gt Generated by version 7 0 of FrameMaker MIF is compatible across versions so a MIF interpreter should be able to parse any MIF file although the results can sometimes differ from the user s intentions A MIF book file identification line is the only statement required in a MIF book file Book statements A MIF file for a book contains statements specific to books BWindowRect BookComponent BookxRef and BookUpdateReferences plus the following statements which can also occur in a MIF file for a document Comment Units Verbose PgfCatalog and FontCatalog ColorCatalog and ConditionCatalog BWindowRect statement The BWindowRect statement defines the position of the book window on the screen It can appear anywhere in the file but normally appears just after the Book statement Syntax lt BWindowRect X Y W H gt Book window placement on screen PDF statements The PDFBookInfo statement specifies the information to include in the Document Info dictionary when you save the book as PDE Each data entry consists of one Key statement followed by
276. ing example lt Para lt ParaLine lt String Our company makes a full line of gt Unconditional text lt Conditional Begin conditional text lt InCondition Winter gt Specifies condition tag gt end of Conditional lt String warm and soft sweaters gt Conditional text lt Conditional Begin conditional text lt InCondition Summer gt Specifies condition tag gt end of Conditional lt String cool and comfortable tank tops gt lt Unconditional gt lt String for those gt Unconditional text gt end of ParaLine lt ParaLine lt Conditional lt InCondition Winter gt gt end of Conditional lt String chilly winter gt lt Conditional lt InCondition Summer gt gt end of Conditional lt String hot summer gt lt Unconditional gt lt String days gt gt end of ParaLine gt end of Para You can apply multiple condition tags to text by using multiple Incondition statements lt Conditional lt InCondition Winter gt lt InCondition Summer gt gt end of Conditional Showing and hiding conditional text If you are creating a MIF file for FrameMaker to read you can specify whether conditional text is shown or hidden simply by setting the cst ate property for that condition In the previous example all text with the condition tag Summer is hidden and text marked with the condition tag Winter is shown You can show all conditional text in a document
277. ion code see page 47 lt DViewOnlyWinBorders boolean gt o suppresses display of scroll bars and border buttons in document window of View Only document lt DViewOnlyWinMenubar boolean gt o suppresses display of document window menu bar in View Only document lt DViewOnlyWinPopup boolean gt o suppresses display of document region pop up menus in View Only document lt DViewOnlyWinPalette boolean gt Yes makes window behave as command palette window in View Only document Document default language lt DLanguage keyword gt Hyphenation and spell checking language for text lines for allowed keywords see Pg f Language on page 61 Color printing lt DNoPrintSepColor tagstring gt Tag name of color not to print any color not included here is printed lt DPrintProcessColor tagstring gt Tag name of process color to print as separation lt DPrintSeparations boolean gt Yes prints separations lt DTrapwiseCompatibility boolean gt When printing to a PostScript file Yes generates postscript optimized for use with the TrapWise application lt DPrintSkipBlankPages boolean gt Yes skips blank pages when printing Superscripts and subscripts lt DSuperscriptSize percent gt lt DSubscriptSize percent gt Scaling factor for superscripts expressed as percentage of the current font size Scaling factor for subscripts expressed as percentage of current font siz
278. ish Japanese TraditionalChinese SimplifiedChinese Korean lt PgfTopSeparator string gt Name of reference frame from reference page to put above paragraph lt PgfTopSepAtIndent boolean gt Used for structured documents only lt PgfTopSepOffset dimension gt Used for structured documents only lt PgfBotSeparator string gt Name of reference frame from reference page to put below paragraph lt PgfBotSepAtIndent boolean gt Used for structured documents only lt PgfBotSepOffset dimension gt Used for structured documents only Table cell properties lt PgfCellAlignment keyword gt Vertical alignment for first paragraph in a cell keywordcan be one of Top Middle Bottom lt PgfCellMargins L T R B gt Cell margins for first paragraph in a cell lt PgfCellLMarginFixed boolean gt Yes means left cell margin is added to Tol1Cel1lMargins No means left cell margin overrides To1Cel1Margins lt PgfCellTMarginFixed boolean gt Yes means top cell margin is added to To1Cel1Margins No means top cell margin overrides TolCellMargins lt PgfCellRMarginFixed boolean gt Yes means right cell margin is added to To1Cel1lMargins No means right cell margin overrides To1Cel1lMargins Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 62 MIF Document Statements lt PgfCellBMarginFixed boolean gt Yes means bottom cell margin is added to Tb1CellMargins No means width of bottom cell margin overrides Tb1CellMargi
279. ith char x as a sample operand Example MathFullForm statement x lt MathFullForm abs char x gt acosx lt MathFullForm acos char x gt acoshx lt MathFullForm acosh char x gt acotx lt MathFullForm acot char x gt acothx lt MathFullForm acoth char x gt acscx lt MathFullForm acsc char x gt acschx lt MathFullForm acsch char x gt Lx lt MathFullForm angle char x gt argx lt MathFullForm arg char x gt asecx lt MathFullForm asec char x gt asechx lt MathFullForm asech char x gt asinx lt MathFullForm asin char x gt asinhx lt MathFullForm asinh char x gt xt lt MathFullForm ast char x gt atanx lt MathFullForm atan char x gt atanhx lt MathFullForm atanh char x gt x lt MathFullForm box char x gt Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 187 MIF Equation Statements Example MathFullForm statement 2 lt MathFullForm box2 char x gt x ex lt MathFullForm boxdot char x gt lt MathFullForm bra char x gt lt MathFullForm ceil char x gt Ax lt MathFullForm change char x gt cosx lt MathFullForm cos char x gt coshx lt MathFullForm cosh char x gt cotx lt MathFullForm cot char x gt cothx lt MathFullForm coth char x gt cscx lt MathFul
280. k and white the value is set to 0x00000000 e The eighth value is the length of the color map in bytes If the graphic is in black and white no color map is used and this value is set to 0x00000000 If the graphic is in color a color map with 256 colors is used described by 768 bytes of information and this value is set to 0x00000300 the hexadecimal representation of the number 768 In the example because the graphic is in black and white the value 0x00000000 is used The FramelImage format is similar to the Sun rasterfile format for bitmap images The following section of code is part ofthe usr include rasterfile h header file which describes the Sun rasterfile format struct rasterfile IntT ras_magic magic number IntT ras_width width pixels of image IntT ras_height height pixels of image IntT ras_depth depth 1 8 or 24 bits of pixel IntT ras_length length bytes of image IntT ras_type type of file see RT_ below IntT ras_maptype type of colormap see RMT_ below IntT ras_maplength length bytes of following map color map follows for ras_maplength bytes followed by image j define RAS_MAGIC 0x59a66a95 Sun supported ras_type s define RT_STANDARD 1 Raw image in 68000 byte order define RT_BYTE_ENCODED 2 Run length compression of bytes Sun registered ras_maptype s define RMT_RAW 2 Sun supported ras_maptype s O
281. ker in an encoded form and you should not edit the information Note that this information corresponds to the values of fields in the File Info dialog box It also corresponds to the data in the lt PDFDocInfo gt statement However unlike lt PDFDocInfo gt this XMP data also includes the values of the File Info dialog box default fields for Creator Creation Date and MetaData Date PDF Document Info For version 6 0 and later FrameMaker stores PDF File Info in the document file FrameMaker automatically supplies values for Creator Creation Date and Metadata Date these Document Info fields do not appear in MIF statements for PDF Document Info However a user can use the File Info dialog box to specify values for Author Title Subject Keywords Copyright Web Statement Job Reference and Marked The values for all these these values appear in PDF Document Info A document can also contain arbitrary Document Info fields if they have been entered via an FDK client or by editing a MIF file In MIF each Document Info entry consists of one Key statement and at least one Value statement A Key statement contains a string of up to 255 ASCII characters The Key names a File Info field in PDF the field name can be up to 126 characters long In MIF you represent non printable characters via HH where identifies a hexadecimal representation of a character and HH is the hexadecimal value for the character For example use 23 to represent the
282. l Document statement In addition to document preferences see Document statement on page 82 the MIF Document statement describes standard formats for equations The equation formatting substatements correspond to settings in the Equations palette Syntax lt Document See page 82 Equation sizes lt DMathSmallIntegral dimension gt Size in points of integral symbols in small equations lt DMathMediumIntegral dimension gt Size in points of integral symbols in medium equations lt DMathLargeIntegral dimension gt Size in points of integral symbols in large equations lt DMathSmallSigma dimension gt Size in points of summation and product symbols in small equa tions lt DMathMediumSigma dimension gt Size in points of summation and product symbols in medium equations lt DMathLargeSigma dimension gt Size in points of summation and product symbols in large equa tions lt DMathSmallLevell dimension gt Size in points of level 1 expression normal level in small equations lt DMathMediumLevell dimension gt Size in points of level 1 expression in medium equations lt DMathLargeLevell dimension gt Size in points of level 1 expression in large equations lt DMathSmallLevel2 dimension gt Size in points of level 2 expression first level subscripts and super scripts in small equations lt DMathMediumLevel2 dimension gt Size in points of level 2 expression in medium
283. lForm csc char x gt cschx lt MathFullForm csch char x gt Vxx lt MathFullForm curl char x gt xt lt MathFullForm dagger char x gt x lt MathFullForm dangle char x gt dx lt MathFullForm diff char x gt Vex lt MathFullForm diver char x gt a lt MathFullForm downbrace char x gt expx lt MathFullForm exp char x gt Jx lt MathFullForm exists char x gt x lt MathFullForm fact char x gt x lt MathFullForm floor char x gt Vx lt MathFullForm forall char x gt x x lt MathFullForm id char x gt lt MathFullForm id ili char x gt x lt MathFullForm id i2i char x gt Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 188 MIF Equation Statements Example MathFullForm statement imagx lt MathFullForm imag char x gt x lt MathFullForm ket char x gt V2x lt MathFullForm lap char x gt Inx lt MathFullForm In char x gt x lt MathFullForm lparen char x gt lt MathFul Form lparen ili char x gt lt MathFul Form lparen i2i char x gt x lt MathFullForm minus char x gt Fx lt MathFullForm mp char x gt ax lt MathFullForm neg char x gt eal lt MathFullForm norm char x gt F lt MathFullForm overline char x gt ax lt MathFullForm partial char
284. ld not have occurred Usage Each statement row in the line break table includes 25 numerical values one for each character class The values are separated by a space An example of a line break table is lt LineBreakTable 2 3 ar v z D g z eee x3 U Z 2 2 S oa Oo g n amp x O 2 a U wus 0 ES ae et on oe padana S E oe 3s 8 S208 64 8 oa wy zz 28888 z SL eu 0 k PS ses eH 2 oa S amp B o Lg 8 oe o0 amp Bag es 6 GEN Ov ee OU NF EY D onaga Sf GS epg gM Dann tn Se F esKgdexewMteoo amp A ses eg vdvs ds metas ee es CSE SS SSE ERE Sea SS v o g ow v swe AAAAA amn AOOCKRAZAHRA CTORA AZAD AAA EA ARANOA lt BegParentheses 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 300000 lt EndParentheses 01 121 211 0000000 0 00 0 0 0 1 00 0 0 0 gt end of LineBreakTable Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 211 MIF Asian Text Processing Statements In the preceding example a line break can occur between a character in the EndParentheses class and a character in the NonSeparableChar class because the value 0 Line break is allowed is in the seventh position which is the column position for the NonSeparableChar class of characters ExtraSpaceTable statement The Ext raSpaceTable statement defines how to add extra space between characters when needed for full justifi cation There are 25 statement rows in this table each corresponding to the 25 character classes respectively There are 25 numeric values in each statement ro
285. le Coffee Price per Bag Brazil Santos 455 00 Celebes Kalossi 924 00 Colombian 474 35 The following MIF statements define this table format lt TblFormat lt TblTag Coffee Table gt Every table must have at least one TblColumn statement lt TblColumn lt TbIColumnNum 0 gt Columns are numbered from 0 lt TbIColumnWidth 2 0 gt Width of first column gt end of TblColumn lt TbIColumn lt TbIColumnNum 1 gt Second column lt TblIColumnWidth 1 5 gt Width of second column gt end of TblColumn lt TbICellMargins 6 0 pt 6 0 pt 6 0 pt 4 0 pt gt lt TblLIndent 0 0 gt These are exactly like paragraph lt TbIRIndent 0 0 gt format properties lt TblAlignment Center gt lt TblPlacement Anywhere gt lt TblSpBefore 12 0 pt gt lt TblSpAfter 12 0 pt gt lt TbIBlockSize 1 gt lt TbIHFFill 15 gt No fill for heading row lt TblIHFColor Black gt lt TblBodyFill 5 gt Use 10 gray fill for main body rows lt TbIBodyColor Black gt lt TblShadeByColumn No gt Shade by row not by column lt TblShadePeriod 1 gt Shade every other row lt TbIXFill 15 gt No fill for alternate rows lt TbIXColor Black gt Color for alternate rows lt TblAltShadePeriod 1 gt lt TbILRuling Thin gt Use thin left outside rule lt TbIBRuling Thin gt Use thin bottom outside rule lt TbIRRuling Thin gt Use thin right outside rule lt TblITRuling Medium gt Use
286. le the FrameVector format represents strings such as black as character codes in hexadecimal such as 62 6c 61 63 6b Online manual 258 EPSI Facet Format EPS is an interchange standard developed by Adobe Systems Incorporated You can obtain a complete specification of the EPSI format from Adobe Systems Incorporated Imported graphics can contain graphic data in EPSI format This data is called the EPSI facet of the graphic FrameMaker can use this facet to display and print the graphic For more information about facets see Facet Formats for Graphics Ina MIF file the EPSI facet is contained in the Import Object statement For more information about the statement see ImportObject statement on page 110 Specification of an EPSI facet An EPSI facet begins with the following facet name and data type lines EPSI amp v Each line of EPSI facet data ends with n When FrameMaker imports a graphic inset with an EPSI facet FrameMaker uses the EPSI bounding box to determine the graphic inset s size If the bounding box does not fit on the page FrameMaker halves its dimensions until it fits Example of an EPSI facet The following rectangle is an imported graphic The following MIF statements describe the imported graphic The graphic data that specifies the rectangle is an EPSI facet lt ImportObject lt BRect 0 0 0 25 0 25 gt lt Pen 15 gt lt Fill 15 gt lt ImportObFile 2 0 internal inset gt
287. ll columns but not across the side heads in a text frame the PgfPlacement Style statement is set to StraddleNormal Locked paragraphs and text insets The PgfLocked statement does not correspond to any setting in the Paragraph Designer The statement is used for text insets that retain formatting information from the source document If the lt PgfLocked Yes gt statement appears in a specific paragraph that paragraph is part of a text inset that retains formatting information from the source document The paragraph is not affected by global formatting performed on the document If the lt Pgf Locked No gt statement appears in a specific paragraph that paragraph is not part of a text inset or is part of a text inset that reads formatting information from the current document The paragraph is affected by global formatting performed on the document For more information about text insets see Text insets text imported by reference on page 127 Character formats A character format is defined by a PgfFont or a Font statement Character formats can be defined locally or they can be stored in the Character Catalog which is defined by a FontCatalog statement Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 63 MIF Document Statements FontCatalog statement The FontCatalog statement defines the contents of the Character Catalog A document can have only one FontCatalog statement which must appear at the top level in the order given in M
288. lor statements MIF 5 5 now supports a number of color libraries In the color statement the ColorPantoneValue statement is no longer used Instead colorFamilyName specifies the color library to use and ColorInkName identifies the specific pigment Note that the full name must be provided for colorInkName The Color statement can also express a tint as a percentage of a base color colorTintPercentage specifies the percentage and ColorTintBaseColor specifies the base color to use Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 240 MIF Compatibility ColorOverprint is a new statement that assigns overprinting to the color If a graphic object has no overprint statement in it the overprint setting for that object s color is assumed Paragraph and Character statements In version 5 5 the PgfFont and Font statements can now include the FLanguage statement to define a language for a range of text within a paragraph The PgfFont and Font statements include statements to describe combined fonts For information on combined fonts see Combined Fonts on page 199 The PgfFont and Font statements include a new FEncoding statement to specify the encoding used for the font The keywords for this statement are JISX0208 ShiftJIS BIG5 GB2312 80 EUC or KSC5601 1992 FStretch is a new statement to define the amount to stretch or compress a range of characters Text inset statements The TiText and TiText Table statements respectively include two
289. lowing header properties Property Value ras_depth 1 ras_maptype RMT_NONE ras_maplength 0 An example of the header for a monochrome graphic is shown below amp 59a66a95 amp 00000040 amp 00000040 amp 00000001 amp 00000000 amp 00000001 amp 00000000 amp 00000000 A monochrome graphic has no color map Each data byte represents eight pixels and the most significant bit is the leftmost pixel Graphic data bytes are hex values that represent bit patterns of black and white For example hex 55 represents binary 01010101 which produces a gray shade hex FF represents binary 11111111 which produces black and hex 00 represents binary 00000000 which produces white Pseudocolor and gray images A pseudocolor or gray graphic has the following header properties Property Value ras_depth 8 ras_maptype RMT_EQUAL_RGB or RMT_RAW ras_maplength 300 263 Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 264 Framelmage Facet Format An example of the header for a color graphic is shown below amp 59a66a95 amp 00000040 amp 00000040 amp 00000008 amp 00000000 amp 00000001 amp 00000002 amp 00000300 Each graphic data byte represents one pixel of a particular color The value of a data byte is an index to a color stored in the color map See Color map on page 262 Sample unencoded Framelmage facet The sample Framelmage facet in this section describes the following
290. lt ParaLine gt statement for each line in the paragraph Line breaks don t matter the MIF interpreter adjusts line breaks when the file is opened or imported lt ParaLine lt String MIF Maker Interchange format is a group of gt gt lt ParaLine lt String statements that describe all text and graphics gt gt lt ParaLine lt String understood by FrameMaker in an easily parsed gt gt lt ParaLine lt String readable text file MIF provides a way to exchange gt gt lt ParaLine lt String information between FrameMaker and other gt gt lt ParaLine lt String applications while preserving graphics document gt gt lt ParaLine lt String structure and format gt gt gt end of Para Second paragraph of text Macros defined earlier are used here This paragraph inherits the format of the previous one since there s no PgfTag or Pgf statement to override it pr In You can write programs that convert graphics or documents en In into a MIF file and then import the MIF file into a FrameMaker en In document with the graphics and document formats intact en End of MIF File Bar chart example This example shows a bar chart and the MIF file that describes it This example is in the file barchart mif Examples Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 218 Examples To draw the bar chart you open or import the MIF file in FrameMaker No
291. lumn 0 lt PgfTag CellHeading gt Forces lookup in Paragraph Catalog lt ParaLine lt String Mining and Metal gt gt gt gt gt end of Cell lt Cell lt CellContent lt Para Cell in column 1 lt PgfTag CellHeading gt Forces lookup in Paragraph Catalog lt ParaLine lt String 10 31 90 Close gt gt gt gt gt end of Cell lt Cell lt CellContent lt Para Cell in column 2 lt PgfTag CellHeading gt Forces lookup in Paragraph Catalog lt ParaLine lt String Weekly gt lt Char HardReturn gt gt lt ParaLine lt String Change gt gt gt gt For shrink wrap lt CellAffectsColumnWidthA Yes gt gt end of Cell gt end of Row gt end of TblH ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 225 Examples Online manual lt TblBody The body lt Row The first body row lt Cell lt CellContent lt Para lt PgfTag CellBody gt Forces lookup in Paragraph Catalog lt ParaLine lt String Ace Aluminum gt gt gt gt gt end of Cell lt Cell lt CellContent lt Para lt PgfTag CellBody gt Forces lookup in Paragraph Catalog lt ParaLine lt String 24 00 gt gt gt gt gt end of Cell lt Cell lt CellContent lt Para lt PgfTag CellBody gt Forces lookup in Paragraph Catalog lt ParaLine lt String 3 50 gt gt gt gt gt end of Cell gt end of Row lt Row The second body row lt Cell lt CellContent lt Para lt PgfTag CellBody gt Forces lookup in P
292. m conventions 5 master pages creating 33 syntax 99 math statements for 173 197 MathAlignment 178 MathFullForm 178 197 in Math 178 MathLineBreak 178 MathOrigin 178 MathSize 178 matrices in equations 196 matrix 196 MCurrPage 125 messages 234 236 Micrografx Drawing Format files imported 111 MIF 52 defaults 3 definition of 1 samples of 197 216 227 MIF book files 135 143 identification line 136 sections 135 MIF document files sections 52 MIF files debugging 50 editing 10 importing into a FrameMaker document 9 layout 11 opening and saving 9 MIFFile 53 minus 188 MoveTabs 157 mp 188 MText 125 MType 125 MTypeName 124 125 N N ary operators in equations 190 NativeOrigin 110 neg 188 newdelimiter 196 newfunction 196 newinfix 196 newlarge 196 newlimit 196 newpostfix 196 newprefix 196 newvlist 196 NextElement 166 ni 191 NoLineBeginChar 205 NonSeperableChar 205 norm 188 notequal 191 Notes in Cell 75 in Tbl 73 in TextFlow 120 notin 191 notsubset 191 NSOffset 107 num 181 number sign 55 numbering chapters in a book 140 chapters ina document 90 footnotes ina document 91 pages inabook 140 pages ina document 90 99 paragraphs ina book 141 paragraphs ina table 69 table footnotes in a document 92 volumes ina book 139 volumes ina document 89 numbers in equations 181 NumCounter 98 Numeral 205 NumPages 142 NumPoints in Polygon 116 in PolyLine 116 NumSegments 102 o Obje
293. main statements The statement descriptions in this manual indicate the valid locations for a substatement by including it in all of the valid main statements Main statements are identified in the statement description for the correct order of main statements see MIF file layout on page 52 MIF data items There are several general types of data items in a MIF statement This manual uses the following terms and symbols to identify data items This term or symbol Means string Left quotation mark zero or more standard ASCII characters and a straight quotation mark Example ab cdef ghij To include extended ASCII characters in a string you must use a backslash sequence see Character set in strings on page 7 tagstring A string that names a format tag such as a paragraph format tag A tagst ring value must be unique case is significant A statement that refers toa tagst ring must exactly match the tag string value A tagst ring value can include any character from the FrameMaker character set pathname A string specifying a pathname see Device independent pathnames on page 8 boolean A value of either Yes or No Case is significant integer Integer whose range depends on the associated statement name ID Integer that specifies a unique ID An ID can be any positive integer between 1 and 65535 inclu sive A statement that refers to an ID must exactly match the ID dimension Decimal num
294. malChar integer gt Align decimal tab around a character by ASCII value in UNIX versions typeman ascii ina UNIX window for a list of characters and their corresponding ASCII values gt End of TabStop statement lt TabStop gt Additional statements as needed Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 60 MIF Document Statements Default font properties lt PgfFont gt Default font see page 63 Pagination properties lt PgfPlacement keyword gt Vertical placement of paragraph in text column keywordcan be one of Anywhere ColumnTop PageTop LPageTop RPageTop lt PgfPlacementStyle keyword gt Placement of side heads run in heads and paragraphs that straddle text columns keywordcan be one of Normal RUNIN SideheadTop SideheadFirstBaseline SideheadLastBaseline Straddle StraddleNormalOnly See page 62 lt PgfRunInDefaultPunct string gt Default punctuation for run in heads lt PgfWithPrev boolean gt Yes keeps paragraph with previous paragraph lt PgfWithNext boolean gt Yes keeps paragraph with next paragraph lt PgfBlockSize integer gt Widow orphan lines Numbering properties lt PgfAutoNum boolean gt Yes turns on autonumbering lt PgfNumFormat string gt Autonumber formatting string lt PgfNumberFont tagstring gt Tag from Character Catalog lt PgfNumAtEnd boolean gt Yes places number at end of line instead of begin
295. mands file in UNIX versions For information about disabling commands on the Macintosh see the Frame Developer s Kit FDK manuals available separately Applications of MIF You can use MIF files any time you need access to FrameMaker s formatting capabilities This section provides some examples of how MIF can be used and some tips on minimizing MIF statements You can use MIF to Share files with earlier versions of FrameMaker e Perform custom document processing e Write import and export filters for FrameMaker documents Perform database publishing Sharing files with earlier versions FrameMaker automatically opens documents created with an earlier version of FrameMaker 2 0 or higher To use an earlier version of FrameMaker such as 5 5 to edit a document created with a later version of FrameMaker such as 7 0 1 Use the newer FrameMaker product version to save the document in MIF 2 Open the MIF file with the earlier version of FrameMaker Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 48 Using MIF Statements Earlier versions of FrameMaker do not support all MIF statements in the current version For example when you use version 5 5 6 or earlier of FrameMaker to open a document created in version 6 0 or later MIF statements specifying optimized PDF size are skipped You can ignore the related error messages However to regain the optimized PDF size you will need to use the Optimize Pdf Size command For a description of t
296. mat rule statements as needed gt Endof EDEndElementRules statement ContextFormatRule statement The ContextFormatRule statement contains clauses that specify an element s formatting on the basis of the element s parent and sibling elements It contains an If statement and zero or more ElseIf statements It can also contain an Else statement The CcontextFormatRule statement must appear in a format rules statement such as an EDTextFormatRules or EDEndElementRules statement Syntax lt ContextFormatRule Begin context format rule lt If gt An If clause see If Elself and Else statements on page 152 lt Elself gt An Elself clause see If Elself and Else statements on page 152 lt Elself gt Additional statements as needed lt El1se gt An optional Else clause see If Elself and Else statements on page 152 gt Endof ContextFormatRule statement Online manual LevelFormatRule statement ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 MIF Statements for Structured Documents and Books The LevelFormatRule statement contains statements that specify an element s formatting on the basis of the level to which the element is nested within specific types of ancestor elements The LevelFormatRule statement contains a CountElements statement listing the tags of elements to count among the element s ancestors and a statement specifying the tag of the element at which to stop counting The L
297. matting properties from the source document Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 159 MIF Statements for Structured Documents and Books Pagination properties lt PgfPlacement keyword gt Vertical placement of paragraph in text column keywordcan be one of Anywhere ColumnTop PageTop LPageTop RPageTop lt PgfPlacementStyle keyword gt Placement of side heads run in heads and paragraphs that straddle text columns keywordcan be one of Normal Runin SideheadTop SideheadFirstBaseline SideheadLastBaseline Straddle StraddleNormalOnly lt PgfRunInDefaultPunct string gt Default punctuation for run in heads lt PgfWithPrev boolean gt Yes keeps paragraph with previous paragraph lt PgfWithNext boolean gt Yes keeps paragraph with next paragraph lt PgfBlockSize integer gt Widow orphan lines Numbering properties lt PgfAutoNum boolean gt Yes turns on autonumbering lt PgfNumFormat string gt Autonumber formatting string lt Pgf umberFont tagstring gt Tag from Character Catalog lt Pgf umAtEnd boolean gt Yes places number at end of line instead of beginning Advanced properties lt Pgf Hyphenate boolean gt Yes turns on automatic hyphenation lt Hyp henMaxLines integer gt Maximum number of consecutive lines that can end ina hyphen lt Hyp henMinPrefix integer gt Minimum number of letters that mu
298. matting when the context applies Ifan 1f or ElseIf statement does not include a Context or Level statement or the Context or Level statement contains an empty string this indicates that the If or ElseIf statement applies in all contexts InaContextFormatRule statement If and ElseIf and Else statements take the following form lt If Begin If clause lt Context contextstring gt String specifying a context such as Section lt Section If this con text applies to the element the following formatting statements are used to format the element Online manual 152 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 153 MIF Statements for Structured Documents and Books lt Formatting statement gt A statement suchasa FormatTag or FmtChangeListTag state ment that specifies how to change the formatting when the Context statement applies see Formatting statements next for a list of format ting statements gt Endof If statement lt Elself lt Context contextstring gt lt Formatting statement gt gt Endof ElseIf statement lt Else An optional Else clause lt Formatting statement gt gt Endof Else statement In a LevelFormatRule statement If and ElseIf and Else statements take the following form lt If Begin If clause lt Level levelstring gt String specifying a level of nesting suchas 1 or 5 If the element is nested to this level the following formatting stat
299. me in the DLSource statement For more information see the chapter on Edition Manager in Inside Macintosh Volume VI Online manual 135 MIF Book File Statements MIF book file overview The following table lists the main statements in a MIF book file in the order that FrameMaker writes them You should follow the same order that FrameMaker uses with the exception of the macro statements and control state ments which can appear anywhere at the top level of a file Each statement except the Book statement is optional Most main statements use substatements to describe objects and their properties Section Description Book Labels the file as a MIF book file The Book statement is required and must be the first statement in the file Macro statements Defines macros with a define statement and reads in files with an include statement These statements can appear anywhere at the top level Control statements Establishes the default units ina Units statement the debugging setting in a Verbose statement and comments ina Comment statement These statements can appear anywhere at the top level BWindowRect Specifies position of book window on the screen View only statements Specify whether the book is View Only and how to display View Only book windows BDisplayText Specifies the type of text to display in the book window for each book component icon PDF statements Specify docum
300. meMaker provides a default Paragraph Catalog and Character Catalog In addition it provides a right master page as well as many other default properties Save this document as a MIF file and open the FrameMaker generated MIF file in a text editor or in FrameMaker as a text file For information on how to save and open MIF files see Opening and saving MIF files on page 9 You ll see that the MIF interpreter has taken the original 6 line file and generated over 1 000 lines of MIF statements that describe all the default objects and their properties To see the actual text of the document go to the end of the file This example demonstrates an important point about MIF files Your MIF file can be very sparse the MIF interpreter supplies missing information Most documents are not this simple however and require some formatting The following sections describe how to add additional document components such as paragraph and character formats a table and custom page layouts to this minimal MIF file Creating and applying paragraph formats In a FrameMaker document paragraphs have formatting properties that specify the appearance of the paragraph s text A paragraph format includes the font family and size indents tab stops the space between lines in a paragraph and the space before and after a paragraph In a FrameMaker document the end of a paragraph is denoted by a single carriage return You control the amount of space above an
301. ment the paragraph character table variable and cross reference formats used in the inset are marked with special MIF statements to indicate that these formats should not be affected by global updates These statements are PgfLocked FLocked Tbl Locked Varia bleLocked and XRefLocked respectively The MIF statements appear under the descriptions of these formats Plain text formatting can also be used if the Tirormatt ing statement is set to TiPlainText Online manual TiText statement ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 132 MIF Document Statements The TiText statement defines a text file imported by reference It appears in a Text Inset statement Syntax lt Ti Text lt TiEOLisEOP boolean gt Yes specifies that the end of the line marks the end of a paragraph No specifies that a blank line identifies the end of a paragraph lt TiTxtEncoding keyword gt Specifies the text encoding for the source file keyword can be one of TilsoLatin TiASCII TiANSI TiMacASCII TiJIS TiSNif dJIsS TiEUC TiBig5 TIEUCCNS TiGB TiHZ TikKorean End of Ti Text statement TiTextTable statement The TiTextTable statement defines imported text formatted as a table It appears in a Text Inset statement Syntax lt TiTextTable lt TiTblTag string gt Specifies the name of the table format used for the table lt TiTblIsByRow boolean gt Yes specifies that each paragraph in the imported text i
302. mily name string PostScript name string Platform name string Size of data in bytes Variable Default value default font name Example 2A 0000000A 00 00 08 43 6F 75 72 69 65 72 00 for a font specified by the family name Courier Font size 0x2B Specification by data type Metric Description of data Point size of font Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 277 FrameVector Facet Format Size of data in bytes 4 Default value default font size Example 2B 00000004 000C0000 for a 12 point font Font style 0x2C Description of data Specification by data type Unsigned long Described by 14 bits where bit 0 is the least significant bit Bit 0 bold equivalent to setting the font weight to bold Bit 1 italic equivalent to setting the font angle to italic Bits 2 4 underline style 0 no underline 1 single 2 double 3 numeric bit 4 is not cur rently used Bit 5 overline Bit 6 strikethrough Bit 7 superscript Bit 8 subscript Bit 9 outline Bit 10 shadow Bit 11 pair kern Bits 12 13 case Osas is 1 small caps 2 lower case 3 upper case Size of data in bytes 4 Default value default font style Example 2C 00000004 00000043 for a font with bold italic and strikethrough styles Font color 0x2D Specification by dat
303. n normally select text and objects in a locked document by Control dragging in UNIX and Windows versions or by Command dragging in Macintosh versions Specifying lt DViewOnlySelect No gt prevents all selection in a locked document e To suppress the appearance of a document region pop up menu use the statement lt DViewOnlyWinPopup No gt A document region pop up menu is a menu activated by the right mouse button For example in UNIX versions of FrameMaker the Maker menu menu can be accessed by pressing the right mouse button If the DviewonlyWinPopup statement has a value of No the background menu does not appear when the right mouse button is pressed This statement has no effect in Macintosh and Windows versions of FrameMaker e To make a window behave as a palette window use the following statement lt DViewOnlyWinPalette Yes gt A palette window is a command window such as the Equations palette that exhibits special platform dependent behavior In UNIX versions of FrameMaker a palette window can only be dismissed it cannot be closed to an icon In Macintosh versions a palette always remains in front of the active window In Windows versions a palette floats outside the main application window and cannot be unlocked To edit the palette you need to reset the DviewOnlyWinPalette statement to No in the MIF file before opening it in FrameMaker Using active cross references A locked document automatically has active cross ref
304. naroundGap 12 0 gt statement appears all objects after that statement have a 12 0 point gap from text that flows around them If this is the only RunaroundGap statement in the MIF file all objects before that statement have a 6 0 point gap the default gap value from the text that flows around them e Ifthe MIF file does not contain any RunaroundType statements or RunaroundGap statements FrameMaker uses the default values lt RunaroundType None gt and lt RunaroundGap 6 0 gt for all objects in the file e For example 3 x and 4 x MIF files do not contain any RunaroundType statements When opening these files FrameMaker uses the default value lt RunaroundType None gt and text does not flow around any of the existing graphic objects in these files AFrames statement The AF rames statement contains the contents of all anchored frames in a document A document can have only one AFrames statement which must appear at the top level in the order given in MIF file layout on page 52 The contents of each anchored frame are defined in a Frame statement Within the text flow an AFrame statement indicates where each anchored frame appears by referring to the ID provided in the original frame description see ParaLine statement on page 121 Syntax lt AFrames lt Frame gt Defines a graphic frame see Frame statement on page 107 lt Frame gt Additional statements as needed End of AFrames statement
305. ndicates overprint is set for the color No indicates knockout gt End of Color statement Usage Ina MIF file all colors are expressed as a mixture of cyan magenta yellow and black The colorattribute statement identifies a default FrameMaker document color the default colors are all reserved specified by the ColorIsReserved keyword and cannot be modified or deleted by the user A reserved default color can have two ColorAttribute statements for example lt ColorAttribute ColorIsCyan gt lt ColorAttribute ColorIsReserved gt A color tint must be based on an existing color This has two implications If the base color doesn t exist in the document black is used as the base color for the tint e The color value statements values for CMYK color family and ink name are ignored when included in a tint statement However FrameMaker writes out color value statements for a tint even though they will be ignored To modify the color values of a tint modify the color value statements for the base color used by the tint Views statement The views statement contains the color views for the document A document can have only one views statement which must appear at the top level in the order given in MIF file layout on page 52 Syntax lt Views lt View gt Defines a color view see View statement next lt View gt Additional statements as needed z End of Views statement Onli
306. ne manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 80 MIF Document Statements View statement For each color view the View statement specifies which colors will be displayed which will be displayed as cutouts and which will not be displayed at all The view statement must appear in a Views statement Syntax lt View lt ViewNumber integer gt View number 1 6 lt ViewCutout tagstring gt Name of color to print as cutout separation lt ViewCutout gt Additional statements as needed lt ViewInvisible tagstring gt Name of color to hide lt ViewInvisible gt Additional statements as needed gt End of View statement Variables All variable definitions for a document are contained in a VariableFormats statement Both user defined and system defined variables are defined by a VariableFormat statement A Variable statement that refers to the variable name shows where the variable appears in text see ParaLine statement on page 121 VariableFormats and VariableFormat statements The VariableFormats statement defines document variables to be used in document text flows A MIF file can have only one VariableFormats statement which must appear at the top level in the order given in MIF file layout on page 52 Each VariableFormat statement supplies a variable name and its definition The statement must appear in a VariableFormats statement Syntax lt VariableFormats lt VariableForma
307. new statements TiTxt Encoding and TiTxtT blEncoding to specify the text encoding for the source file Both of these new statements can have one of the following keywords Ti IsoLat in TiASCII TiANSI TiMacASCII TiJIS TiShiftJIS TiEUC TiBig5 TIEUCCNS TiGB TiHZ or TiKorean Marker statements In FrameMaker 5 5 users can now define named custom markers MTypeName is a new statement to specify the marker name The MType statement is still written out for backward compatibility but FrameMaker 5 5 reads MTypeName when present Graphic object statements If the overprint statement is not present in a graphic object the overprint setting for the object s color is assumed ObTint applies a tint to whatever color is assigned to the object If the object s color already has a tint the two tint values are added together Structured element definition statements EDAtt rHidden is a new statement in the EDAtt rDef that specifies whether an attribute is hidden or not FStretch and FStretchChange are new statements added to the Fmt ChangeList to specify how much to stretch or compress the characters in an element Changes between versions 4 and 5 This section describes changes to MIF syntax between versions 4 and 5 of FrameMaker Changes to existing MIF statements In version 5 the following MIF statements have changed or now have additional property statements e Paragraph statements e Character statements Online manual
308. ng Inventory Price per Bag 00 gt SEND PACKET vDoc lt Conditional lt InCondition Discount gt gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt String String vDiscPrice S 00 gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt Unconditional gt gt gt gt gt gt CR MESSAGE Generating MIF for InventoryJName Status Inventory Status NEXT RECORD Inventory End for SEND PACKET vDoc gt gt gt CR End of table Body of page SEND PACKET vDoc lt TextFlow lt TFTag A gt lt TFAutoConnect Yes gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt Para lt PgfTag Heading gt lt ParaLine lt TextRectID 8 gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt String GREEN COFFEE PRICE LIST gt lt AFrame 1 gt gt gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt Para lt PgfTag Prepared gt lt ParaLine lt String To order contact gt gt gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt Para lt PgfTag Body gt lt ParaLine lt String 1 gt gt gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt Para lt PgfTag Body2 gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt ParaLine lt String Sales Representative gt gt gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt Para lt PgfTag Body2 gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt ParaLine lt String Primo Coffee Distributors gt gt gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt Para lt PgfTag Body2 gt lt ParaLine CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt String String Num 2 HH HHHH gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt ATbl 2 gt gt gt gt CR Send the anc
309. ng and the user will see garbled characters FPlatformName statement The lt FPlatformName string gt statement provides a platform specific ASCII string name that uniquely identifies a font for a particular platform The st ring value consists of several fields separated by a period Macintosh The Macintosh platform name has the following syntax lt FPlatformName M FontName StyleFlags gt M Platform designator FontName Macintosh Resource Manager font name for more information see your Macintosh documenta tion StyleFlags Macintosh font styles use one or more of the following flags B Bold I Italic C Condensed E Extended P Plain use if no other flags are set You cannot use the C and E flags for the same font For Underline Outline and Shadow styles use the MIF statements FUnderlining FOutline and FShadow described on page 64 and page 65 The following statements are valid representations of the Macintosh font Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique lt FPlatformName M Helvetica BIC gt lt FPlatformName M B Helvetica Bold IC gt lt FPlatformName M NI Helvetica Narrow Oblique B gt lt FPlatformName M NBI Helvetica Narrow BoldObl P gt Windows The Windows platform name has the following syntax lt FPlatformName W FaceName ItalicFlag Weight Variation gt Ww Platform designator FaceName Windows face name for more information see your Windows documentation ItalicFlag
310. ning Advanced properties lt PgfHyphenate boolean gt Yes turns on automatic hyphenation lt HyphenMaxLines integer gt Maximum number of consecutive lines that can end in a hyphen lt HyphenMinPrefix integer gt Minimum number of letters that must precede hyphen lt HyphenMinSuffix integer gt Minimum number of letters that must follow a hyphen lt HyphenMinWord integer gt Minimum length of a hyphenated word lt PgfLetterSpace boolean gt Spread characters to fill line lt PgfMinWordSpace integer gt Minimum word spacing as a percentage of a standard space in the paragraph s default font lt PgfOptWordSpace integer gt Optimum word spacing as a percentage of a standard space in the paragraph s default font Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 61 MIF Document Statements lt PgfMaxWordSpace integer gt Maximum word spacing as a percentage of a standard space in the paragraph s default font lt PgfLanguage keyword gt Language to use for spelling and hyphenation Note that FrameMaker write this statement so MIF files can be opened in older versions of FrameMaker However the language for a paragraph format or charac ter format is now properly specified in the PgfFont and Font state ments see page 63 keywordcan be one of NoLanguage USEnglish UKEnglish German SwissGerman French CanadianFrench Spanish Catalan Italian Portuguese Brazilian Danish Dutch Norwegian Nynorsk Finnish Swed
311. nline manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 262 Framelmage Facet Format define RMT_NONE 0 ras_maplength is expected to be 0 define RMT_EQUAL_RGB 1 red ras_maplength 3 green blue For more information see the usr include rasterfile h header file and the Sun man page on rasterfile Color map The optional color map defines colors used for the imported graphic It consists of 256 bytes of red followed by 256 bytes of green followed by 256 bytes of blue Each byte contains an intensity value for a color FF is the maximum intensity and 00 is the minimum none Color 05 bright red FF red 00 green 00 blue ha array of 256 red levels 00 OC A2 OF FF C5 F6 D7 256 bytes Red level FF array of 256 green levels OA A1 B3 03 OC E6 F7 256 bytes Green level 00 array of 256 blue levels FF EE AA 11 DD 66 77 256 bytes Blue level 00 The color map defines 256 colors Each color contains a red green and blue level of intensity The values of the first red byte first green byte and first blue byte define the first color in the map the values of the second red green and blue bytes define the second color and so forth For example the data value 05 represents the color defined by the level of red stored in the fifth byte of red the level of green stored in the fifth byte of green and the level of blue stored in the fifth byte
312. nline manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 30 Using MIF Statements lt Tbls lt Tbl lt TbHD 1 gt lt TblTag Format A gt Tag of format in Table Catalog lt TbINumColumns 1 gt lt TblBody gt end of TblBody gt end of Tbl gt end of Tbls To locally define a table format use a complete Tb1Format statement lt Tbls lt Tbl lt TbIID 1 gt lt TblFormat lt TblTag gt Every table must have one TblColumn statement lt TblColumn lt TblColumnNum 0 gt lt TblColumnWidth 1 0 gt gt end of TblColumn table property statements gt end of TblFormat gt end of Tbl gt end of Tbls Creating default paragraph formats for new tables You can use the Tb1Format and Tb1Column statements to define default paragraph formats for the columns in new tables These default formats do not affect tables that are defined within the MIF file they only affect tables that the user inserts after the MIF file has been opened in FrameMaker Your filter or application should provide these defaults only for documents that might be edited later For example the following MIF code assigns a paragraph format named Description to body cells in new tables that are given the format called Coffee Table lt TblFormat lt TblTag Coffee Table gt lt TbIColumn lt TblColumnNum 0 gt lt TblColumnWidth 1 0 gt lt TblIColumnBody lt PgfTag Description gt gt end of TblColumnBody gt end of TbIColumn gt
313. ns Miscellaneous properties lt PgfLocked boolean gt Yes means the paragraph is part of a text inset that obtains its format ting properties from the source document See page 62 lt PgfAcrobatLevel integer gt Level at which the paragraph is shown in an outline of Acrobat Book marks 0 indicates that the paragraph does not appear as a bookmark Usage Within a PgfCatalog statement the PgfTag statement assigns a tag to a paragraph format To apply a paragraph format from the Paragraph Catalog to the current paragraph use the PgfTag statement in a ParaLine statement If the PgfTag statement within a text flow does not match a format in the Paragraph Catalog then the Pgf statement makes changes to the current paragraph format That is a Pgf statement after PgfTag specifies how the paragraph differs from the format in the catalog If a document has side heads indents and tabs are measured from the text column not the side head In a table cell tab and indent settings are measured from the cell margins not the cell edges Usage of some aspects of the Pgf statement is described in the following sections Paragraph placement across text columns and side heads The PgfPlacement Style statement specifies the placement of a paragraph across text columns and side heads in a text frame e Ifa paragraph spans across all columns and side heads the PgfPlacement Style statement is set to Straddle e Ifa paragraph spans across a
314. ns 3 and 4 This section describes the changes to MIF syntax between versions 3 and 4 of FrameMaker 4 00 top level MIF statements The following table lists top level statements introduced between versions 3 and 4 of FrameMaker New statement Action in earlier versions lt ColorCatalog gt All custom colors revert to Cyan lt Views gt Ignored Changes to 3 00 MIF statements This section describes the statements that have changed or that have introduced additional property statements between versions 3 and 4 of FrameMaker MIF statements that have changed include e Color statements e Math statements Character format statements e Object statements e Page statements Color statements The following table lists the changes for color property statements MIF 3 00 MIF 4 00 lt FSeparation integer gt lt FColor string gt lt CSeparation integer gt lt CColor string gt lt RulingSeparation integer gt lt RulingColor string gt lt Separation integer gt lt ObColor string gt lt TblHFSeparation integer gt lt TblIHFColor string gt lt TblBodySeparation integer gt lt TblBodyColor string gt lt TblXSeparation integer gt lt TblXColor string gt Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 245 MIF Compatibility MIF 3 00 MIF 4 00 lt CellSeparation integer gt lt CellColor string gt lt DChBarSeparation integer gt lt DChBarColor string gt Sep
315. nt page background body pages only keywordcan be one of None Default pagename lt TextRect gt Defines text frame see page 118 lt Frame gt Graphic object statements Graphic frames on the page see the section Graphic objects and graphic frames on page 101 Objects on the page see the section Graphic objects and graphic frames on page 101 Filter statements lt HeaderL string gt Left header string lt HeaderC string gt Center header string lt HeaderR string gt Right header string lt FooterL string gt Left footer string lt FooterC string gt Center footer string lt FooterR string gt Right footer string lt HFMargins L T R B gt lt HFFont Header footer margins Header footer font see page 63 lt Font gt gt lt Columns integer gt Default number of columns lt ColumnGap dimension gt Default column gap End of Page statement Usage Master and reference page names supplied by the PageTag statement appear in the status bar of a document window The PageBackground statement names the master page to use as the background for a body page A value of Default tells FrameMaker to use the right master page for single sided documents and to alternate between the right and left master pages for a two sided document For more information about applying master page layouts to body pages s
316. nts see page 88 keywordcan be one of FNormal FSuperscript FSubscript lt FOutline boolean gt Turns on outline style Macintosh version only lt FShadow boolean gt Turns on shadow style Macintosh version only lt FPairkKern boolean gt Turns on pair kerning lt FCase keyword gt Applies capitalization style to string keywordcan be one of FAsTyped FSmallCaps FLowercase FUppercase Kerning information lt FDX percent gt Horizontal kern value for manual kerning expressed as percentage of an em positive value moves characters right and negative value moves characters left lt FDY percent gt Vertical kern value for manual kerning expressed as percentage of an em pos itive value moves characters down and negative value moves characters up lt FDW percent gt Spread value for space between characters expressed as percentage of an em positive value increases the space and negative value decreases the space lt FTsume boolean gt Yes turns on Tsume variable width rendering for Asian characters Filter statements lt FPlain boolean gt Used only by filters lt FBold boolean gt Used only by filters lt FItalic boolean gt Used only by filters Miscellaneous information lt FLocked boolean gt Yes means the font is part of a text inset that obtains its formatting properties from the source document End of PgfFont or Font statement
317. od Changes between version 5 and 5 5 This section describes changes to MIF syntax between versions 5 and 5 5 of FrameMaker Asian text processing A section has been added to the MIF Reference to describe the new MIF statements that were added for Asian text in a document See MIF Asian Text Processing Statements for more information MIF file layout A MIF file can now include a CombinedFontCatalog statement that contains CombinedFontDefn statements to define each combined font for the document The CcombinedFontCatalog statement must occur before the Document statement For information about combined fonts see Combined Fonts on page 199 Control statements A new control statement CharUnits has been added to express whether characters and line spacing is measured by points or by Q the standard units of measurement for Japanese typography The keywords for this statement are CUpt and cua Document statements The DPageNumStyle and DFNoteNumSt yle statements have new keywords to express Japanese footnote numbering formats The new keywords are ZenLCAlpha ZenUCAlpha KanjiNumeric Kanjikazu and BusinessKazu DTrapwiseCompat ibility is a new statement that determines whether generated PostScript will be optimized for the TrapWise application DSuperscriptStretch DSubscriptStretch and DSmallCapsStretch are new statements that specify the amount to stretch or compress superscript subscript or small caps text Co
318. of blue If the fifth byte of red contains FF the maximum red intensity and the fifth bytes of green and blue are both 00 then 05 would represent bright red Data describing the graphic The data type can be either byte encoded or standard Each type uses different data formats Byte encoded data If ras_type is RT_BYTE_ENCODED if the sixth value in the header is 0x00000002 the data is a run length encoded pixel matrix The byte value 80 hexadecimal decimal 128 is used as a separator for encoding several bytes of the same color The encoding scheme uses the following format 80 nn pp where nn 1 is the number of times to repeat the data byte pp For example the following values represent seven data bytes of the hex value 55 80 06 55 A single pixel value of 80 must be encoded as 80 00 in the data If the value 80 occurs sequentially use the format 80 nn 80 where nn 1 is the number of times 80 occurs Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 Framelmage Facet Format Standard data If ras_type is RT_STANDARD if the sixth value in the header is 0x00000001 the data contains uncompressed hex data corresponding to the graphic Each byte is eight pixels for a monochrome graphic or one pixel for color Each scanline of data must be padded to a word 16 bit boundary Differences between monochrome and color There are two types of FrameImage files monochrome and pseudocolor Monochrome images A monochrome graphic has the fol
319. of real numbers add the new element to the Math Catalog as follows lt Document lt DMathCatalog lt DMathNew Name of new math element lt DMathOpName Real Numbers gt Type of math element lt DMathNewType Atom gt gt end of DMathNew gt end of DMathCatalog gt end of Document Define the custom element on a reference page that has a name beginning with FrameMath lt Page Create a named reference page lt PageType ReferencePage gt lt PageTag FrameMathl gt Create a named unanchored frame Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 176 MIF Equation Statements lt Frame lt FrameType NotAnchored gt lt Tag Real Numbers gt Create the math element in the first text line in the frame lt TextLine Apply a specialized math font to the letter R lt Font lt FTag gt lt FFamily MathematicalPi gt lt FVar Six gt lt FWeight Regular gt gt end of Font lt String R gt gt end of TextLine gt end of Frame gt end of Page To insert the new element in an equation use the char expression see page 182 and the element s name in a MathFullForm statement as shown in the following equation lt MathFullForm equal in forall char x comma char T Real Numbers T New times char f id char x indexes 1 0 char x num 3 00000000 3 gt end of MathFullForm The equation looks like this in the FrameMaker document vie ER f x x
320. og You can store table formats in a Table Catalog by using a Tb1Catalog statement A document can have only one Tb1Catalog statement which must occur before the Tb1s statement The Tb1Catalog statement contains one Tb1Format statement for each format as shown in the following template lt TblCatalog lt TblFormat gt lt TblFormat gt gt end of TblCatalog As with the Paragraph Catalog if your MIF file does not provide a Table Catalog the MIF interpreter supplies a default catalog and formats If you do provide a Table Catalog your defined table formats supercede those in the default Table Catalog You can add a minimal table format to the catalog by simply supplying a table format tag name The MIF interpreter supplies a set of default values to the table s properties when it reads in the MIF file The ruling styles in a table format are defined in a separate catalog called the Ruling Catalog You can define your own Ruling Catalog with the RulingCatalog statement Whether you use the default ruling styles or create your own substatements that refer to ruling styles such as the Tb1LRuling statement must use the name of a ruling style from the Ruling Catalog See RulingCatalog statement on page 77 Applying a table format You can apply a table format from the Table Catalog or you can define a table format locally To apply a table format from the Table Catalog use the Tb1Tag statement within the Tb1 statement O
321. ollowing modifications to the design of the database procedure shown in the previous example e At the beginning of the procedure create two text files one for the main MIF file that will contain the MIF file identification line and the main text flow and the other for the Tb1s statement e Usea second include statement to read in the Tb1s statement e As your procedure passes through each record write the data that belongs in the Text Flow statement in the main text file and write the table data to the Tb1s file If you are using 4th Dimension the procedure should have the following statements vDoc CREATE DOCUMENT Prompts user to name main file vTbls CREATE DOCUMENT Tbls mif Hard codes name of include file SEND PACKET vDoc lt MIFFile 7 00 gt File ID SEND PACKET vDoc include template mif SEND PACKET vDoc include Tbls mif As you process the records you write the table data to the second include file by referring to the vTbls variable in a SEND PACKET command For example SEND PACKET vTbls lt Cell lt CellContent CR The main MIF file would have the following components lt MIFFile 7 00 gt File ID include template mif MIF template include Tbls mif Table instances created by the database Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 233 Examples lt TextFlow Main text flow gt end of text flow When FrameMaker opens the main MIF file it will use the two include statements to
322. om Ruling Catalog lt CellBRuling tagstring gt Bottom edge ruling style lt CellRRuling tagstring gt Right edge ruling style lt CellTRuling tagstring gt Top edge ruling style lt CellColumns integer gt Number of columns in a straddle cell lt CellRows integer gt Number of rows in a straddle cell lt CellAffectsColumnWidthA boolean gt Yes restricts column width to cell width lt CellAngle degrees gt Angle of rotation in degrees 0 90 180 or 270 lt Celleontent Cell s content lt Notes gt Footnotes for cell see page 120 lt Para gt Cell s content represented in one or more Para statements see page 121 lt Para gt Additional statements as needed gt End of CellContent statement gt End of Ce 11 statement Usage You can use the Rotate command on the Graphics menu to change the Ce11Angle but it does not affect the location of cell margins cel1Angle affects only the orientation and alignment of the text flow When ce11Ang1le is 90 or 270 degrees use PgfCel1lAlignment to move vertically oriented text closer to or farther from a column edge For infor mation about aligning text in a cell see PgfCel1Alignment on page 61 MIF uses Cel lAffectsColumnWidtha only with the Tb1ColumnWidtha statement The MIF default for computing a cell s width is To1columnWidtha However if any cells in the column have lt cellaffectsColumnWidthA Yes gt then only those cells affect the computed column width
323. ommon to all objects see page 101 lt ShapeRect L T W H gt Position and size of object before rotation in page or graphic frame coor dinates lt FrameType keyword gt Whether graphic frame is anchored and if anchored the position of the anchored frame keywordcan be one of Below Top Bottom Inline Left Right Inside Outside ear Far RunintoParagraph otAnchored lt Tag tagstring gt ame of graphic frame lt Float boolean gt lt NSOffset dimension gt Yes floats graphic frame to avoid large white space that results when anchored frame and the line containing it are moved to the next page Near side offset lt BLOffset dimension gt Baseline offset lt AnchorAlign keyword gt Alignment of anchored frame keywordcan be one of Left Center Right Inside Outside Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 108 MIF Document Statements lt AnchorBeside keyword gt Whether the graphic frame is anchored outside of a text frame or a column in a text frame keywordcan be one of Column TextFrame lt Cropped boolean gt Yes clips sides of graphic frame to fit column lt Frame gt Other graphic frames within this frame Graphic object statements Objects in the graphic frame see page 101 gt End of Frame statement Usage Unless the generic object data indicates otherwise the MIF interpreter assumes that each graphic frame inheri
324. on that gets stored with the object when you save a docu ment as Structured PDF A graphic object can have ny number of ObjectAttribute statements lt Tag string gt The tag name for the object attribute lt Value string gt The text of the object attribute gt End of Ob jectAttribute statement Usage The 1D substatement is necessary only if other objects refer to the object For example anchored frames groups and linked text frames require ID substatements The GroupID statement is necessary only if the object belongs to a set of grouped objects Group statement All objects in the set have the GroupIp of the parent object See Group statement on page 109 Values for Pen and Fill statements Values for the Pen and Fil1 statements refer to selections in the Tools palette Graphics can use all the Pen and Fill values illustrated below Ruling lines and table shadings use only the first seven pen fill values and 15 none The pen and fill patterns might look different on your system Pen Fill 0 2 3 5 6 8 9 11 12 14 None 15 Pen Fill Patterns in Tools palette Each Pen Fill or PenWidth substatement resets the MIF interpreter s corresponding current value If an Object statement doesn t include one of these statements the MIF interpreter uses the current default value for the object data In a FrameMaker document patterns arent associated directly
325. or gen erating PDF information lt DPDFAIINamedDestinations boolean gt Yes indicates that FrameMaker will create named destinations for all paragraphs and elements in the document this style of marking cre ates larger PDF files lt DPDFAIIPages boolean gt A statement to indicate whether to use the values in DPDF StartPage and DPDFEndPage to distill a range of pages When set to Yes FrameMaker distills all pages in the document lt DPDFBookmarks boolean gt Yes indicates that FrameMaker will create PDF bookmarks when you save as PDF lt DPDFConvertCMYK boolean gt A setting that determines whether to send CMYK or RGB color values to the Distiller This setting can be made and stored on documents in any platform However a setting of Yes only has an effect when saving as PDF on the Macintosh lt DPDFDestsMarked boolean gt Yes indicates that the paragraphs and elements that are targets of hypertext markers or cross references have been marked according to optimization rules for version 6 0 or later this style of marking makes it unnecessary to use lt DPDFCreateNamedDestinations Yes gt lt DPDFEndPage string gt A string for the page number fot the ending page in the page range _ to use this setting DPDFA11Pages must be set to No lt DPDFJobOptions string gt A string specifying the Distiller job options to use when distilling the document lt DPDFOpenBookmarkLevel n
326. ored graphic frames and table instances To create an empty body page To create the body page use the Page statement Then use the TextRect statement to create a text frame with dimen sions that are exactly the same as the text frame on the master page Give the text frame a unique ID Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 34 Using MIF Statements lt Page lt PageType BodyPage gt lt PageBackground Default gt lt TextRect lt ID 2 gt This text frame has a unique ID The body page dimensions match those of the master page lt ShapeRect 2 1 5 7 5 gt lt TRNumColumns 1 gt The column layout must also match lt TRColumnGap 0 0 gt gt end TextRect gt end Page If the dimensions specified by the ShapeRect statement and column layout specified by the TRNumColumns and TRColumnGap statements of the master page and body page do not match the body page will not use the page layout from the master page Instead the body page will use the page layout defined for the body page To create the text flow for the master page The text flow for the master page is not contained in the Page statement instead it is contained in a Text Flow statement that is linked to the text frame on the master page The Page statements must come before any Text Flow statements Link the text flow to the master page s text frame by using the Text Rect ID statement to refer to the text frame s unique ID lt TextFlow lt TFTag
327. ort command is invoked the current frame is the currently selected frame on that page If there is no currently selected frame the current frame is the page frame for that page Generic object statements All object descriptions consist of the object type generic object statements containing information that is common to all objects and statements containing information that is specific to that type of object This section describes the generic object statements Online manual Syntax ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 102 MIF Document Statements lt ID ID gt Object ID number lt GroupID ID gt ID of parent group object lt Unique ID gt ID persistent across sessions assigned when FrameMaker generates a MIF file used by the FDK client and should not be used by filters lt Pen integer gt Pen pattern for lines and edges see Values for Pen and Fill statements on page 103 lt Fill integer gt Fill pattern for objects see Values for Pen and Fill statements on page 103 lt PenWidth dimension gt Line and edge thickness lt ObColor tagstring gt lt ObTint percentage gt Applies color from Color Catalog see page 78 Applies a tint to the object color 100 is equivalent to the pure object color and 0 is equivalent to no color at all lt Separation integer gt lt Overprint boolean gt Applies color no longer used but written out by FrameMaker for backward compatib
328. otation 86 93 DStartPage 84 90 DSubscriptShift 88 94 DSubscriptSize 88 94 DSubscriptStretch 88 94 DSuperscriptShift 88 94 DSuperscriptSize 88 94 DSuperscriptStretch 88 94 DSymbolsOn 86 93 DTblFNoteAnchorPos 86 92 DTblFNoteAnchorPrefix 86 92 DTbIFNoteAnchorSuffix 86 92 DTbIFNoteLabels 86 92 DTbIFNoteNumberPos 86 92 DTblIFNoteNumberPrefix 86 92 DTbIFNoteNumberSuffix 86 92 DTbIFNoteNumStyle 86 92 DTbIFNoteTag 86 92 DTrapwiseCompatibility 87 94 239 DTwoSides 84 91 dummy 185 DUpdateDataLinksOnOpen 242 DUpdateTextInsetsOnOpen 88 95 DUpdateXRefsOnOpen 88 95 DUselnitStructure 165 DViewOnly 87 93 DViewOnlyNoOp 87 94 DViewOnlySelect 46 87 94 241 DViewOnlyWinBorders 87 94 DViewOnlyWinMenubar 87 94 DViewOnlyWinPalette 87 94 DViewOnlyWinPopup 87 94 DViewOnlyXRef 87 93 DViewRect 83 89 DViewScale 83 89 DVoMenuBar 88 97 DWideRubiSpaceForJapanese 213 DWideRubiSpaceForOther 213 DWindowRect 83 89 DXF files imported 111 DXmlDocType 164 DXmlEncoding 164 DXmlFileEncoding 164 293 DXmlPublicld 164 DXmilStandAlone 164 DXmlStyleSheet 164 DXmilSystemId 164 DXmlUseBOM 164 DXmlVersion 164 DXmlWellFormed 164 E EComponent 170 EDAlsoInsert 145 EDAttrChoice 148 EDAttrChoices 148 EDAttrDef 146 147 EDAttrDefinitions 146 EDAttrDefValue 148 EDAttrDefValues 148 EDAttrHidden 148 EDAttrName 147 EDAttrRange 148 EDAttrReadOnly 148 EDAttrRequired 148 EDAttrType 147 EDComments 146
329. oteTag string gt Paragraph and reference frame tag for document footnotes lt DFNoteMaxH dimension gt Maximum height allowed for document footnotes lt DFNoteRestart keyword gt Document footnote numbering control by page or text flow keyword can be one of PerPage PerFlow lt FNoteStartNum integer gt First document footnote number Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 92 MIF Document Statements lt DFNoteNumStyle keyword gt Document footnote numbering style keyword can be one of Arabic UCRoman LCRoman UCAlpha LCAlpha ZenLCAlpha ZenUCAlpha KanjiNumeric Kanjikazu BusinessKazu Custom lt DFNoteLabels string gt Characters to use in custom document footnote numbers lt DFNoteComputeMethod keyword gt Footnote numbering keyword can be one of Cont inue continue numbering from previous component in book Restart restart numbering lt DFNoteAnchorPos keyword gt Placement of document footnote number in text keyword can be one of PNXvTEPOY PLAT NBaoedte NZvPoxXpiutt lt DFNoteNumberPos keyword gt Placement of number in document footnote keyword can be one of FNSuperscript FNBaseline FNSubscript lt DFNoteAnchorPrefix string gt Prefix before document footnote number in text lt DFNoteAnchorSuffix string gt Suffix after document footnote number in text lt DFNoteNumberPrefix string gt Prefix before number in document foo
330. paration integer gt Exception color for columns or body rows no longer used but written out by FrameMaker for backward compatibility see Color statements on page 244 lt Tb1AltShadePeriod integer gt Number of consecutive columns rows that use Tb1XFil11 exception columns rows alternate with default body columns rows to form a repeating pattern Column properties lt TblWidth dimension gt Not generated by FrameMaker but can be used by filters to determine table width lt Tb1Column Each table must have at least one Tb1Column statement a column without a statement uses the format of the rightmost column lt Tb1lColumnNum integer gt Column number columns are numbered from left to right starting at 0 lt TblColumnWidth dimension gt Width of column See page 76 lt Tb1lColumnWidthP integer gt Not generated by FrameMaker but a temporary column width when fil tering proportionally spaced tables from another application converted to a fixed width when read in see page 76 Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 71 MIF Document Statements lt Tb1lColumnWidthA W W gt Not generated by FrameMaker but a width based on a cell width for fil ters only converted into a fixed width when read in First value is mini mum width second value is maximum width Values limit the range of a computed column width and are usually set to a wide range see page 76 lt TblColumnH Default pa
331. port graphic by reference on page 113 Position and size of object before rotation in the page or graphic frame coordinates lt BitMapDpi integer gt Scaling value for bitmap file ignored for FrameVector graphics lt ImportObFixedSize boolean gt Yes inhibits scaling of bitmap file see Size position and angle of imported graphics on page 111 ignored for FrameVector graphics lt FlipLR boolean gt Yes flips object about the vertical axis string Specifies the name of the facet used to describe the graphic imported by copying see Facet Formats for Graphics amp keyword Identifies the data type used in the facet see Facet Formats for Graph ics keywordcan be one of v for unsigned bytes i for integer data m for metric data amp X Data describing the imported graphic data must begin with the amper sand character see Facet Formats for Graphics Marks the beginning or end of data represented in hexadecimal see Facet Formats for Graphics EndInset End of the data describing the imported graphic lt NativeOrigin X Y gt Coordinates of the origin of the imported graphic within the page or frame applicable for graphics that use coordinate systems such as EPS lt ImportObEditor string gt Name of application to call to edit bitmap graphic inset or imported object ignored for FrameVector graphics Online manual
332. r defined marker XRefFormats Defines cross reference formats The XRefFormats statement contains XRefFor mat statements that define each cross reference format Document Controls document features such as page size margins and column layout Because the MIF interpreter assumes the same page defaults as the New command this section is nec essary only if you want to override those default settings BookComponent Provides the setup information for files generated from the document BookCompo nent statements describe the filename filename suffix file type and paragraph tags or marker types to include InitialAutoNums Provides a starting value for the autonumber series in a document Dictionary Lists allowed words in the document AFrames Describes all anchored frames in the document The AF rames statement contains Frame statements that define the contents ID number of each anchored frame Later in the MIF file where the document contents are described the MIF file must include an AF rame statement that corresponds to each F rame statement The AF rame statement identifies where a specific anchored frame appears in a text flow it need only supply the frame s ID number Tbls Describes all tables in the document The Tb1s statement contains Tb1 statements that define the contents of each table and its ID number Later in the MIF file where the docu ment contents are described the MIF file m
333. r statement defines a color It must appear within the ColorCatalog statement Note that MIF version 5 5 and later supports multiple color libraries The colorPant oneValue statement has been replaced by the colorFam ilyName and ColorInkName statements Syntax lt Color lt ColorTag tagstring gt Color tag name lt ColorCyan percentage gt Percentage of cyan 0 100 lt ColorMagenta percentage gt Percentage of magenta 0 100 lt ColorYellow percentage gt Percentage of yellow 0 100 lt ColorBlack percentage gt Percentage of black 0 100 lt ColorLibraryFamilyName string gt Color library name lt ColorLibraryInkName string gt Specifies name of the color library pigment Older versions of MIF that use ColorPantoneValue can still be read into MIF 5 5 and later The full ink name must be used Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 79 MIF Document Statements lt ColorAttribute keyword gt Identifies a default FrameMaker document color keywordcan be one of ColorIsBlack ColorIsWhite ColorIsRed ColorIsGreen ColorIsBlue ColorIsCyan ColorIsMagenta ColorIsYellow ColorIsReserved lt ColorTint percentage gt 100 indicates solid color less than 100 indicates a reduced per centage of the color lt ColorTintBaseColor string The name of the color from which the tint is derived If the base color does not exist in the document black will be used lt ColorOverprint boolean gt Yes i
334. r the decimal Therefore 1 point is expressed as hexadecimal 0x10000 or decimal 65536 The following table shows how to convert met ric values into equivalent measurement units To get this unit Divide the metric value by this number point 65536 inch 4718592 millimeter 185771 centimeter 1857713 pica 786432 didot 6997 cicero 839724 Character set in strings MIF string data uses the FrameMaker character set see the Quick Reference for your FrameMaker product MIF strings must begin with a left quotation mark ASCII character code 0x60 and end with a straight quotation mark ASCII character code 0x27 Within a string you can include any character in the FrameMaker character set However because a MIF file can contain only standard ASCII characters and because of MIF parsing requirements you must represent certain characters with backslash sequences Character Representation Tab t gt gt q Q nonstandard ASCII xnn All FrameMaker characters with values above the standard ASCII range greater than x7 are represented in a string by using xnn notation where nn represents the hexadecimal code for the character The hexadecimal digits must be followed by a space The following example shows a FrameMaker document line and its representation in a MIF string In a FrameMaker document In MIF Some symbols gt Some Qsymbols q gt
335. r to one in the middle The MIF interpreter attempted to solve the problem by disconnecting a text frame WARNING Circular text flow Don t use the document The MIF file defined a set of linked text frames resulting in a cir cular text flow The last text frame in the flow is linked to the first or to one in the middle The MIF interpreter was unable to solve the problem A FrameMaker document file will open but do not use it MIF Messages Online manual 237 MIF Compatibility MIF files are compatible across versions However some MIF statements have changed in version 7 0 of FrameMaker This appendix lists the MIF statements that are new or have changed in version 7 0 and describes how these state ments are treated when an earlier version reads a 7 0 MIF file The appendix also lists changes between versions 7 0 and 6 0 and between earlier version upgrades of FrameMaker MIF statements are listed by feature In general when previous versions of FrameMaker read new MIF statements the new MIF statements are stripped out and ignored For example if version 4 of FrameMaker reads a new 7 0 MIF statement in a 7 0 MIF file FrameMaker ignores the statement Changes between version 6 0 and 7 0 This section describes changes to MIF syntax between versions6 0 and 7 0 of FrameMaker Changes to structured PDF FrameMaker now includes attributes for graphic objects that are to be included when a document is saved as st
336. ragraph format for the column s heading cells in new tables lt PgfTag tagstring gt Applies format from Paragraph Catalog lt Pofssi Overrides Paragraph Catalog format as needed see page 58 gt End of Tb1ColumnH statement lt Tb1ColumnBody Default paragraph format for the column s body cells in new tables lt PgfTag tagstring gt Applies format from Paragraph Catalog lt Pgf gt Overrides Paragraph Catalog format as needed see page 58 gt End of Tb1ColumnBody statement lt Tb1ColumnF Default paragraph format for the column s footing cells in new tables lt PgfTag tagstring gt Applies format from Paragraph Catalog lt Pgf gt Overrides Paragraph Catalog format as needed see page 58 gt End of Tb1ColumnF statement End of Tb1Column statement lt Tb1lColumn gt More Tb1Column statements as needed one per column New table properties lt TblInitNumColumns integer gt Number of columns for new table A blInitNumHRows integer gt Number of heading rows for new table lt TblinitNumBodyRows integer gt Number of body rows for new tables lt TblInitNumFRows integer gt Number of footing rows for new tables Miscellaneous properties lt TblLocked boolean gt Yes means the table is part of a text inset that obtains its formatting properties from the source document End of TolFormat statement Usage T
337. re active and lt DViewOnlySelect No gt is specified clicking a cross reference does not highlight the marker The user cannot select text in the locked document By default clicking a cross reference does not highlight the marker associated with the destination text but the user can select text in the locked document Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 47 Using MIF Statements Disabling commands You can disable specific commands in a View Only document For example a hypertext author might disable copy and print commands for sensitive documents To disable a command you must supply the hex code called an fcode that internally represents that command in FrameMaker For example you can disable printing copying and unlocking the document by supplying the following statements lt DViewOnlyNoOp 0x313 gt Disable printing lt DViewOnlyNoOp 0x322 gt Disable copying lt DViewOnlyNoOp 0xF00 gt Disable unlocking the document The following table lists the files where you can find fcodes for commands For this version Look here UNIX SFMHOME fminit language configui Commands where language is the language in use such as usenglish Windows install_dir fminit configui cmds cfg where install_dir is the directory where FrameMaker is installed Macintosh fm_codes h which is available separately with the Frame Developer s Kit FDK See the online manual Customizing FrameMaker for more information about the com
338. re required to represent the character Note that each Unicode representation of a character uses up to seven ASCII characters For example a string of 255 Unicode characters could require as many as 1785 ASCII charactrers For example The following MIF statements show three possible Document Info fields lt PDFDocInfo lt Key Author gt lt Value Thomas Aquinas gt lt Key Title gt lt Value That the Soul Never Thinks Without an Image gt lt Key Subject gt lt Value Modern translation of the views of T A concerning cognition It is gt lt Value impossible for our intellect in its present state of being joined t gt lt Value o a body capable of receiving impressions actually to understand gt gt end of PDFDocInfo Syntax lt Document Document properties lt DNextUnique ID gt Refers to the next object witha lt Unique ID gt state ment generated by FrameMaker and should not be used by filters Window properties lt DViewRect X Y W H gt Position and size of document window based on position and size of the document region within containing win dow DViewRect takes precedence over DWindow Rect lt DWindowRect X Y W H gt Position and size of document window based on the con taining window including the title bar etc lt DViewScale percentage gt Current zoom setting Column properties lt DMargins L T R B gt Not generated by FrameMaker but used by filter
339. reference frame that specifies the new appearance of the math element you must give the frame the name of the built in element as it appears in the Equations palette To find the name of a built in element choose Insert Math Element from the equations pop up menu on the Equations palette Turn off Show Custom Only in the dialog box and scroll through the element names until you find the one you want To use the redefined element in an equation include the asin expression see page 186 along with the name of the reference frame as follows lt MathFullForm asin T Inverse Sine T char x gt end of MathFullForm For more information about including custom operators in equations see Custom operators on page 196 For more information about format codes see MathFullForm statement syntax on page 179 Math statement A Math statement describes an equation within a document It can appear at the top level or within a Page or Frame statement Syntax lt Math Generic object statements Information common to all objects see page 101 lt Angle integer gt Angle of rotation in degrees 0 90 180 270 lt ShapeRect L T W H gt Position and size of bounding rectangle before rotation in enclosing page or frame Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 MIF Equation Statements lt MathFullForm string gt Description of equation defined in MathFullForm statement syntax
340. relation to the binding of a book Finally graphic frames can be anchored outside the entire text frame or one column in the text frame As a result the following changes to 4 00 MIF have been made e The FrameType statement now supports the additional keywords Inside Outside and RunIntoParagraph e The AnchorAlign statement now supports the additional keywords Inside and Outside e Version 5 introduces the new AnchorBeside statement to indicate whether the graphic frame is anchored outside the entire text frame Text Frame or outside one column in the text frame Column e When editing FrameMaker document files from previous versions FrameMaker assumes that this statement has the value lt AnchorBeside Column gt For more information about the MIF syntax for graphic frames see Frame statement on page 107 Text inset and data link statements In previous versions Macintosh versions of FrameMaker allowed you to import text by reference with the Publish and Subscribe mechanism The MIF DataLink statement described text that was published or subscribed In version 5 the capability to import text by reference which creates a text inset is available on all platforms As a result of this new feature the new Text Inset statement replaces the Dat aLink statements for subscribers Note that the Dat aLink statements for publishers are still used The following table lists the old Dat aLink statements and the new Text Inset statement
341. rent version of FrameMaker does not support Warichu this class is not used by FrameMaker lt Sparel chars gt 21 Reserved for a user defined character class lt Spare2 chars gt 22 Reserved for a user defined character class lt Spare3 chars gt 23 Reserved for a user defined character class lt Spare4 chars gt 24 Reserved for a user defined character class lt Spare5 chars gt 25 Reserved for a user defined character class gt End of the CharClass statement Usage Assigning characters to a class identifies them in the succeeding tables so the various typographical rules can be specified for each class of character Any character that is not assigned to a class is automatically assigned to the lt others gt class When specifying classes you should not assign any characters to lt Others gt In fact it is not necessary to include a MIF statement for lt others gt In the following tables the 12th column position corresponds to the lt others gt class If you are using Asian system software you can enter the characters for each class directly in a text file Example The following is an example of a portion of a CharClass statement lt CharClass lt BegParentheses CLEITE gt lt EndParentheses I Ha gt lt NoLineBeginChar U 32H 2 H ANP A Sr gt gt end of CharClass SqueezeTable statement The SqueezeTable statement defines how to compress the space surrounding characters of each class Note that ea
342. represent Unicode characters via amp xHHHH where amp x opens the character code the character closes the character code and HHHH are as many hexadec imal values as are required to represent the character For more information see PDF Document Info on page 82 You can repeat paired groupings of Key and Value statements End of PDFBookInfo statement The BookFileInfostatement stores encoded packets of information XMP data that corresponds with values of fields in the File Info dialog box This statement can only appear in the Book statement Syntax lt BookFilelnfo gt Specifies the same information that appears in lt PDFBookInfo gt except it expresses these values as encoded data You should not try to edit this data BookFilelnfo also represents the values of the default fields for Creator Creation Date andMetaData Date For more information see Document File Info on page 82 lt encoded gt XMP information as encoded data which is generated by FrameMaker This information corresponds to the values set in the File Info dialog box For any book there can be an arbitrary number of XMP statements gt End of BookFilelnfo XML book statements In versions 7 0 and later FrameMaker supports XML import and export The following statements store information necessary to properly save a book as XML Syntax lt BXmlVersion string gt The XML version that was specifi
343. reter keeps the state of the most recently read statement Objects do not inherit rotation angles from other objects FrameMaker rotates objects as follows e Polygons polylines and Bezier curves are rotated around the center of the edge mass e Text lines are rotated around the TLOrigin point e Arcs are rotated around the center of the bounding rectangle of the arc not the bounding rectangle of the under lying ellipse The bounding rectangle is the smallest rectangle that encloses an object See your user s manual for more information about rotation e Other objects are rotated around the center of the object DashSegment values If the DashedStyle statement has a value of Dashed the following DashSegment statements describe the dashed pattern The value of a DashSegment statement specifies the length of a line segment or a gap in a dashed line See the online manual Customizing Adobe FrameMaker for information on changing default dashed patterns in UNIX versions of FrameMaker In Windows versions edit the maker ini file in the directory where FrameMaker is installed See Customizing Adobe FrameMaker for more information You can also define custom dash patterns For examples see Custom dashed lines on page 222 You cannot change dash patterns for Macintosh versions of FrameMaker Values for the RunaroundType and RunaroundGap statements The RunaroundType and RunaroundGap statements specify the styles used for the runaround p
344. rking with MIF files You can use the information in this chapter as guidelines for working with similar MIF statements Once you have experimented with basic MIF files you can learn about other MIF statements by creating small FrameMaker documents that contain a specific feature and saving these documents as MIF files Because FrameMaker writes complete and precise MIF code it is your ultimate source for learning about MIF statements For more information about document components not described in this chapter see the MIF statement descrip tions in MIF Document Statements MIF Book File Statements and MIF Statements for Structured Documents and Books Online manual MIF Document Statements 52 This chapter describes the structure of MIF document files and the MIF statements they can contain Most MIF state ments are listed in the order that they appear in a MIF file as described in the following section If you are looking for information about a particular statement use this manual s statement index to locate it If you are looking for information about a type of object such as a table or paragraph use the table of contents to locate the MIF state ments that describe the object MIF file layout The following table lists the main statements in a MIF document file in the order that FrameMaker writes them You must follow the same order that FrameMaker uses with the exception of the macro statements
345. rm char alpha gt B lt MathFullForm char beta gt L lt MathFullForm char bot gt x lt MathFullForm char chi gt lt MathFullForm char cpartial gt o lt MathFullForm char degree gt lt MathFullForm char delta gt A lt MathFullForm char Delta gt lt MathFullForm char emptyset gt lt MathFullForm char epsilon gt n lt MathFullForm char eta gt y lt MathFullForm char gamma gt rT lt MathFullForm char Gamma gt Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 183 MIF Equation Statements Example MathFullForm statement lt MathFullForm char Im gt S lt MathFullForm char infty gt l lt MathFullForm char iota gt K lt MathFullForm char kappa gt x lt MathFullForm char lambda gt A lt MathFullForm char Lambda gt lt MathFullForm char ldots gt lt MathFullForm char mu gt Vy lt MathFullForm char nabla gt y lt MathFullForm char nu gt w lt MathFullForm char omega gt Q lt MathFullForm char Omega gt lt MathFullForm char phi gt D lt MathFullForm char Phi gt x lt MathFullForm char pi gt ul lt MathFullForm char Pi gt n lt MathFullForm char pprime gt lt MathFullForm char prime gt y lt MathFullForm char psi gt Ww lt MathFullForm char Psi gt R lt MathFullForm char Re
346. rmally you would create an anchored frame in a document select the frame and then import this file The MIF statements to describe the bar chart can be created by a database publishing application that uses the values in a database to determine the size of the bars Market Shares 100 Mls Brand F Brand I 75 7 50 7 25 7 1986 1987 1988 1989 lt MIFFile 7 00 gt Generated by SomeChartPack 1 4 identifies this as a MIF file Chart title in a text line All objects in the chart are grouped so they have the same Group ID lt TextLine lt GroupID 1 gt lt Font lt FFamily Times gt lt FSize 14 gt lt FPlain Yes gt lt FBold Yes gt lt FDX 0 gt lt FDY 0 gt lt FDAX 0 gt lt FNoAdvance No gt gt lt TLOrigin 1 85 0 21 gt lt TLAlignment Center gt lt String Market Shares gt gt end of TextLine Boxes for Brand F and Brand I legends lt Rectangle lt GroupID 1 gt lt Fill 1 gt lt ShapeRect 1 36 0 33 0 38 0 13 gt gt lt Rectangle lt GroupID 1 gt lt Fill 4 gt lt ShapeRect 1 36 0 54 0 38 0 13 gt gt Text lines for Brand F and Brand I legends lt TextLine lt GroupID 1 gt lt Font lt FSize 12 gt lt FPlain Yes gt gt lt TLOrigin 1 80 0 46 gt lt TLAlignment Left gt lt String Brand F gt gt Second text line inherits the current font from the preceding text line lt TextLine lt GroupID 1 gt lt TLOrigin 1 80 0 67 gt
347. roperties below these values lt PgfFIndent dimension gt Minimum first indent allowed in document lt PgfLIndent dimension gt Minimum left indent allowed in document lt PgfRIndent dimension gt Minimum right indent allowed in document lt PgfSpBefore dimension gt Minimum space before allowed in document lt PgfSpAfter dimension gt Minimum space after allowed in document lt PgfLeading dimension gt Minimum leading allowed in document lt FSize dimension gt Minimum font size allowed in document lt FDW dimension gt Minimum character spread allowed in document lt TSX dimension gt Minimum horizontal position of tab stop lt PgfCellLMargin dimension gt Minimum left cell margin for first paragraph in a cell lt PgfCellBMargin dimension gt Minimum bottom cell margin for first paragraph in a cell lt PgfCellTMargin dimension gt Minimum top cell margin for first paragraph in a cell lt PgfCellRMargin dimension gt Minimum right cell margin for first paragraph in a cell gt Endof DFCLMinimums statement Endof Document statement Text in structured documents TextLine statement Text lines cannot contain elements ParaLine statement The ParaLine statement defines a line within a paragraph It must appear in a Para statement Syntax lt ParaLine lt ElementBegin gt Begin structural element see page 161 lt ElementEnd
348. roperties of objects e If the RunaroundType statement is set to Contour text flows around objects in the shape of the contours of the objects The RunaroundGap statement specifies the distance between the objects and the text that flows around them e If the RunaroundType statement is set to Box text flows around objects in the shape of boxes surrounding the objects The RunaroundGap statement specifies the distance between the objects and the text that flows around them e If the RunaroundType statement is set to None text doesn t flow around objects and the value specified by the RunaroundGap statement is ignored Objects inherit the values of these statements from previous objects Since these statements are used only to change the inherited value from a previous object the statements are not needed for every object For example if you write out a MIF file not all objects will contain these statements If these statements do not appear in an object or MIF file the following rules apply e Ifan object does not contain the RunaroundType statement or the RunaroundGap statement FrameMaker uses the values from the previous RunaroundType and RunaroundGap statements e Ifno previous RunaroundType and RunaroundGap statements exist in the MIF file FrameMaker uses the default values lt RunaroundType None gt and lt RunaroundGap 6 0 gt Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 105 MIF Document Statements e For example if the lt Ru
349. rrow char x char x gt x x lt MathFullForm ni char x char x gt xx lt MathFullForm notequal char x char x gt xx lt MathFullForm notin char x char x gt x x lt MathFullForm notsubset char x char x gt x x lt MathFullForm oplus char x char x gt x x lt MathFullForm otimes char x char x gt x x lt MathFullForm parallel char x char x gt xlx lt MathFullForm perp char x char x gt x x lt MathFullForm plus char x char x gt x x lt MathFullForm plus char x minus char x gt xox lt MathFullForm propto char x char x gt x gt x lt MathFullForm rightarrow char x char x gt x gt x lt MathFullForm Rightarrow char x char x gt Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 192 MIF Equation Statements Example MathFullForm statement x Xx lt MathFullForm sim char x char x gt xCx lt MathFullForm subset char x char x gt xCx lt MathFullForm subseteq char x char x gt xDx lt MathFullForm supset char x char x gt xDx lt MathFullForm supseteq char x char x gt xx lt MathFullForm times char x char x gt XVX lt MathFullForm vee char x char x gt XAX lt MathFullForm wedge char x char x gt Large operators Large operator expressions have one primary operand In addition they can have one or two range operands The following table contains an exampl
350. rted from a flow in the body page or the reference page of the source document keywordcan be one of BodyPage ReferencePage lt TiFlowName string gt If the text inset is not imported from the main flow specifies the tag of the flow to import if the source file is an edition set to Macintosh edition lt TiFormatRemoveOverrides boolean gt When reformatting to use the current document s formats Yes specifies that format overrides are removed lt TiFormatRemovePageBreaks boolean gt When reformatting to use the current document s formats Yes specifies that manual page breaks are removed 2 End of TiF low statement Usage If the imported text flow is not the main flow of the source document the TiPageSpace and TiFlowName substate ments identify the flow in the source document that serves as the imported text flow Text imported from another document can obtain formatting information from the original document if the TiFormatting statement is set to Ti Source or from the current document if the TiFormatting statement is set to TiEnclosing Ifthe imported text flow is reformatted to use the current document s formats the TiFormatRemoveOverrides substatement specifies whether or not format overrides in the text are removed and the TiFormatRemovePage Breaks substatement specifies whether or not manual page breaks in the text are removed e Ifthe imported text flow retains the formatting of the source docu
351. ruc tured PDE A graphic object can have an arbitrary number of attributes Each attribute is stored in an Object At tribute statement This statement contains one Tag statement and an arbitrary number of value statements General XML support In versions 7 0 and later documents and books store general XML information such as XML version encoding and whether the XML is based on a DTD This information is stored in the following statements Book statements Document statements BXmIDocType DXmIDocType BXmlEncoding DXmlEncoding BXmIFileEncoding DXmIFileEncoding BXmIPublicld DXmIPublicld BXmlStandAlone DXmlStandAlone BXmlStyleSheet DXmIStyleSheet BXmlSystemld DXmlSystemld BXmlUseBOM DXmlUseBOM BXmlVersion DXmlVersion BXmIWellFormed DXm WellFormed XML Namespaces In versions 7 0 and later elements in structured FrameMaker documents now store namespace information The ENamespace statement contains an arbitrary number of namespace declaration Each namespace declaration consists of one ENamespacePrefix statement and one ENamemespacePath statement Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 238 MIF Compatibility XMP job control packets FrameMaker book and document files now store information to support XMP the Adobe standard for collaboration and electronic job control MIF stores XMP data in a series of encoded XMP statements that contain the data You should not try to edit this data manually FrameMaker generates the encoding when you save
352. rule statements as needed gt Endof EDPrefixRules statement EDSuffixRules statement A suffix is a fixed text range that appears at the end of an element after the element s content The EDSuffixRules statement defines the formatting properties to be applied to a suffix in different contexts It must appear in an ElementDef statement It is valid only for container elements An EDSuffixRules statement can contain zero or more substatements describing level and context format rules Syntax lt EDSuffixRules Begin suffix rules any combination of level and context format rules lt LevelFormatRule gt lt ContextFormatRule gt A level format rule see LevelFormatRule statement on page 152 A context format rule see ContextFormatRule statement on page 151 lt ContextFormatRule gt Additional context format rule statements as needed lt LevelFormatRule gt Additional level format rule statements as needed Endof EDSuffixRules statement EDStartElementRules statement The EDStartElementRules statement defines a special set of format rules to be applied to the first paragraph in a parent element The EDSt artElementRules statement must appear in an Element Def statement It is valid only for container elements An EDStartElementRules statement can contain zero or more substatements describing level and context format rules Syntax lt EDStartEl
353. ry convert data lines to the appropriate facet data format Unsigned bytes should follow the conventions described in Unsigned bytes on page 250 and metric data should follow the conventions described in Metric data on page 250 When writing the facet data your application can use as many lines as necessary Each line should be short enough to read with a text editor in case you need to debug the graphic inset file There are no counts offsets or facet size limits Facet data in hexadecimal must contain valid hexadecimal digits only 0 9 A F and cannot contain backslash characters When you write a facet containing hexadecimal data do not write newline characters r or n at the end of the lines Graphic insets cannot contain any blank lines within or between facets Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 257 Facet Formats for Graphics When reading a graphic inset your application need only scan for facet name lines and then read the appropriate facets Since facets begin and end with the facet_name token your program should read facet data until it encounters an equal sign in column 1 If your application encounters the characters x when reading facet data it should process the subsequent data as hexadecimal until it encounters another x If your facet contains a mix of ASCII characters and hexadecimal data it might be simpler for you to represent the ASCII characters as character codes in hexadecimal For examp
354. s respectively The space between columns cannot exceed 50 inches FrameMaker can adjust the height of the text columns to evenly distribute the text in the columns if the TRCo1umn Balance statement is set to Yes A text frame also contains the specifications for the placement of side heads The width and location of the side head in a text frame are specified by the TRSideheadWidth and TRSideheadPlacement statements The side head area cannot be wider than 50 inches In the TRSideheadP lacement statement the Inside and Outside settings corre spond to the side closer to the binding and the side farther from the binding respectively The spacing between the side head and the text columns in the text frame is specified by the TRSideheadGap statement The spacing cannot exceed 50 inches TRNext indicates the ID of the next text frame in the flow If there is no next Text Rect use a lt TRNext 0 gt statement or omit the entire TRNext statement The text frame is rotated by the value specified in an Angle statement The default angle is 0 Text flows Text flows contain the actual text of a FrameMaker document In a MIF file text flows are contained in Text Flow statements Typically the Text Flow statement consists of a list of embedded Para statements that contain paragraphs special characters table and graphic frame anchors and graphic objects When the MIF interpreter encounters the first Text Flow statement it sets up a default text flo
355. s 88 95 change bars 86 93 document specific menu bars 88 97 footnotes 85 91 graphics display turning on and off 86 93 hyphenation and spell checking language default 87 94 line breaks 84 91 margins 83 89 number of text columns per page 84 89 page numbering 84 90 page size 84 89 references 88 95 showing hiding conditional text 85 91 small caps 88 94 Smart Quotes 84 91 Smart Spaces 84 91 subscript superscript 88 94 two sided layout 84 91 view options 86 93 document window customizing 45 placement of 83 89 downbrace 187 DPageGrid 86 93 DPageNumStyle 84 90 DPagePointStyle 84 90 DPageRounding 84 91 DPageScrolling 87 93 DPageSize 84 89 DParity 84 91 DPDFAIINamedDestinations 95 DPDFAIIPages 95 DPDFBookmarks 95 DPDFConvertCMYK 95 DPDFDestsMarked 95 DPDFEndPage 95 DPDFJobOptions 95 DPDFOpenBookmarkLevel 95 DPDFOpenFit 95 DPDFOpenPage 95 DPDFOpenZoom 95 DPDFPageHeight 95 DPDFPageSizeSet 96 DPDFPageWidth 96 DPDFRegMarks 96 DPDFSaveSeparate 96 DPDFStartPage 96 DPDFStructure 96 DPDFStructureDefined 96 DPrintProcessColor 87 94 DPrintSeparations 87 94 DPrintSkipBlankPages 88 94 DPunctuationChars 85 91 DRubiAlignAtBounds 213 DRubiFixedSize 213 DRubiOverhang 213 DRubiSize 213 DRulersOn 86 93 DSeparateInclusions 165 DSGMLAppName 165 DShowAllConditions 85 91 DSmallCapsSize 88 94 DSmallCapsStretch 88 95 DSmartQuotesOn 84 91 DSmartSpacesOn 84 91 DSnapGrid 86 93 DSnapR
356. s converted to a row of table cells No specifies that each paragraph in the imported text is converted to a table cell lt TiTblNumCols num gt If each paragraph is converted to a separate cell specifies the num ber of columns in the table lt TiTblSep string gt If each paragraph is converted to a row of cells specifies the charac ter used to indicate the contents of each cell lt TiTblNumSep num gt If characters are used to indicate the contents of each cell specifies the number of these characters used as a single divider lt TiTblNumHdrRows num gt Specifies the number of heading rows in the table lt TiTblHeadersEmpty boolean gt Yes indicates that the imported text is not inserted in the heading rows Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 133 MIF Document Statements lt TiTblTxtEncoding keyword gt Specifies the text encoding for the source file keyword can be one of TilsoLatin TiASCII TiANSI TiMacASCII TiJIS TiShiftJIS TiEUC TiBig5 TIEUCCNS TiGB TiHZ TiKorean End of Ti Text Table statement Usage When imported text is converted to a tabular format each paragraph can be converted into either a cell or a row of cells e Ifeach paragraph is converted to a table cell the Ti Tb11 sByRow substatement is set to No The number of columns in the table is specified by the TiTb1NumCols substatement e If each paragraph is converted to a row of cells the Ti Tb1IsByRow substatement is se
357. s that replace them MIF 4 00 MIF 5 00 lt DataLink gt lt TextInset gt lt DLSource pathname gt lt TiSrcFile pathname gt lt DLParentFormats Yes gt lt TiFormatting TiEnclosing gt lt DLParentFormats No gt lt TiFormatting TiSource gt lt OneLinePerRec boolean gt lt EOLisEOP boolean gt lt MacEdition integer gt lt TiMacEditionld integer gt lt DataLinkEnd gt lt TextInsetEnd gt If you open a 5 00 MIF file with text insets in a version 4 FrameMaker product the older version of the product will strip out the text inset MIF statements The text inset becomes plain text that cannot be updated For more information about the MIF syntax for text insets see Text insets text imported by reference on page 127 For information about the MIF syntax for publishers see Publishers on page 133 Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 244 MIF Compatibility Structured document statements In version 5 FrameMaker does not support statements for structured documents such as ElementDefCatalogand DElementBordersoOn FrameMaker strips these statements when reading in a MIF file When writing out a MIF file FrameMaker does not write these statements FrameVector graphic format In version 5 a new internal graphic format FrameVector is supported for imported vector graphics The specifica tions for this facet are described in FrameVector Facet Format Changes between versio
358. s to define the dashed pattern Empty group ID The group ID specified in a Group statement has no corre sponding defined objects with a matching group ID Expected comma identifier left parenthesis right parenthe sis right quote The MIF file contains a syntax error Following lt TabStop gt statements will determine actual num ber of tabs The PgfNumTabs statement is present in MIF for use by other programs that read MIF files it is not used by the MIF interpreter When the MIF interpreter reads a MIF file it counts the number of TabSt op statements to determine the number of tabs stops in a paragraph Frames are nested too deeply over 10 skipping statement There are too many nested frames The maximum nesting depth is 10 Graphic frame has an invalid lt Angle gt attribute An invalid value is specified by the Angle statement for a graphic frame Insufficient memory FrameMaker cannot allocate enough memory for one of its work buffers In UNIX versions try to free some swap space and restart FrameMaker In the Macintosh or Windows versions try quitting other applications and closing other open windows then start FrameMaker again Invalid opcode op_code The MIF file contains a syntax error Macro IncludeFile nesting too deep The define or include statements specify too many nested levels of statements Missing dimension No name was given for the cross referenc
359. s to spec ify text margins ignored unless DColumns is specified Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 84 MIF Document Statements lt DColumns integer gt Not generated by FrameMaker but used by filters to spec ify number of columns lt DColumnGap dimension gt Not generated by FrameMaker but used by filters to spec ify column gap lt DPageSize W H gt Document s default page size and orientation if W is less than H the document s orientation is portrait otherwise it is landscape Pagination lt DStartPage integer gt Starting page number lt DPageNumStyle keyword gt lt DPagePointStyle keyword gt Page numbering style keywordcan be one of Arabic UCRoman LCRoman UCAlpha LCAlpha ZenLCAlpha ZenuCAlpha KanjiNumeric Kanjikazu BusinessKazu Point page number style keywordcan be one of Arabic UCRoman LCRoman UCAlpha LCAlpha lt DTwoSides boolean gt Yes specifies two sided layout lt DParity keyword gt Specifies whether first page is left or right page keywordcan be one of FirstLeft FirstRight lt DPageRounding keyword gt Method for removing blank pages or modifying total page count before saving or printing keywordcan be one of DeleteEmptyPages MakePageCountEven MakePageCountOdd DontChangePageCount lt DFrozenPages boolean gt Yes if Freeze Pagination is on Document format properties lt DSmartQuotesOn boole
360. s to the first paragraph Subsequent paragraphs use the same properties unless otherwise specified How FrameMaker identifies MIF files A MIF file must be identified by a MIFFile or Book statement at the beginning of the file otherwise FrameMaker simply reads the file as a text file All other statements are optional that is a valid MIF file can contain only the MIFFile statement Other document objects can be added as needed FrameMaker provides a set of default objects if a MIF file does not supply them MIF statement syntax The statement descriptions in this manual use the following conventions to describe syntax lt token data gt token data where token represents one of the MIF statement names such as Pgf listed in the MIF statement descriptions later in this manual and data represents one or more numbers a string a token or nested statements Markup statements are always delimited by angle brackets lt gt macro statements are not For the syntax of macro statements see Macro statements on page 55 A token is an indivisible group of characters that identify a reserved word in a MIF statement Tokens in MIF are case sensitive A token cannot contain white space characters such as spaces tabs or newlines For example the following MIF statement is invalid because the token contains white space characters lt Un its Uin gt Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 5 Introduction When the MIF interpreter finds whi
361. s when a format rule clause applies A change list can specify a change to just a single paragraph property or it can specify changes to a long list of properties Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 155 MIF Statements for Structured Documents and Books A format change list can be named or unnamed A named change list appears in the Format Change List Catalog Format rule clauses that use a named change list specify its name or tag Multiple rule clauses can specify the same named change list An unnamed change list appears in a rule clause It is used only by the rule clause in which it appears FmtChangeListCatalog statement The Fmt ChangeListCatalog statement defines the contents of the Format Change List Catalog A document can have only one Fmt ChangeListCatalog statement which must appear at the top level in the order given in MIF file layout on page 11 Syntax lt FmtChangeListCatalog Begin Format Change List Catalog lt FmtChangeList gt Defines an element see FmtChangeList statement next lt FmtChangeList gt Additional statements as needed gt Endof FmtChangeListCatalog statement FmtChangeList statement The Fmt ChangeList statement creates a format change list definition The Fmt ChangeList statement for a named change list must appear in the Fmt ChangeListCatalog statement The rmtChangeList statement for a unnamed change list must appear in the format rule clause that uses it A
362. se in the default catalog they do not supplement the default formats If you do not supply a Paragraph Catalog in a MIF file the MIF interpreter provides a default Paragraph Catalog with predefined paragraph formats If a Pgf statement provides only the name of a paragraph format the MIF interpreter supplies default values for the rest of the paragraph properties when it reads in the MIF file Applying a paragraph format To apply a format from the Paragraph Catalog to a paragraph use the PgfTag statement to include the format tag name within the Para statement For example to apply the previously defined format 1 Heading to a paragraph use the following statements lt Para lt PgfTag 1Heading gt lt ParaLine lt String This line has the format called 1Heading gt gt end of ParaLine gt end of Para To apply a format from the Paragraph Catalog and then locally override some properties use a partial Pgf statement within the Para statement The following MIF example applies the paragraph format 1Heading then changes the alignment lt Para lt PgfTag 1Heading gt lt Pgf lt PgfAlignment Center gt gt end of Pgf lt ParaLine lt String This line is centered gt gt end of ParaLine gt end of Para To locally define a paragraph format include a complete Pgf statement within the Para statement lt Para lt Pef lt PgfTag 2Heading gt lt PgfUseNextTag Yes gt lt PgfNextTag Body
363. sh versions start an absolute pathname with a slash and the volume name For example to include the file MyFile from the volume MacVolume specify the pathname MacVolume MyFile e For Windows versions start an absolute pathname with the drive name For example to include the file myfile doc from the directory mydir on the c drive specify the pathname c mydir myfile doc Don t start an absolute path with a slash If you specify a relative pathname the MIF interpreter searches for the file to include in the directory or folder that contains the file being interpreted In UNIX versions of FrameMaker the MIF interpreter also searches the SFMHOME fminit and the FMHOME fminit filters directories for a file with a relative pathname In general you would use an include statement to read a header file containing define statements that a filter needs to translate a file Isolate the data in a header file to simplify the process of changing important mappings You can also use an include statement to read in a template file containing formatting information Your application can then simply generate a document s text For more information see Including template files on page 43 Conditional text FrameMaker documents can contain conditional text In a MIF file the condition tags are defined by a condition statement which specifies whether the condition tag is hidden or shown The condition tags for a document are stored in a ConditionC
364. sition and size of arc in points rectangle Start angle in degrees metric Length of arc in degrees where positive values correspond to clockwise arcs and negative values correspond to counterclockwise arcs metric Size of data in bytes 24 Example 85 00000018 00490000 00270000 007C0000 008C0000 00000000 005A0000 for an arc with the following specifications x position 73 points 0049 y position 39 points 0027 width 124 points 007C height 140 points 008C start angle 0 arc angle length 90 Framelmage graphic imported within this graphic 0x86 Specification by data type Rectangle byte bitmap Description of data Position and size of the bounding rectangle in points rectangle Is the object flipped left right byte 0 no 1 yes Size of data in bytes Framelmage data bitmap Variable Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 282 FrameVector Facet Format Example 86 00000035 00F20000 00740000 00080000 00080000 00 59A66A95 00000008 00000008 00000001 00000000 00000002 00000000 00000000 80 OE FF 20 for an imported bitmap graphic of a black square with the following specifications x position 242 points y position 116 points width 8 points height 8 points flipped left right no Note The bitmap is scaled to the size of the bounding rectangle Beginning of text line 0x87 Specification by
365. specify the document page size pagination style view options current user preferences and other global document information The user sets these properties by using various commands such as the Document command the View command the Normal Page Layout command and others Ina MIF file global document properties are specified as substatements in a Document statement If you do not provide these property statements the MIF interpreter assumes the properties specified in NewTemp late For infor mation on defaults specified in templates see page 3 The BookComponent statement specifies setup information for files generated from the document The Dictionary statement contains the user s list of allowed words for the document Document statement The Document statement defines global document properties A document can have only one Document statement which must appear at the top level in the order given in MIF file layout on page 52 A Document statement does not need any of these property substatements which can occur in any order It can also contain additional substatements describing standard equation formats See MIF Equation Statements Document File Info For version 7 0 and later FrameMaker stores file information in packets XMP of encoded data This data can be used by applications that support XMP In MIF these data packets are expressed in the lt DocFileInfo gt statement This data is generated by FrameMa
366. sponds to Spacing values in the Position Settings dia log box BstringB Font angle for example Italic c integerc Alignment for horizontal lists and matrices O baseline 1 top 2 bottom C integerC Character case D integerD Double underline O no underline 1 underline f stringf Font family for example Times f iintegeri Display format number 0 1 2 j integerj Alignment for vertical lists and matrices O center 1 left 2 right 3 at equal symbol 4 left of equal symbol l metricl Extra space to left of expression corresponds to Spacing values in the Position Settings dialog box M In a matrix makes all column widths equal boolean m In a matrix makes all row heights equal boolean n No automatic parentheses boolean N integerN Numeric underline O no underline 1 underline o integero Outline O no outline 1 outline O integerO Overline O no overline 1 overline qstringq Color name for example Red rmetricr Extra space to right of expression corresponds to Spacing values in the Position Settings dialog box R integerR Shadow 0 no shadow 1 shadow s decimals Character size in points for example s12 00s S integers Strikeout O no strikeout 1 strikeout tmetrict Extra space at top of expression corresponds to Spacing values in the Position Settings dialog box TstringT Name of custom element from referenc
367. st precede hyphen lt Hyp henMinSuffix integer gt Minimum number of letters that must follow a hyphen lt Hyp henMinWord integer gt Minimum length of a hyphenated word lt Pgf LetterSpace boolean gt Spread characters to fill line lt Pgf inWordSpace integer gt lt PgfOptWordSpace integer gt Minimum word spacing as a percentage of a standard space in the paragraph s default font Optimum word spacing as a percentage of a standard space in the paragraph s default font lt PgfMaxWordSpace integer gt Maximum word spacing as a percentage of a standard space in the paragraph s default font Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 160 MIF Statements for Structured Documents and Books lt PgfLanguage keyword gt Language to use for spelling and hyphenation keywordcan be one of NoLanguage USEnglish UKEnglish German SwissGerman French CanadianFrench Spanish Catalan Italian Portuguese Brazilian Danish Dutch Norwegian Nynorsk Finnish Swedish lt PgfTopSeparator string gt Name of reference frame from reference page to put above paragraph lt PgfTopSepAtIndent boolean gt Yes if the position of the frame specified by the Pgf TopSeparator statement is at the current left indent lt PgfTopSepOffset dimension gt Position at which to place the reference frame above the para graph lt PgfBotSeparator string gt Name of
368. stants for character values See Char statement on page 123 TextRect statement The TextRect statement defines a text frame It can appear at the top level or in a Page or Frame statement Syntax lt TextRect Generic object statements Information common to all objects see page 101 lt ShapeRect L T W H gt Position and size of object before rotation in page or graphic frame coordinates lt RNext integer gt ID of next text frame in flow lt RNumColumns integer gt Number of columns in the text frame 1 10 lt RColumnGap dimension gt Space between columns in the text frame 0 50 lt A RColumnBalance boolean gt RSideheadWidth dimension gt Yes means columns in the text frame are automatically adjusted to the same height Width of side head area 0 50 A RSideheadGap dimension gt Gap between side head area and body text area 0 50 A RSideheadPlacement keyword gt Placement of side head in text frame keywordcan be one of Left Right Inside Outside Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 119 MIF Document Statements lt TextFlow See Text flows next gt End of TextRect statement Usage A text frame can contain one or more text columns up to ten text columns The number of columns and the space between columns are specified by the TRNumColumns and TRColumnGap statement
369. start FrameMaker again Unable to store marker The marker table is full In UNIX versions FrameMaker is proba bly running out of swap space Try to free some swap space and restart FrameMaker In the Macintosh or Windows versions try quitting other applications and closing other open windows then start FrameMaker again Unbalanced right angle bracket A right angle bracket gt was found that has no corresponding left angle bracket lt Unexpected opcode A statement was found in a context where it is not valid for example an FF amily statement ina Document statement Unexpected right angle bracket A right angle bracket gt was found where a data value was expected or was found outside a statement Unknown font angle The requested font angle is not available Unknown font family The requested font family is not available Unknown font variation The requested font variation is not available Unknown font weight The requested font weight is not available Unknown PANTONE name string The name specified in the ColorPantoneValue statement is not the name of a valid PANTONE color Value of n out of range m A statement s data value was too large or too small WARNING Circular text flow was found and cut The MIF file defined a set of linked text frames resulting in a cir cular text flow The last text frame in the flow is linked to the first o
370. statement must appear in a Tb1Catalog or in a Tbl statement A TblFormat statement contains property substatements that define a table s properties Table property statements can appear in any order Syntax Basic properties lt TblFormat lt TblTag tagstring gt Table format tag name lt TblLIndent dimension gt Left indent for the table relative to the table s containing text column has no effect on right aligned tables lt TblRIndent dimension gt Right indent for the table relative to the table s containing text column has no effect on left aligned tables lt Tb1lSpBefore dimension gt Space above table lt TblSpAfter dimension gt Space below table Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 69 MIF Document Statements lt TblAlignment keyword gt Horizontal alignment within text column or text frame keywordcan be one of Left Center Right Inside Outside See page 72 lt TblPlacement keyword gt Vertical placement of table within text column keyword can be one of Anywhere Float ColumnTop PageTop LPageTop RPageTop lt Tb1lBlockSize integer gt lt Tb1lCellMargins L T R B gt Widow orphan rows for body rows Left top right bottom default cell margins lt TblTitlePlacement keyword gt Table title placement keyword can be one of InHeader InFooter None lt TblTitlePgf1 Paragraph format of title for a new table created with the table format
371. subscribers and publishers are described by different statements e Subscribers to text editions are described by Text Inset statements e Subscribers to graphics editions are described by Import Object statements see ImportObject statement on page 110 e Publishers are described by DataLink statements see Publishers on page 133 If a text inset is created by subscribing to an edition the TiMacEdit ionId statement provides information for compatibility with Macintosh standards integer points to the resource ID for the sect and alis resources in the resource fork This information is replicated inside the MIF description but the information in the resource fork takes precedence over the MIF data If this field is missing it uses the filename specified in the TiSrcFile statement For more information see the chapter on Edition Manager in Inside Macintosh Volume VI If the source document for a text inset is not an edition the TiMacEditionId statement is set to 0 Record of the filter used to import text The Text Inset statement contains a record to identify the filter that was used to import text by reference FrameMaker uses the record to find the correct filter to use when updating the text inset The record is specified in the Ti ImportHint statement and uses the following syntax Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 129 MIF Document Statements record_vers vendor format_id platform filter_vers filter_name Note
372. such as a filter or a database publishing application to generate a MIF file you have two ways to include all formatting information in the file e Generate all paragraph formats and other formatting information directly from the application e Create a template document in FrameMaker save it as a MIF file and include the template file in your generated MIF file It s usually easier to create a template in FrameMaker than it is to generate the formatting information directly To create the template as a MIF file do the following 1 Create the template in FrameMaker and save it as a MIF file 2 Edit the MIF file to preserve the formatting catalogs and the page definitions and delete the text flow 3 Generate the text flow for your document and use the include statement to read the formatting information from the template Creating the template Create the template document in FrameMaker Define the paragraph and character formats table formats variable and cross reference formats master pages and any other formatting and page layout information that your document needs Generally a template contains some sample lines that illustrate each format in the document Save the completed template as a MIF file For more information about creating templates see your user s manual Editing the MIF file You need to edit the resulting MIF file to extract just the formatting and page layout information 1 Delete the MIFFile statement
373. t lt VariableName tagstring gt Name of variable lt VariableDef string gt Variable definition gt End of VariableFormat statement lt VariableFormat gt Additional statements as needed End of VariableFormats statement Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 81 MIF Document Statements Usage VariableName contains the name of the variable used later in the MIF file by variable to position the variable in text VariableDef contains the variable s definition A system defined variable definition consists of a sequence of building blocks text and character formats A user defined variable consists of text and character formats only The system variables for the current page number and running headers and footers can only appear on a master page in an untagged text flow You cannot insert any variables in a tagged text flow on a master page You can insert variables anywhere else in a text flow For more information about variables and the building blocks they can contain see your user s manual or the online Help system Cross references A FrameMaker document can contain cross references that refer to other portions of the document or to other documents A cross reference has a marker that indicates the source where the cross reference points and a format that determines the text and its formatting in the cross reference All cross reference formats in a document are contained in on
374. t next lt Para gt Defines a paragraph see Para statement on page 121 gt End of Text F Low statement Usage Most MIF generators will put all document text in one Text Flow statement However if there are subsequent TextF low statements the interpreter assumes they have the same settings current paragraph format current font and so forth as the previous text flow To divert the flow into a new unlinked text frame there must be a Text Rect ID statement in the first ParaLine statement of the new Text Flow statement see page 121 The Text Rect ID statement resets the current text frame definition so subsequent text is placed within the identified text frame this is necessary only if you want to reset the text frame defaults If the text flow contains side heads the TFSideheads statement is set to Yes The PgfPlacement Style statement under paragraph properties identifies the side heads and the Text Rect statement contains specifications for their size and placement For information about text flow properties see your user s manual Not es statement The Notes statement defines all of the footnotes that will be used in a table title cell or text flow It can appear at the top level or at the beginning of a Tol Tit leContent CellContent or Text Flow statement Syntax lt Notes lt FNote lt ID ID gt Unique ID lt Unique ID gt ID persistent across sessions assigned
375. t MathFullForm diacritical 4 0 0 0 0 times char A char B gt AB The diacritical expression is not backward compatible When an earlier version previous to 4 x of FrameMaker reads a MIF file saved in version 4 or later of FrameMaker any equations that contain diacritical expressions are lost You should edit any MathFullForm statements that contain diacritical expressions before opening the file in earlier versions of FrameMaker For more information see Math statements on page 245 dummy The dummy expression describes a dummy variable that you can use as a placeholder in equations For example in the following equation i is a dummy variable i 2 3 4 5x l x x x x Online manual 185 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 186 MIF Equation Statements The dummy expression has the same syntax as the char expression and can contain the same character symbols or names Example MathFullForm statement x lt MathFullForm dummy x gt Operator expressions Operator expressions take at least one expression as an operand There are no restrictions on the complexity of operator expressions and they are not restricted by any concepts of domain or typing Unary operators Unary operators have one expression as an operand Three of the unary operators id lparen and rparen have multiple display formats The following table contains an example of each unary operator in all of its display formats w
376. t UnitSymbol numerals gt lt RomanSpace numerals gt lt RomanChar numerals gt lt ParenBeginWariChu numerals gt lt ParenEndWariChu numerals gt lt Sparel numerals gt lt Spare2 numerals gt lt Spare3 numerals gt lt Spare4 numerals gt lt Spare5 numerals gt gt End of SoreadTable statement The possible values for numerals are COMNDUABRWN O 11 No spread Spread the first character of the pair by 1 2 em Spread the second character of the pair by 1 2 em Spread the first character of the pair by 1 4 em Spread the second character of the pair by 1 4 em Spread both characters of the pair by 1 4 em Spread the first character by 1 2 em and the second character by 1 4 em Add spread to the first character of an Asian Roman character pair Add spread to the second character of a Roman Asian character pair Delete the first occurance of the two spaces for example delete the first of two adjacent Roman space characters Nibukake Rubi may extend over the preceding nibukake but it cannot exceed the nibukake add space to the first oyamoji character Nibukake Rubi may extend over the following nibukake but it cannot exceed the nibukake add space to the last oyamoji character Allow rubi text to extend over oyamoji character when betagumi no space is added Place oyamoji character with rubi based on the standard rule Double yakumono Double yakumono rule is
377. t is part of a text inset that retains formatting information from the source document The character format is not affected by global formatting performed on the document If the lt FLocked No gt statement appears in a specific character format either that character format is not part of a text inset or that character format is part of a text inset that reads formatting information from the current document The character format is affected by global formatting performed on the document For more information about text insets see Text insets text imported by reference on page 127 Font name When a PgfFont or Font statement includes all of the family angle weight and variation properties FrameMaker identifies the font in one or more of the following ways e The statement FP lat formName specifies a font name that uniquely identifies the font on a specific platform e The statements FFamily FAngle FWeight and FVar specify how FrameMaker stores font information inter nally e The statement FPost ScriptName specifies the name given to a font when it is sent to a PostScript printer specif ically the name that would be passed to the PostScript FindFont operator before any font coordination opera tions The PostScript name is unique for all PostScript fonts but may not be available for fonts that have no PostScript version For complete font specifications FrameMaker always writes the FFamily FAngle FWeight FVar and F
378. t objects and document formats The MIF interpreter normally provides the following default objects e Predefined paragraph formats for body text headers and table cells e Predefined character formats e A right master page for single sided documents and left and right master pages for double sided documents e A reference page e Predefined table formats e Predefined cross reference formats e Default pen and fill values and dash patterns for graphics e Default colors e Default document preferences such as ruler settings e Default condition tags Although you can rely on the MIF interpreter to provide defaults the exact properties and objects provided may vary depending on your FrameMaker configuration The MIF interpreter uses default objects and properties that are specified in setup files and in templates In UNIX versions these templates are ASCI ITemplate and NewTemplate You can modify these default objects and document formats by creating your own version of ASCI ITemplate or NewTemplate or by modifying your setup files For more information about modifying the default templates and setup files see the online manual Customizing FrameMaker for UNIX versions of FrameMaker For the Macintosh and Windows versions see the chapter on templates in your user manual Current state and inheritance FrameMaker has a MIF interpreter that reads and parses MIF files When you open or import a MIF file the inter preter reads the MIF s
379. t to Yes The character used in the imported text to delimit the contents of each cell is specified by the TiTb1Sep substatement and the number of these characters used as a single divider is specified by the Ti Tb1NumSep substatement e For example if the imported text uses a single tab character to distinguish the contents of one table cell from the next the following substatements are used lt TiTblSep t gt lt TiTblNumSep 1 gt e As another example if the imported text uses two spaces to distinguish the contents of one table cell from the next the following substatements are used lt TiTblSep gt lt TiTblNumSep 2 gt If the Ti Tb1NumHdrRows substatement is not set to 0 the table has header rows If the Ti TblHeadersEmpty substatement is set to No these rows are filled with imported text Publishers Macintosh versions of FrameMaker support text and graphics Publish and Subscribe which allows applications to share information dynamically between FrameMaker documents You can make text information available by desig nating it a publisher A separate file called an edition is created on disk You can place a copy of the edition called a subscriber in a document even if the edition is on another disk or on another Macintosh on a network FrameMaker treats subscribed text as text insets Subscribed text is specified through the Text Inset statement Published text is specified through a different MIF statement the Dat
380. tag no longer used but written out by FrameMaker for backward compatibility see Color statements on page 244 gt End of Condition statement Conditional and Unconditional statements The conditional statement marks the beginning of conditional text and the Unconditional statement marks the end These statements must appear in a Row or ParaLine statement Syntax lt Conditional Begin conditional text Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 58 MIF Document Statements lt InCondition tagstring gt Specifies condition tag from Condition Catalog lt InCondition tagstring gt Additional statements as needed gt End of Conditional statement lt Unconditional gt Returns to unconditional state Paragraph formats A paragraph format is defined in a Pgf statement Paragraph formats can be defined locally or stored in the Paragraph Catalog which is defined by a PgfCatalog statement PgfCatalog statement The PgfCatalog statement defines the contents of the Paragraph Catalog A MIF file can have only one PgfCatalog statement which must appear at the top level in the order given in MIF file layout on page 52 Syntax lt PgfCatalog lt Pgf gt Defines a paragraph format see Pgf statement on page 58 lt Pgf gt Additional statements as needed gt End of PgfCatalog statement Usage If you don t include a PgfCatalog statement the MIF interpreter
381. tagstring gt End structural element gt Endof ParaLine statement Usage A typical ParaLine statement consists of one or more St ring Char ATbl AFrame FNote Variable XRef and Marker statements that define the contents of the line of text These statements are interspersed with statements that indicate the scope of document components such as structural elements and conditional text 167 Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 168 MIF Statements for Structured Documents and Books Structured book statements A structured book file contains documents that were created in FrameMaker These documents normally contain structural elements A structured book file has the same book statements that appear in a normal book file plus two additional types of information about structural elements e An Element Catalog defined in ElementDefCatalog A structure tree defined in BookElements ElementDefCatalog statement The ElementDefCatalog statement contains the definitions of all elements in the book file A book file can have only one ElementDefCatalog statement It normally appears near the beginning of the file Syntax lt ElementDefCatalog Begin Element Catalog lt ElementDef gt Element definitions defined on page 145 lt ElementDef gt Additional statements as needed gt Endof ElementDefCatalog statement Usage The book file inherits the Element Catalog from the document used to generate
382. tain These restrictions are discussed in your user s manual and in the online Help system You can add any text and character formatting to any system variable Inserting variables To insert a user variable or a system variable in text use the variable statement The following example inserts the system variable Page Count into a paragraph lt Para lt ParaLine lt String This document has gt lt Variable lt VariableName Page Count gt gt end of Variable Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 40 Using MIF Statements lt String pages gt gt end of ParaLine gt end of Para The variableName string must match the name of a variable format defined in the variableFormats statement Variables are subject to the following restrictions e You cannot place any variable in a tagged text flow on a master page e The system variable current Page and the system variables for running headers and footers can only appear in untagged text flows on a master page e The system variables Table Continuation and Table Sheet can only appear in tables Creating conditional text You can produce several slightly different versions of a document from a single conditional document In a condi tional document you use condition tags to differentiate conditional text text that is specific to one version of the document from unconditional text text that is common to all versions of the document In a MIF file you crea
383. tatement An individual table is called a table instance All table instances are stored in one Tb1s statement Assign each table instance a unique ID number e Indicate the position of the table in the text flow by using an ATb1 statement The ATb1 statement is the place holder or anchor for the table instance It refers to the table instance s unique ID e Specify the table format by using a Tb1Format statement Formats can be named and stored in the Table Catalog which is defined by a Tb1Catalog statement or locally defined within a table Creating a table instance All table instances in a document are contained in a Tb1s statement The Tb1s statement contains a list of Tb1 state ments one for each table instance A document can have only one Tb1s statement which must occur before any of the table anchors in the text flow The Tb1 statement contains the actual contents of the table cells in a list of MIF substatements Like other MIF state ments this list can be quite long The following is a template for a Tb1 statement lt Tbl lt TbIID gt A unique ID for the table lt TblFormat gt The table format lt TbINumColumns gt Number of columns in this table required lt TblColumnWidth gt Column width one for each column lt TblH The heading omit if no heading Online manual lt Row One Row statement for each row lt Cell gt One statement for each cell in the row gt end of Row lt TblBody T
384. tatements and creates a FrameMaker document that contains the objects described in the MIF file When the interpreter reads a MIF file it keeps track of the current state of certain objects If the interpreter reads an object with properties that are not fully specified it applies the current state to that object When an object acquires the current state it inherits the properties stored in that state Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 4 Introduction For example if the line width is set to 1 point for a graphic object the interpreter continues to use a 1 point line width for graphic objects until a new value is specified in the MIF file Similarly if the MIF file specifies a format for a paragraph the interpreter uses the same format until a new format is specified in the file The MIF interpreter keeps track of the following document objects and properties e Units Condition tag properties e Paragraph format properties e Character format properties e Page properties e Graphic frame properties e Text frame properties e Fill pattern e Pen pattern e Line width e Line cap e Line style dash or solid e Color e Text line alignment and character format Because the interpreter also provides default objects for a document the current state of an object may be deter mined by a default object For example if a document does not provide any paragraph formats the interpreter applies a set of default paragraph propertie
385. tatements as needed gt Endof ElementDefCatalog statement Online manual ElementDef statement ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 145 MIF Statements for Structured Documents and Books The ElementDef statement creates an element definition which specifies an element s tag name content rules and optional format rules It must appear within an ElementDefCatalog statement Syntax lt ElementDef Begin element definition lt EDTag tagstring gt Element tag name lt EDObject keyword gt Type of formatter object represented by the element keywordcan be one of DContainer DEquation DFootnote DGraphic DMarker DTable DTb1iTitle DIblHeading DTb1Body DIblFooting DTblRow DTb1Cell DSystemVariable DXRef HAO AMAA EDContainer identifies a container element all other values identify object non container elements lt EDValidHighestLevel boolean gt Yes indicates element can be used as the highest level element for a flow only a container element is allowed to be the highest level element lt EDGeneralRule string gt The general rule for the element the following types of elements can have general rules containers tables table parts table titles headings bodies footings rows and cells and footnotes lt EDExclusions List of excluded elements lt Exclusion tagstring gt Tag of excluded element lt Exclusion tagstring gt Additional statements as needed
386. tatus If Inventory Status In stock VFill lt CellFill 6 gt lt CellColor Green gt Else vFill lt CellFill 6 gt lt CellColor Red gt End if Compute discount price vDiscPrice Inventory Price per Bag vDisc RELATE ONE Inventory JName SEND PACKET vDoc lt Row lt RowMaxHeight 14 0 DQ gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt Cell vFill lt CellContent lt Para lt PgfTag Number gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt ParaLine lt String String Inventory Ref Number H gt gt gt gt gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt Cell vFill lt CellContent lt Para lt PgfTag Body gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt ParaLine lt String InventoryJName gt gt gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt Para lt PgfTag CellBody gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt ParaLine lt String Beans Description gt gt gt gt gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt Cell vFill lt CellContent lt Para lt PgfTag Number gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt ParaLine lt String String Inventory Bags gt gt gt gt gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt Cell vFill lt CellContent lt Para lt PgfTag Body gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt ParaLine lt String Inventory Status gt gt gt gt gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt Cell vFill lt CellContent lt Para lt PgfTag Number gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt ParaLine lt Conditional lt InCondition Retail gt gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt String Stri
387. te a conditional document as follows e Create the condition tags to be used in the document and specify their format via ConditionCatalog and Condition statements e Apply one or more condition tags to the appropriate sections of the document via Conditional and Uncondi tional statements e Show or hide conditional text by using the cst ate statement Creating and applying condition tags In MIF all condition tags are defined in a Condit ionCatalog statement which contains one or more Condition statements A Condition statement specifies the condition tag name the condition indicators how conditional text appears in the document window a color and a state either hidden or shown For example the following statements create a Condition Catalog with two conditional tags named Summer and Winter lt ConditionCatalog lt Condition lt CTag Summer gt Condition tag name lt CState CHidden gt Condition state now hidden lt CStyle COverline gt Condition indicator lt CColor Blue gt Condition indicator gt end of Condition lt Condition lt CTag Winter gt lt CState CShown gt This condition is shown lt CStyle CUnderline gt lt CColor Red gt gt end of Condition gt end of ConditionCatalog Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 41 Using MIF Statements To mark conditional and unconditional passages within document text use Conditional and UnConditional statements as shown in the follow
388. te space characters that aren t part of the text of the document as in the example MIF statement lt Units Uin gt it interprets the white space as token delimiters When parsing the example statement the MIF interpreter ignores the white space characters between the left angle bracket lt and the first character of the token Units After reading the token the MIF interpreter checks its validity If the token is valid the interpreter reads and parses the data portion of the statement If the token is not valid the interpreter ignores all text up to the corresponding right angle bracket gt including any nested substatements The interpreter then scans the file for the next left angle bracket that marks the beginning of the next MIF statement All statements as well as all data portions of a statement are optional If you do not provide a data portion the MIF interpreter assigns a default value to the statement Statement hierarchy Some MIF statements can contain other statements The contained statements are called substatements In this manual substatements are usually shown indented within the containing statements as follows lt Document lt DStartPage 1 gt 2 The indentation is not required in a MIF file although it may make the file easier for you to read A MIF main statement appears at the top level of a file A main statement cannot be nested within other statements Some substatements can only appear within certain
389. ted graphic Basic facet format A facet consists of a facet name a data type and a series of lines containing facet data For example EPSI amp v amp PS Adobe 2 0 EPSF 2 0 n Facet name The first line of a facet identifies the facet by name The facet name line has the following format facet_name The facet name can be one of the standard display and print facets or an application specific name registered with FrameMaker For information about registering your application specific facets see the FDK Platform Guide for your platform which is included with the Frame Developer s Kit Data type The second line provides the data type of the facet unsigned bytes s v integer amp i or metric amp m If the facet data is binary such as FrameImage and FrameVector data or if it contains ASCII characters such as EPSI data as shown in the preceding example the facet uses the unsigned bytes data type v For example the following line is the second line in a facet that contains data represented as unsigned bytes amp v Facet data The remaining lines contain the facet data Fach line begins with an ampersand amp The end of the data for a facet is marked by the beginning of a new facet Thus a line with a new facet name signals the end of the previous facet data The end of the last facet in the graphic inset is marked by the following line EndInset Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0
390. tements lt VolNumComputeMethod keyword gt Volume numbering keywordcan be one of StartNumbering restart numbering Cont inueNumbering continue numbering from previous compo nent UseSameNumbering use the same numbering as previous compo nent ReadFromF ile use numbering set for the component s document Chapter numbering lt ChapterNumStart integer gt Starting chapter number lt ChapterNumStyle keyword gt lt ChapterNumText string gt lt ChapterNumComputeMethod keyword gt Page numbering Style of chapter numbering keywordcan be one of Arabic UCRoman LCRoman UCAlpha LCAlpha anjiNumeric ZenArabic ZenUCAlpha ZenLCAlpha anjikazu BusinessKazu Custom When ChapterNumSt y1e is set to Custom this is the string to use Chapter numbering keywordcan be one of StartNumbering restart numbering Cont inueNumbering continue numbering from previous compo nent UseSameNumbering use the same numbering as previous compo nent ReadF romF ile use numbering set for the component s document lt ContPageNum boolean gt Yes continues page numbering from the previous file in the book lt PageNumStart integer gt Starting page number lt PageNumStyle keyword gt Style of page numbering keywordcan be one of Arabic UCRoman LCRoman UCAlpha LCAlpha anjiNumeric ZenArabic ZenuCAlpha ZenLCAlpha anjikazu BusinessKazu Online manual 140
391. terchange Format is a group of ASCII statements that create an easily parsed readable text file of all the text graphics formatting and layout constructs that FrameMaker understands Because MIF is an alternative representation of a FrameMaker document it allows FrameMaker and other applications to exchange information while preserving graphics document content and format Why use MIF You can use MIF files to allow FrameMaker and other applications to exchange information For example you can write programs to convert graphics and text into MIF and then import the MIF file into FrameMaker with the graphics and text intact You can also save a FrameMaker document or book file as a MIF file and then write a program to convert the MIF file to another format These conversion programs are called filters filters allow you to convert FrameMaker document files into foreign files files in another word processing or desktop publishing format and foreign files into FrameMaker document files You can use MIF files with database publishing applications which allow you to capture changing data from databases and format the data into high quality documents containing both text and graphics information You use the database to enter manipulate sort and select data You use FrameMaker to format the resulting data You use MIF files as the data interchange format between the database and FrameMaker You can also use MIF files to do the following e S
392. ters hiragana directly above the word in question oyamoji A MIF file includes document level statements that describe the settings made in the Rubi Properties dialog box as well as MIF statements for a rubi composite A rubi composite includes both oyamoji text and rubi text If the document is structured the rubi composite contains an object tagged RubiGroup the oyamoji text an element tagged Rubi and the rubi text Document statement In addition to document preferences see Document statement on page 82 the MIF Document statement describes standard formats for rubi text The rubi formatting substatements correspond to settings in the Rubi Properties dialog box Online manual Syntax ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 213 MIF Asian Text Processing Statements lt Document See page 82 lt DRubiSize percentage gt OR The size of the rubi characters proportional to the size of the oyamoji characters Allowed values are 1 0 through 1000 0 lt DRubiFixedSize point size The fixed size of the rubi characters in points only Either the DRubiSize statement or the DRubiFixedSize state ment can be specified but not both in the same document lt DRubiOverhang boolean gt Yes allows rubi to overhang hiragana oyamoji text lt DRubiAlignAtBounds boolean gt Yes aligns all rubi and oyamoji characters at line boundaries lt DWideRubiSpaceForJapanese keyword gt Determines how to space rubi charact
393. tes a MIF file it writes a sequence of numbered body pages When you generate a MIF file you should only define one body page and allow the MIF interpreter to automatically create new body pages as needed For more information about using body pages in a MIF file see Specifying page layout on page 31 Page statement The Page statement adds a new page to the document Page statements must appear at the top level in the order given in MIF file layout on page 52 Syntax lt Page lt PageType keyword gt Page type keywordcan be one of LeftMasterPage RightMasterPage OtherMasterPage ReferencePage BodyPage HiddenPage lt PageNum string gt Page number for additive pages provided for output filters lt PageTag tagstring gt Names master or reference page for a body page specifies a different page number for example a point page to be used instead of the default page number Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 100 MIF Document Statements lt PageSize W H gt Page width and height written by FrameMaker but ignored when a MIF file is read or imported see DPageSi ze on page 84 lt PageAngle degrees gt Rotation angle of page in degrees 0 90 180 270 angles are measured in a counterclockwise direction with respect to the page s original orientation as determined by the page size see DPageSize on page 84 lt PageBackground keyword gt Names master page to use for curre
394. that can be written by a graphic application and used by FrameMaker to display and print an imported graphic A graphic inset can also specify a live link which associates an imported graphic in a FrameMaker document with the graphic application used to edit the graphic A live link can be set up through FrameServer functions or through an FDK client When a live link is established between an imported graphic and a graphic application users can edit the graphic in a graphic application and directly import the graphic into a FrameMaker document For more information on live links see the FDK Programmer s Guide which is provided with the FDK or the online manual Using FrameServer with Applications and Insets which is provided with the UNIX version of the FDK To set up a live link between a graphic application and a FrameMaker document you need to add functions to your application to write out graphic data as a graphic inset A graphic inset consists of an ImportObject statement that contains one or more facets for display and print If your application requires additional information not supported by the display and print facet the graphic inset also needs one or more application specific facets to store this additional information The two types of graphic insets are internal graphic insets and external graphic inset files Each type results in a slightly different type of integration between FrameMaker and your application You can choose th
395. the RubiCompositeBegin and RubiCompositeEnd statements In a structured document the rubi composite includes a RubiGroup element and a Rubi element Syntax lt RubiCompositeBegin gt Starts the rubi composite lt Element For structured documents only Defines the RubiGroup element Continue the RubiGroup element specification gt End of the RubiGroup element lt String string gt The oyamoji text lt RubiTextBegin gt Begins the rubi text lt Element For structured documents only Defines the Rubi element Continue the Rubi element specification gt End of the Rubi element lt String string gt The rubi text lt RubiTextEnd gt Ends the rubi text lt RubiCompositeEnd gt Ends the rubi composite Example unstructured lt Paraline lt String kumihan gt lt RubiCompositeBegin lt String HhR gt lt RubiTextBegin lt String HPF gt lt RubiTextEnd gt lt RubiCompositeEnd gt gt end of ParaLine Example structured lt Paraline lt String Some text gt lt RubiCompositeBegin lt Element lt Unique 123456 gt Online manual 214 lt ETag RubiGroup gt lt Attributes Typical MIF to define attributes gt end of Attributes lt Collapsed No gt lt SpecialCase No gt lt AttributeDisplay AllAttributes gt gt end of Element gt end of RubiCompositeBegin lt String Oyamoji text gt lt RubiTextBegin lt
396. the book file or from a document given as the source for the Import gt Element Definitions command In a MIF file you should copy the Element Catalog from one of the structure documents included in the book BookSettings statement The BookSett ings statement contains the definitions of all elements in the book file A book file can have only one BookSett ings statement It normally appears near the beginning of the file The statements in the BookSett ings statement correspond to statements in the BookSett ings statement except that they begin with the letter B instead of the letter D Syntax lt BookSettings Begin book settings lt BElementCatalogScope keyword gt Validation scope keywordcan be one of Strict Loose Children All CustomList lt BCustomElementList List of tags to display when BElementCatalogScope specifies CustomList lt EDTag string gt Element definition name lt EDTag string gt Additional statements as needed Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 169 MIF Statements for Structured Documents and Books gt Endof DCustomElementList statement lt BAttributeDisplay keyword gt lt BAttrEditor keyword gt Default attribute display setting for document keywordcan be one of Al1lAttributes display all attributes ReqgAndSpec display required and specified attributes None don t display attributes When Edit Attributes dialog box appears for new elements keywordcan be one of
397. the contents of the Element Catalog for a structured document For more infor mation see MIF Statements for Structured Documents and Books FmtChangeListCatalog Defines the contents of the Format Change List Catalog for a structured document For more information see MIF Statements for Structured Documents and Books FontCatalog Describes character formats The Font Catalog statement contains Font statements that define the properties and tag for each character format RulingCatalog Describes ruling styles for tables The RulLingCatalog statement contains Ruling statements that define the properties for each ruling style TblCatalog Describes table formats The Tb1 Catalog statement contains Tb1Format state ments that define the properties and tag for each table format KumihanCatalog Contains the Kumihan tables that specifz line compisition rules for Japanese text Views Describes color views for the document The Views statement contains View state ments that define which colors are visible in each color view Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 53 MIF Document Statements Statement Description VariableFormats MarkerTypeCatalog Defines variables The VariableFormats statement contains VariableFormat statements that define each variable Defines a catalog of user defined markers for the current document The MarkerType Catalog statement contains MarkerTypeCatalog statements that specify each use
398. the following example lt Para lt ParaLine lt String the pound sterling gt lt Char Pound gt lt String symbol gt gt end of ParaLine gt end of Para lt Para lt ParaLine lt String the pound sterling xa3 symbol gt gt end of ParaLine gt end of Para You can use the lt Char HardReturn gt statement to insert a forced return in a paragraph The lt Char HardReturn gt statement must be the last substatement in a ParaLine statement lt Para lt ParaLine lt String string 1 gt lt Char HardReturn gt gt end of ParaLine lt ParaLine lt String string 2 gt gt end of ParaLine gt end of Para For a list of character codes see the Quick Reference for your FrameMaker product Use the char statement for a small set of predefined special characters Character name Description Tab Tab HardSpace Nonbreaking space Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 MIF Document Statements Character name Description SoftHyphen Soft hyphen HardHyphen Nonbreaking hyphen DiscHyphen Discretionary hyphen NoHyphen Suppress hyphenation Cent Cent Pound Sterling Yen Yen EnDash En dash EmDash Em dash Dagger Dagger t DoubleDagger Double dagger H Bullet Bullet HardReturn Forced return NumberSpace Numeric space ThinSpace Thin space EnSpace En space EmSpace Em space 124 MarkerTypeCatalog
399. they do not automatically wrap the way text in a text column does Text lines cannot contain paragraph formats markers variables cross references or elements Syntax lt TextLine Generic object statements Information common to all objects see page 101 lt TLOrigin X Y gt Alignment point origin Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 118 MIF Document Statements lt TLAlignment keyword gt Alignment keyword can be one of Center Left Right lt TLLanguage keyword gt Spell checking and hyphenation language for text line for list of allowed key words see Pgf Language on page 61 lt Char integer gt Nonprinting ASCII character code lt Font gt Embedded font change see PgfFont and Font statements on page 63 lt String string gt Printable ASCII text in single quotation marks required End of Text Line statement Usage The TLOrigin statement specifies the baseline Y and the left center or right edge of the text line X depending on TLAlignment The text line is rotated by the value specified in an Angle statement The default angle is 0 A Text Line statement contains one or more St ring statements Each St ring statement is preceded by an optional Font statement The Char statements provide codes for characters outside the printable ASCII range You can define macros that make Char statements more readable and there are several predefined con
400. this up so that the graphics created and modified in the graphic application can be imported directly into a FrameMaker document The graphic application becomes a graphic inset editor Graphic inset editors write graphic data to graphic insets which can be read by FrameMaker For more information on setting up graphic inset editors see the FDK Programmer s Guide and the online manual Using FrameServer with Applications and Insets Both manuals are provided with the UNIX version of the Frame Developer s Kit The first part of this appendix describes the general format for a facet in a MIF file The second part of this appendix explains the graphic inset format If you are using the API to implement the graphic inset editor the syntax described in this appendix applies only to external graphic insets For information on specifying facet names data types and data for internal graphic insets see the FDK Programmer s Guide Facets for imported graphics A graphic imported by copying into a FrameMaker document contains one or more facets Each facet describes the imported graphic in a specific graphic format All imported graphics copied into a document contain one or more facets used to display and print the file FrameMaker might not use the same facet for displaying and printing a graphic For example the Macintosh version of FrameMaker might use a QuickDraw PICT facet for displaying the graphic and an EPS facet for printing the graphi
401. tically updated when the document is opened lt DUpdateTextInsetsOnOpen boolean gt Acrobat preferences Yes specifies that text insets are automatically updated when the document is opened lt DAcrobatBookmarksIncludeTagNames boolean gt Yes specifies that each Acrobat Bookmark title begins with the name of the paragraph tag lt DGenerateAcrobatInfo boolean gt Yes sets the document s print options to their required states for generating Acrobat information Document specific menu bars lt DMenuBar string gt Name of the menu bar displayed by an FDK client when the document is opened if an empty string is specified or if the menu bar is not found the standard FrameMaker menu bar is used lt DVoMenuBar string gt Name of the menu bar displayed by an FDK client when the document is opened in View Only mode if an empty string is specified or if the menu bar is not found the standard view only menu bar is used Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 89 MIF Document Statements Math properties For more information see MIF Equation Statements Structure properties Miscellaneous properties For more information see MIF Statements for Structured Documents and Books lt DMagicMarker integer gt Type number of the marker used to represent a delete mark lt DMagicMarker integer gt Type number of the marker used to represent a delete mark
402. tics For example a paragraph has properties that represent its left indent the space above it and its default font A rectangle has properties that represent its width height and position on the page When FrameMaker creates a MIF file it writes an ASCII statement for each object in the document or book The statement includes substatements for the object s properties For example suppose a document with no text frame contains a rectangle that is 2 inches wide and 1 inch high The rectangle is located 3 inches from the left side of the page and 1 5 inches from the top MIF represents this rectangle with the following statement Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 3 Introduction lt Rectangle Type of graphic object Position and size left offset top offset width and height lt ShapeRect 3 0 1 5 2 0 1 0 gt gt FrameMaker also treats each document as an object and stores document preferences as properties of the document For example a document s page size and page numbering style are document properties FrameMaker documents have default objects A FrameMaker document always has a certain set of default objects formats and preferences even when you create a new document When you create a MIF file you usually provide the objects and properties that your document needs However if you don t provide all the objects and properties required in a FrameMaker document the MIF interpreter fills in a set of defaul
403. time when the text inset was last updated time is measured in the number of seconds and microseconds that have passed since January 1 1970 lt TiMacEditionId integer gt For a text inset created from a Macintosh edition points to the resource ID of the sect and alis records lt TiImportHint string gt Identifies the filter used to convert the file see Record of the filter used to import text on page 128 lt TiApiClient gt Identifies the text inset as one created and maintained by an FDK client see TiApiClient statement on page 130 lt TiFlow gt Identifies the text inset as an imported text flow from another doc ument see TiFlow statement on page 131 lt TiText gt Identifies the text inset as an imported text file see TiText state ment on page 132 lt TiTextTable gt Identifies the text inset as text imported into a table see TiTextTa ble statement on page 132 End of Text Inset statement Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 128 MIF Document Statements Free form text Para statements containing and describing the imported text see Para statement on page 121 lt Text InsetEnd gt End of imported text Usage All text insets require information about the source file and the imported text The information is used to update the text inset when changes are made to the original file There are sev
404. tion of a Framelmage facet A Framelmage facet begins with the following facet name and data type lines FrameImage amp v When importing a graphic with a FrameImage display and print facet FrameMaker prompts the user to specify the graphic inset s print resolution in the Imported Graphic Scaling dialog box The print resolution determines the size of the imported graphic Specification of Framelmage data A description of a graphic in FrameImage format consists of three parts e A header which describes the dimensions and other characteristics of the graphic e An optional color map included only if the graphic uses colors e Data describing the bitmap of the imported graphic The description is written as integer values in hexadecimal format Each line is preceded by an ampersand s The data section begins with the sv characters which indicate that the FrameImage data is represented as unsigned bytes The beginning and end of the data are bracketed by the symbol x which indicates that the data is in hexadecimal format Header The header describes properties of the imported graphic These properties are described by eight 32 bit integer values such as the values shown in the following example amp 59a66a95 amp 00000040 amp 00000040 amp 00000001 amp 00000000 amp 00000001 amp 00000000 amp 00000000 Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 261 Framelmage Facet Format Each value identifies a property of the imported
405. tnote lt DFNoteNumberSuffix string gt Suffix after number in document footnote Table footnote properties lt DTbIFNoteTag string gt Same meaning for the following statements as the corresponding doc ument footnote properties lt DTbIFNoteLabels string gt lt DTbIFNoteNumStyle keyword gt lt DTbIFNoteAnchorPos keyword gt lt DTbIFNoteNumberPos keyword gt lt DTbIFNoteAnchorPrefix string gt lt DTbIFNoteAnchorSuffix string gt lt DTbIFNoteNumberPrefix string gt lt DTbIFNoteNumberSuffix string gt Change bar properties Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 93 MIF Document Statements lt DChBarGap dimension gt Change bar distance from column lt DChBarWidth dimension gt Thickness of change bar lt DChBarPosition keyword gt Position of change bar keyword can be one of LeftOfCcol RightOfCol NearestEdge FurthestEdge lt DChBarColor tagstring gt Change bar color see ColorCatalog statement on page 78 lt DAutoChBars boolean gt Turns automatic change bars on or off Document view properties lt DGridOn boolean gt Turns on page grid upon opening lt DPageGrid dimension gt Spacing of page grid lt DSnapGrid dimension gt Spacing of snap grid lt DSnapRotation degrees gt Angle of rotation snap lt DRulersOn boolean gt Turns on rulers upon opening lt DFullRulers
406. to a PostScript file Yes generates post script optimized for use with the TrapWise application Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 88 MIF Document Statements lt DPrintSkipBlankPages boolean gt Yes skips blank pages when printing Superscripts and subscripts lt DSuperscriptSize percent gt Scaling factor for superscripts expressed as percentage of the current font size lt DSubscriptSize percent gt Scaling factor for subscripts expressed as percentage of current font size lt DSmallCapsSize percent gt Scaling factor for small caps expressed as percentage of current font size lt DSuperscriptShift percent gt Baseline offset of superscripts expressed as percentage of current font size lt DSubscriptShift percent gt Baseline offset of subscripts expressed as percentage of current font size lt DSuperscriptStretch percent gt Amount to stretch or compress superscript where 100 means no change lt DSubscriptStretch percent gt Amount to stretch or compress subscript where 100 means no change lt DSmallCapsStretch percent gt Amount to stretch or compress small caps where 100 means no change lt DRubiSize percentage gt The size of the rubi characters proportional to the size of the oyamoji characters see Rubi text on page 212 Reference properties lt DUpdateXRefsOnOpen boolean gt Yes specifies that cross references are automa
407. ts 43 points amp 850000001800040000002B0000 e The size of the arc is 43 points by 40 points 002F0000002C0000 e The start angle of the arc is 90 and the arc angle length is 90 005A0000005A0000 Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 288 FrameVector Facet Format The rest of the styles are inherited from previous objects Specification of the end of the FrameVector graphic The following record specifies the end of the FrameVector graphic amp FF00000000 The x characters specify the end of data in hexadecimal format Online manual Index Symbols number sign 55 amp i 110 amp m_ 110 amp v 110 amp x 110 straight quotation mark 5 lt left angle bracket 5 facet_name 110 gt right angle bracket 5 backslash using for special characters 7 left quotation mark 5 A abs 186 acmut 189 acos 186 acosh 186 acot 186 acoth 186 acsc 186 acsch 186 adding pages 99 AFrame 122 alignment anchored frame 109 equation 178 paragraph in cell 71 paragraph in text column 59 table 69 AlsoInsert 145 AnchorAlign 107 AnchorBeside 108 anchored frames alignment 109 position 108 Angle 102 in Math 177 angle in MathFullForm 186 angle brackets lt gt 5 approx 190 ArcDTheta 106 ArcRect 106 ArcTheta 106 arg 186 ArrowStyle in Arc 105 in PolyLine 116 asec 186 asech 186 Asian character encoding 198 AsianSpace 205 asin 186 asinh 186 ast 186 atan 186 atanh
408. ts custom vertical list The expressions that insert new custom operators must include the name of the custom operator from the reference page For example suppose a document has a custom operator MyFunct ion that is added to the DMathCatalog statement as follows lt DMathCatalog lt DMathNew Names the new operator lt DMathOpName MyFunction gt Specifies the operator type lt DMathNewType Function gt gt end of DMathNew Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 197 MIF Equation Statements gt end of DMathCatalog The corresponding MathFullForm statement appears as follows lt MathFullForm newfunction T MyFunction T char x gt You do not use one of the custom operator expressions to insert a redefined math operator in an equation Instead you use the expression for the built in operator but force FrameMaker to use the new symbol from the reference page For example suppose you redefine the built in operator asin and add it to the Math Catalog as follows lt DMathCatalog lt DMathOp Overrides Names the built in operator lt DMathOpName asin gt Forces lookup from reference page lt DMathOpTLineOverride Yes gt gt end of DMathOpOverrides gt end of DMathCatalog You would use the following MathFullForm statement lt MathFullForm asin T Inverse Sine T operands gt where the string Inverse Sine is the name given to the frame on the reference page Sample equations
409. ts the properties of the current state A Frame statement that is contained within an AFrames statement defines an anchored frame Any other Frame statement defines an unanchored frame The assumed value for FrameType is NotAnchored For anchored frames an AFrame statement that refers to the frame ID indicates where the anchored frame appears within the text flow see ParaLine statement on page 121 Specifications for the position and alignment of anchored frames are described in the following sections Position of anchored frames The AnchorBes ide statement determines whether the graphic frame is anchored to a text column Column or a text frame TextFrame The FrameType statement specifies the position of an anchored frame A graphic frame can be anchored within a text column or text frame or outside a text column or text frame If the graphic frame is anchored within a text column or text frame the anchored frame can be positioned in one of the following ways If the graphic frame is anchored within a text column or text The Frame statement contains frame At the insertion point of the cursor lt FrameType Inline gt At the top of the text column lt FrameType Top gt Below the insertion point of the cursor lt FrameType Below gt At the bottom of the text column lt FrameType Bottom gt Running into the paragraph lt FrameType RunIntoParagraph gt If the graphic frame is anchored outside a t
410. u must be able to type the character and save it in a text file The standard Western system doesn t include these character sets in its character code page so these characters would appear garbled You need the Asian system to represent the characters in a text file To see an example of a Kumihan table it is best to save a document as MIF open the MIF on an Asian system in a text editor and search for the KumihanCatalog statement Specifying Kumihan tables in MIF The following statements specify the Kumihan catalog and all of its component tables KumihanCatalog statement The KumihanCatalog statement begins the Kumihan table specification for the document Note that the Kumihan catalog is not included in the lt Document gt block but is in a block of its own Each Asian language can have its own Kumihan tables This means that one Kumihan catalog can have up to four sets of tables one set for each of the four supported Asian languages Japanese Traditional Chinese SimpleChinese and Korean Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 204 MIF Asian Text Processing Statements Syntax lt KumihanCatalog lt Kumihan Defines a Kumihan table set lt Kumihan Additional Kumihan table sets as needed one for each Asian lan guage up to four per document End of KumihanCatalog statement Kumihan statement The Kumihan statement defines a set of Kumihan tables A document can have one set of tables for e
411. uded for backward compatibility TypeName string gt Marker name as it appears in the Marker Type popup menu of the Marker dialog box Text string gt Marker text string CurrPage integer gt Current page of marker assigned when FrameMaker generates a file ignored when FrameMaker reads or imports a MIF file End of Marker statement Usage Marker type numbers correspond to the marker names in the Marker window as follows This number Represents this marker name 0 Header Footer 1 1 Header Footer 2 2 Index 3 Comment 4 Subject 5 Author 6 Glossary 7 Equation 8 Hypertext 9 X Ref 10 Conditional Text 11 through 25 Type 11 through Type 25 for versions of FrameMaker earlier than 5 5 If more than 25 markers are defined for the document all extra markers are assigned the number 25 In UNIX versions you can change the default marker names For more information see the online manual Custom izing FrameMaker XRef statement The xRef statement marks a cross reference in text It must appear in a ParaLine statement Syntax lt XRef Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 126 MIF Document Statements lt Unique ID gt ID persistent across sessions assigned when FrameMaker gener ates a MIF file used by the FDK client and should not be used by filters lt XRefName tagstring gt Name of cross reference format see X
412. uding selection with modifier keys and sets highlight ing style of destination markers for active cross references see Using active cross references on page 46 keywordcan be one of o disable user selection Yes enable user selection and highlighting UserOn1y enable selection but not highlighting lt DViewOnlyNoOp Oxnnn gt Disables a command in a View Only document command is specified by hex function code see page 47 lt DViewOnlyWinBorders boolean gt o suppresses display of scroll bars and border buttons in document window of View Only document lt DViewOnlyWinMenubar boolean gt o suppresses display of document window menu bar in View Only document lt DViewOnlyWinPopup boolean gt o suppresses display of document region pop up menus in View Only document lt DViewOnlyWinPalette boolean gt Yes makes window behave as command palette window in View Only document Document default language lt DLanguage keyword gt Hyphenation and spell checking language for text lines for allowed keywords see Pgf Language on page 61 Color printing lt DNoPrintSepColor tagstring gt Tag name of color not to print any color not included here is printed lt DPrintProcessColor tagstring gt Tag name of process color to print as separation lt DPrintSeparations boolean gt Yes prints separations lt DTrapwiseCompatibility boolean gt When printing
413. umber gt A setting to specify at what level of the bookmark hierarchy to close all bookmarks A setting of 0 closes all bookmarks lt DPDFOpenFit string gt A string to specify how to fit the PDF document into the Acrobat appli cation window when it opens can be one of Default Page Width Height orNone Any other string value resolves to Default Use None in conjunction with DPDFOpenZoom lt DPDFOpenPage string gt A string for the page number for the page at which you want the PDF file to open lt DPDFOpenZoom number gt A number to specify the zoom percentage when opening the PDF doc ument To use this setting DPDFOpenPage must either be absent or set to None otherwise FrameMaker ignores this setting lt DPDFPageHeight number gt A number for the page width to use this setting DPDFPageSiz eSet must be set to Yes Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 96 MIF Document Statements lt DPDFPageSizeSet boolean gt A statement to indicate whether to use the values in DPDFPage Widthand DPDFPageHeight when distilling the document When set to No FrameMaker ignores the width and height settings lt DPDFPageWidth number gt A number for the page height to use this setting DPDFPageSiz eSet must be set to Yes lt DPDFRegMarks string gt A string specifying which registration marks to use Can be one of None Western or Tombo any other string resol
414. ument The table is not affected by global formatting performed on the document If the lt TblLocked No gt statement appears in a specific table that table is not part of a text inset or is part of a text inset that reads formatting information from the current document The table is affected by global formatting performed on the document For details about text insets see Text insets text imported by reference on page 127 Tbls statement The Tb1s statement lists the contents of each table in the document A document can have only one Tb1s statement which must appear at the top level in the order given in MIF file layout on page 52 Syntax lt Tbls Beginning of tables list lt Tb1 gt Defines a table instance see Tbl statement next STB s gt Additional statements as needed gt End of Tb1s statement Tbl statement The Tb1 statement contains the contents of a table instance It must appear in a Tb1s statement Each Tb1 statement is tied to a location in a text flow by the ID number in a Tb11D statement Each Tb1 statement has an associated ATb1 statement within a ParaLine statement that inserts the table in the flow The Tb1 statement must appear before the ATb1 statement that refers to it Each Tb1 statement can have only one associated ATb1 statement and vice versa For more information about the aTb1 statement see ParaLine statement on page 121 Syntax lt Tbl lt T
415. used in the previous example This text flow contains the sentence as it appears in the document body lt TextFlow lt TFTag A gt lt TFAutoConnect Yes gt lt Para lt ParaLine lt String Our company makes a full line of gt This marker indicates that hidden text appears in the hidden text flow lt Marker lt MType 10 gt lt MText 88793 gt lt MCurrPage 0 gt gt end of Marker lt Conditional lt InCondition Summer gt gt end of Conditional lt String cool and comfortable tank tops gt lt Unconditional gt gt end of Para gt end of TextFlow This text flow contains the hidden conditional text lt TextFlow lt TFTag HIDDEN gt lt Para lt PgfEndCond Yes gt lt ParaLine lt Marker lt MType 10 gt This marker shows the beginning of hidden text Its ID matches the marker ID in the body text flow lt MText 88793 gt Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 43 Using MIF Statements lt MCurrPage 0 gt gt end of Marker lt Conditional lt InCondition Winter gt gt end of Conditional Here s the hidden text lt String chilly winter gt lt Marker lt MType 10 gt This marker shows the end of hidden text It must match the marker that begins with a minus sign lt MText 88793 gt lt MCurrPage 0 gt gt end of Marker gt gt end of Para gt end of TextFlow Including template files When you write an application
416. ust include a short ATb1 statement that cor responds to each Tb1 statement The ATb1 statement identifies where a specific table appears in a text flow it need only supply the table s ID number Page Describes the layout of each page in the document The description includes the layout of each page the dimensions of the text frames and the objects and other graphic frames on that page A MIF file created by FrameMaker includes a Page statement for each page in the document including the master pages When you write an import filter you can omit Page statements the MIF interpreter repaginates the document as needed TextFlow Represents the actual text in the document Within Text F Low statements the text is expressed in paragraphs which in turn contain paragraph lines Line endings of Para Line statements are not significant because the MIF interpreter wraps the contents of ParaLine statements into paragraphs MIFFile statement The MIFFile statement identifies the file as a MIF file The MIFFile statement is required and must be the first line of the file with no leading white space Syntax lt MIFFile version gt comment Required Identifies a MIF file The version argument indicates the version number of the MIF language used in the file and comment shows the name and version number of the program that generated the file For example a MIF file saved in version 7 0 of FrameMaker begins with
417. vector images Ina MIF file graphic objects are defined by object and Frame statements Object refers to any MIF statement that describes an object such as Arc Text Line or Text Rect Generally these objects are created and manipulated by using the Tools palette in a FrameMaker document This section describes general information that pertains to all graphic objects and then lists the MIF statements for graphic objects in alphabetic order Object positioning Each Page statement has nested within it Ob ject and Frame statements If a graphic frame contains objects and other graphic frames the graphic frames and objects are listed in the order that they are drawn object in back first For Object and Frame statements the interpreter keeps track of the current page and current graphic frame When the interpreter encounters a Frame statement it assumes the graphic frame is on the current page Similarly when the interpreter encounters an object statement it assumes the object is in the current graphic frame or page When you open a MIF file as a FrameMaker document the default current page is page 1 and the default current frame is the page frame for page 1 A page frame is an invisible frame that contains objects or graphic frames placed directly on a page The page frame is not described by any MIF statement When you import a MIF file into an existing FrameMaker document the default current page is the first page visible when the Imp
418. ves to None lt DPDFSaveSeparate Yes No gt A setting that specifies whether to save a book as one PDF file or as a collection of separate PDF files for each component in the book This setting is ignored in individual documents lt DPDFStartPage string gt A string for the page number for the starting page in the page range _ top use this setting DPDFA11Pages must be set to No lt DPDFStructure boolean gt Yes indicates that the document includes structure statements for Structured PDF lt DPDFStructureDefined boolean gt Statement to determine how FrameMaker should display the PDF structure settings in the PDF Setup dialog box this statement is for internal FrameMaker use and you should not modify it lt PDFDocinfo Specifies the information that appears in the File Info dictionary when you save the document as PDF Each File Info entry consists of one Key statement followed by at least one Value statement FrameMaker ignores any Key statement that is not followed by at least one Value statement There is no representation in this statement of the default fields for Creator Creation Date orMetaData Date For more information see PDF Document Info on page 82 lt Key string gt A string of up to 255 ASCII characters that represents the name of a Document Info field in PDF the name of a Document Info field must be 126 characters or less Represent non printable characters via H H
419. w Each value corresponds to one of the 25 character classes respec tively These values specify how to add space after a character of the class identified by the row statement when followed by a character of the class identified by the column position Syntax lt ExtraSpaceTable lt BegParentheses numerals gt lt EndParentheses numerals gt lt NoLineBeginChar numerals gt lt QuestionBang numerals gt lt CenteredPunct numerals gt lt PeriodComma numerals gt lt NonSeparableChar numerals gt lt PrecedingSymbol numerals gt lt SucceedingSymbol numerals gt lt AsianSpace numerals gt lt Hiragana numerals gt lt Others gt lt BaseCharWithSuper numerals gt lt BaseCharWithRubi numerals gt lt Numeral numerals gt lt UnitSymbol numerals gt lt RomanSpace numerals gt lt RomanChar numerals gt lt ParenBeginWariChu numerals gt lt ParenEndWariChu numerals gt lt Sparel numerals gt lt Spare2 numerals gt Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 212 MIF Asian Text Processing Statements lt Spare3 numerals gt lt Spare4 numerals gt lt Spare5 numerals gt gt End of ExtraSpaceTable statement The possible values for numerals are Extra space is allowed Extra space is not allowed Add extra space to the last character of a Roman word Add extra space after a Roman character A
420. w environment The default environment consists of the current text frame current paragraph properties and current font properties The TextFlow statement can override all of these defaults TextFlow statement The Text Flow statement defines a text flow It can appear at the top level or ina Text Rect statement It must appear after all other main statements in the file Syntax lt TextFlow lt TFTag tagstring gt Text flow tag name lt TFAutoConnect boolean gt Yes adds text frames as needed to extend flows lt TFPostScript boolean gt Yes identifies text in the flow as printer code lt TFFeather boolean gt Yes adjusts vertical space in column so that last line of text lies against the bottom of the column lt TFSynchronized boolean gt Yes aligns baselines of text in adjacent columns lt TFLineSpacing dimension gt Line spacing for synchronized baselines Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 120 MIF Document Statements lt FMinHangHeight dimension gt Maximum character height for synchronization of first line in column if characters exceed this height FrameMaker doesn t synchronize the first line A FSideheads boolean gt Yes means text flow contains side heads lt FMaxInterLine dimension gt Maximum interline spacing lt FMaxInterPgf dimension gt Maximum interparagraph spacing lt Notes gt Defines a footnote see Notes statemen
421. when FrameMaker generates a MIF file used by the FDK client and should not be used by filters lt Font gt Changes font as needed see PgfFont and Font statements on page 63 lt Para gt Footnote text see Para statement next lt Para gt Additional statements as needed End of FNote statement Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 121 MIF Document Statements lt FNote gt Additional statements as needed End of Notes statement Usage Within the document text footnotes are referred to with the lt FNote ID gt statement where ID is the ID specified in the corresponding FNote statement See ParaLine statement on page 121 Para statement The Para statement defines a paragraph It can appear in a Text Flow FNote CellContent or Tbl1Tit leContent statement In simple MIF files without page or document statements such as the hello mif sample file the Para statement can also appear at the top level It usually consists of a list of embedded ParaLine statements that contain the document text Syntax lt Para lt Unique ID gt ID persistent across sessions assigned when FrameMaker generates a MIF file used by the FDK client and should not be used by filters lt PgfTag tagstring gt Applies format from Paragraph Catalog lt Pgf gt Sets current paragraph format see page 58 lt PgfNumString string gt Paragraph numb
422. where identifies a hexadecimal representation of a character and H H is the hexadecimal value for the character For example use 23 to represent the char acter Zero value hex codes 00 are illegal For more information see PDF Document Info on page 82 lt Value string gt A string of up to 255 ASCII characters that represents the value of a Doc ument Info field because a single MIF string contains no more than 255 ASCII characters you can use more than one Value statement for a given Key A Value can include Unicode characters represent Unicode characters via amp xHHHH where amp x opens the character code the char acter closes the character code and HH HH areas many hexadecimal values as are required to represent the character For more information see PDF Document Info on page 82 End of PDFDocInfo statement Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 97 MIF Document Statements lt DocFileInfo gt Specifies the same information that appears in lt PDFDocInfo gt except it expresses these values as encoded data You should not try to edit this data DocFileInfo also represents the values of the default fields for Cre ator Creation Date andMetaData Date For more information see Document File Info on page 82 lt encoded gt XMP information as encoded data which is generated by FrameMaker This information corresponds to the values set in the File In
423. with a document but with FrameMaker itself Each FrameMaker document contains indexes to FrameMaker patterns You cannot define document patterns in MIF you can only specify the values 0 15 However you can customize a UNIX or Windows version of FrameMaker to use patterns that differ from the standard set For information see the online manuals Customizing FrameMaker for UNIX and Working on Multiple Platforms for Windows Values for the Angle and ReRotateAngle statements The Angle statement specifies the number of degrees by which an object is rotated before it is printed or displayed In a FrameMaker document you can rotate an object in either a counterclockwise or clockwise direction In a MIF file the rotation angle is always measured in a counterclockwise direction An object without an Angle statement has an angle of 0 degrees If an object has a ReRotateAngle statement it specifies the angle to use when Esc g 0 zero is used to return the object to a previous rotation angle An object with a ReRotateAngle statement must have an angle of 0 degrees Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 104 MIF Document Statements The Angle and ReRotateAngle statements are mutually exclusive When the MIF interpreter reads an Angle statement with a nonzero value it sets the value of the ReRotateAngle statement to 0 When it reads a ReRotate Angle statement with a nonzero value it sets Angle to 0 Thus if an object has both statements the MIF interp
424. ws The samples directory where MIF Reference is installed Text example This example shows a simple text file and the MIF file that describes it If you are writing a filter program to convert text files to MIF your program should create a similar MIF file The following text file was created with a text editor MIF Maker Interchange Format is a group of statements that describe all text and graphics under stood by FrameMaker in an easily parsed readable text file MIF provides a way to exchange infor mation between FrameMaker and other applications while preserving graphics document structure and format You can write programs that convert graphics or documents into a MIF file and then import the MIF file into a FrameMaker document with the graphics and document formats intact A filter program translated the text file to produce the following MIF file lt MIFFile 7 00 gt Identifies this as a MIF file The macros below are used only for the second paragraph of text to illustrate how they can ease the process of MIF generation define pr lt Para define ep gt define In lt ParaLine lt String define en gt gt First paragraph of text lt Para lt PgfTag gt statement forces a lookup in the document s Paragraph Catalog so you don t have to specify the format 216 Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 217 in detail here lt PgfTag Body gt One
425. x gt x lt MathFullForm pm char x gt realx lt MathFullForm real char x gt x lt MathFullForm rparen char x gt x lt MathFullForm rparen ili char x gt x lt MathFullForm rparen i2i char x gt secx lt MathFullForm sec char x gt sechx lt MathFullForm sech char x gt x lt MathFullForm semicolon char x gt sgnx lt MathFullForm sgn char x gt sinx lt MathFullForm sin char x gt sinhx lt MathFullForm sinh char x gt tanx lt MathFullForm tan char x gt Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 189 MIF Equation Statements Example MathFullForm statement tanhx lt MathFullForm tanh char x gt Xx lt MathFullForm therefore char x gt x lt MathFullForm ucommaf char x gt x lt MathFullForm uequal char x gt x lt MathFullForm upbrace char x gt pee 8x lt MathFullForm var char x gt Binary operators Binary operators have two operand expressions One of the binary operators sn scientific notation has two display formats The following table contains an example of each binary operator with char x as a sample operand Example MathFullForm statement xx lt MathFullForm acmut char x char x gt xex lt MathFullForm bullet char x char x gt x x lt MathFullForm bket char x char x gt 7 lt MathFullForm
426. xpression is not backward compatible Character format statements The following table lists the changes in Font and PgfFont statements MIF 3 00 MIF 4 00 lt FUnderline boolean gt lt FUnderlining FSingle gt lt FDoubleUnderline boolean gt lt FUnderlining FDouble gt lt FNumericUnderline boolean gt lt FUnderlining FNumeric gt Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 246 MIF Compatibility MIF 3 00 MIF 4 00 lt FSupScript boolean gt lt FPosition FSuperscript gt lt FSubScript boolean gt lt FPosition FSubscript gt If your application only reads or writes files for version 4 or later versions of FrameMaker use only the 4 00 state ments If your application reads or writes files for version 3 or previous versions of FrameMaker use only the 3 00 statements Do not use both statements The MIF interpreter always reads the MIF 3 00 statements It writes both 3 00 and 4 00 statements for backward compatibility Object statements The following table lists the changes in graphic object statements see Graphic objects and graphic frames on page 101 MIF 3 00 MIF 4 00 lt Angle 0 90 180 270 gt lt Angle degrees gt lt BRect gt lt ShapeRect gt Text lines text frames imported graphics table cells and equations that are rotated at an angle of 90 180 or 270 degrees retain rotation in earlier versions If these objects are rotated at any other angle they are rotat
427. y pages Each body page is associated with one master page which specifies the number size and placement of the page s text frames and the page background such as headers footers and graphics Untagged background text rame D Z L On body pages you type in a agged L column of a tagged text emplate text s frame rame Untagged background text rame Master page Body page Text frames define the layout of the document s text on a page A text frame can arrange text in one or more columns In MIF a text frame is represented by a Text Rect statement The dimensions of the text frame and the number of columns in the text frame are specified by substatements under the Text Rect statement A text flow describes the text contained in one or more text frames In MIF a text flow is represented by a Text Flow statement The actual text of the document is specified by substatements under the Text Flow statement If the text flow has the autoconnect property if the text flow uses the MIF statement lt TFAutoConnect Yes gt the text flow runs through a series of text frames when you fill up one text frame text continues into the next text frame Most documents have only one text flow although you can create many separate flows Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 32 Using MIF Statements FrameMaker provides a default right master page for single sided documents
428. zontal kerning in percentage on an em a positive value moves characters to the right a negative value moves characters to the left Size of data in bytes 4 Default value default horizontal kerning Example 31 00000004 00008000 for a font kerning of 50 of an em to the right 0 50 31 00000004 FFFF8000 for a font kerning of 50 of an em to the left 0 50 Font vertical kerning 0x32 Specification by data type Metric Description of data Vertical kerning in percentage of an em a positive value moves characters downward a negative value moves characters upward Size of data in bytes Default value 4 default vertical kerning Online manual ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 0 279 FrameVector Facet Format Example 32 00000004 00008000 for a font kerning of 50 of an em downward 0 50 32 00000004 FFFF8000 for a font kerning of 50 of an em upward 0 50 Font word spread value 0x33 Specification by data type Metric Description of data Percentage of spread Size of data in bytes 4 Default value default word spread Example 33 00000004 00008000 for a word spread of 50 0 50 33 00000004 FFFF8000 for a word spread of 50 0 50 Specifications of object op codes This section describes each object op code Op codes are listed by number and description The op code number is shown in parentheses Ellipse 0x80

MIF Reference Online Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents